0202

Operations & Maintenance Manual
Manual P/N 571100-0202
MODEL 1100
CAPTURE-EFFECT
LOCALIZER SYSTEM
Equipment Part Number 001100-0202 (Dual)
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND SUCH

INFORMATION MAY NOT BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS FOR ANY
PURPOSES WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM
AIRPORT SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, INC.
Original Issue January 1995
Copyright, Airport Systems International, Inc., 1995

11300 West 89th Street
Overland Park, KS U.S.A. 66214
THIS SHEET INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Airport Systems International, Inc.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page No. Issue Page No. Issue
Title January, 1995 10-1 January, 1995

Blank January, 1995 10-2 Blank January, 1995
Effective Pages January, 1995 11-1 thru 11-62 January, 1995
Blank January, 1995
Record of Revisions January, 1995
Blank January, 1995
Safety Summary January, 1995
Warranty January, 1995
i thru xvi January, 1995
1-1 thru 1-13 January, 1995
14 Blank January, 1995
2-30 Blank January, 1995

Overland Park, KS U.S.A. 66214
Rev. - January, 1995 Effective Pages 1

Effective Pages 2 Rev. - January, 1995

RECORD OF REVISIONS
+)))))))0)))))))))))))))0)))))))))0)))))))0))))))))))))))0)))))))))),
* Page * Revision *Insertion*Page * Revision *Insertion *
*Number /))))))))0))))))1 Date *Number /)))))))0))))))1 Date *
* * Level * Date * * * Level * Date * *
G4444444P44444444P444444P444444444P4444444P4444444P444444P4444444444I
* All * - * 1/95 * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
/)))))))3))))))))3))))))3)))))))))3)))))))3)))))))3))))))3))))))))))1
* * * * * * * * *
.)))))))2))))))))2))))))2)))))))))2)))))))2)))))))2))))))2))))))))))-
Rev. - January, 1995 Record of Revision 1

Record of Revision 2 Rev. - January, 1995

MODEL 1100 CAPTURE-EFFECT LOCALIZER
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedures and therefore do
not appear elsewhere in this publication. These are recommended precautions that personnel must
understand and apply them during many phases of operation and maintenance.
ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES PRECAUTIONS
Since most modules used in all models of equipment have Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive devices
included in them, all modules should be considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Handling in the field
shall be the same as in the factory. Each system is shipped with a wrist strap that must be worn while
maintaining the equipment. The wrist strap shall be fastened to the equipment chassis either in the
designated plug-in or attached to the equipment chassis with the alligator clip. The wrist strap must be used
before any modules are removed from the equipment and at all times while handling the modules until they
are placed in a protective environment such as an anti-static bag. Modules or boards must not be placed on
any non-conducting surface such as wooden work benches, painted metal work benches, plastics, or
technical manuals. Any work surface to be used must have a conducting mat placed on it and attached to
earth ground. The mat and additional wrist straps can be obtained from Airport Systems International, Inc.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
Operating personnel must at all times observe all safety regulations. Under no circumstances should any
person remove any protective covers that expose lethal voltages. Do not replace components or make
adjustments inside the equipment with primary power supply turned on. Under certain conditions,
dangerous potentials may exist when the power is in the off position, due to charges retained by capacitors.
To avoid casualties, always remove power and allow time for the capacitors to discharge before touching
it.
DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE
Under no circumstances should any person reach into or enter the enclosure for the purpose of servicing or
adjusting the equipment except in the presence of someone who is capable of rendering aid.
RESUSCITATION
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation.
The equipment is supplied by Airport Systems International, Inc. For replacement parts and repair service,
contact Airport Systems International, Inc.
HOW TO ORDER REPLACEMENT PARTS
When ordering replacement parts, you should direct your order as indicated below and furnish the following
information insofar as applicable. To enable us to give better replacement service, please be sure to give
us complete information.
INFORMATION REQUIRED
1. Airport Systems International, Inc. model number, type and serial number of equipment.
2. Unit sub-assembly number (where applicable).
3. Item or reference symbol number from parts list or schematic.
4. Airport Systems International, Inc. part number and description.
5. Manufacturer's code, name and part number (where applicable).
6. Quantity of each replacement part required.
CORRESPONDENCE/SHIPPING ADDRESS

Overland Park, Kansas 66214
U.S.A.
COMMUNICATIONS
Telephone: 913/492-0861
Telex: 49610240 Airport Sys Int
Fax: 913/492-0870

MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer warrants to the original purchaser, subject to the limitations and exclusions stated
below, that all mechanical and electrical parts of products which it manufactures (the "Products") will be
free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of (i) one year from the date of installation or (ii)
eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment, whichever first occurs (the "Warranty Period").
B. If the Customer believes a Product is defective, notice thereof shall be provided to the Manufacturer's
Customer Service Department at the address provided on the cover page and (if applicable) to the selling
Distributor. A defect in materials and workmanship covered by this warranty shall be deemed to have occurred
only if, and as of the time when, the Manufacturer is notified in writing by the Customer, within the Warranty
Period, that the Product has become defective, and the Manufacturer's personnel verify that the said Product,
in fact, does not comply with the warranty provided hereunder and it is determined that:
(i) The Products, during the entire Warranty Period, have been operated within normal service conditions
recommended by the Manufacturer and recognized in the industry, and
(ii) The Products have been installed and adjusted according the Manufacturer's procedures as stated
in the Instruction Manual or other instructions supplied in writing by the Manufacturer.
C. Failures caused by lightning or other acts of God, or power surges, are not considered to be defects
in materials and workmanship and are not covered under this warranty. Routine maintenance and calibration
are also not considered to be defects in materials and workmanship and are not covered under this warranty,
Any change, modification or alteration of the Manufacturer's Products not specifically authorized by the
Manufacturer will void this warranty.
D. Any circuit board or module returned to the factory for warranty coverage, must be enclosed in an
electrostatic sensitive device (ESD) protective wrapping. If circuit board or module is not received in an
ESD protective wrap, any and all warranty will be null and void.
E. If it is determined that the conditions for warranty coverage, as described above, have been satisfied,
the Manufacturer shall repair or replace the defective Products or parts thereof in accordance with the following
procedures:
(i) Customer will contact the Manufacturer's Customer Service Department which will issue the Customer
a Return Authorization (RA) number.
(ii) The component, defective part, or Product, as appropriate, shall be returned to the Manufacturer
for inspection, freight prepaid by the Customer. The RA number must be clearly displayed on the
exterior of the shipping container. No shipments will be accepted without a RA number. All customs
duties, fees, etc. will be paid by the Customer.

MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
(Cont)
(iii) If, upon inspection, it is determined by Manufacturer's personnel that the Product or component
thereof is indeed defective and covered by this warranty, then Manufacturer, at its option, may either
repair the Product or defective component thereof and return the same to the Customer or ship a
replacement for the defective Product or part thereof, freight paid. All customs duties, fees, etc. will
be paid by the Customer. The Product or component thereof will be returned to the customer utilizing
a shipping mode similar to that used by Customer to ship the same to the Manufacturer.
(iv) If, upon inspection by Manufacturer, it is determined that the Product or component thereof was
not defective or was not covered by this warranty, then the cost of all of Manufacturer's inspections
and the return shipping charges will be charged to Customer.
F. The Manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications and alterations to Products without obligation
to install such improvements on, in, or in place of theretofore manufactured Products of Manufacturer.
G. Manufacturer does not warranty any Products, components, subassemblies, or parts not of its own
manufacture. Manufacturer hereby transfers to Customer any and all warranties (if any) which it receives
from its suppliers.
H. This warranty applies only to the original purchaser and, unless Customer receives the express written
consent of an officer of Manufacturer, this warranty may not be assigned, transferred, or conveyed to any
third party, even if the third party is a bona a fide purchaser of the Products.
I. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED

OR IMPLIED, WHETHER STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING AND IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE MANUFACTURER BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, COLLATERAL, PUNITIVE,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF CONTRACT,
TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHER PRODUCTS LIABILITY THEORY.
J. CUSTOMER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF THE WARRANTY SHALL BE

THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCTS BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PROVIDED
HEREIN, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE MANUFACTURER BE REQUIRED TO INCUR COSTS
FOR THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PRODUCT IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE
PRICE OF SUCH PRODUCT, PLUS ANY TRANSPORTATION CHARGES ACTUALLY PAID
ATTRIBUTABLE TO SUCH PRODUCTS.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1. GENERAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS
Paragraph Description Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Electronic Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1.1 Status Panel Assembly (1A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.1.1.1 Phaser Assembly (1A1A2/1A1A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.1.1.2 Display CCA (1A1A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.1.2 Modulator Assembly (1A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.1.3 Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.1.4 Course Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.5 Course Audio Generator CCA (1A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.6 RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.7 Low Voltage Power Supply CCA (1A10/1A26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.8 Serial I/O CCA (1A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.9 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1.10 Analog I/O CCA (1A13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1.11 VIA D/A CCA (1A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1.12 Clearance Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1.13 Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1.14 Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1.15 Power Panel Assembly (1A27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.1.1.15.1 Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.1.1.15.2 Input Power Monitor/Watchdog CCA (1A27A2/1A27A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.1.1.16 Main Power Supply Assembly (1A29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.1.1.17 ILS Current Limiter (1A31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.1.1.18 Power Sensor Assembly (1A34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.2 Transfer Control Unit (TCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.2.1 Transfer Logic CCA (3A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.2.2 ILS Control Interface CCA (3A4/3A5) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.2.3 Transient Suppressor Assembly (3A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4 EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-6 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
SECTION 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 SIMPLIFIED THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Rev. - January, 1995 i

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)
SECTION 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (Cont)
2.2.1 Capture-Effect Localizer Station Simplified Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.1 Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) Assembly (030579-0001) (1A6/1A22) . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.1.1 Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) (1A6A1/1A22A1) Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.1.1.2 Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) (1A6A1/1A22A1) Detailed Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3.1.1.3 RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.1.1.4 RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) Detailed Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.2 Power Amplifier (1A7/1A23) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.3 Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24) Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.4 Modulator Assembly (1A5) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.5 RF Control Assembly (1A9/1A25) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.3.6 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.3.7 Analog I/O CCA (1A13/1A17) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.3.8 VIA D/A CCA (1A14/1A18) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.3.9 Serial I/O CCA (1A11/1A15) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.3.10 Power Panel (1A27) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.3.10.1 Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.3.10.2 Input Power Monitor/Watchdog (1A27A2/1A27A3) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.11 Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.12 Phaser (1A3/1A1A4) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.3.13 Display CCA (1A1A1/1A1A4) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.3.14 ILS Current Limiter (1A31) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.3.15 Power Sensor Assembly (1A34) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.3.16 Synthesizer Power Coupler Module (1A35/1A36) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.3.17 Transfer Control Unit Simplified Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.3.17.1 Transfer Control Unit (TCU) Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.3.17.2 Transfer Logic CCA (3A1) Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.3.17.3 Transient Suppressor Assembly (3A2) Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.3.17.4 Shelter Temperature Sensor Assembly (3A3) Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.3.17.5 ILS Control Interface CCA Block Diagram Theory (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.3.17.6 ILS Control Interface CCA (012713-1001) Detailed Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
SECTION 3. OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION USING CONTROL CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
ii Rev. - January, 1995

SECTION 3. OPERATION (Cont)
3.3.1 Turn-on Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3.2 Log-on Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.3 Sign-on Procedure Using the RMM Video Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.4 Entering System in FORTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.5 Changing Station Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.6 Changing the Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.7 Changing Forth Mode Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.8 Changing the Station Identifier Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.9 Changing the Call-out Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.10 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.11 Set Bypass Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 MODEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5 Executive and Maintenance Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.6 System Delay Time Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.7 Numeric Listing of Command Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.8 CONTROL CODE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.8.1 Course CSB Power Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.8.2 Clearance CSB Power Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.8.3 Course CSB - Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.8.4 Clearance CSB - Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.8.5 Course SBO Power Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.8.6 Clearance SBO Power Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.8.7 Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.8 Antenna Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.9 System Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.10 System Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.8.11 System Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.8.12 RF Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.8.12.1 Course Signal RF Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.8.12.2 Clearance Signal RF Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.8.13 Centerline Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.8.13.1 Course Signal Centerline Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.8.13.2 Clearance Signal Centerline Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.8.14 Width Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.8.14.1 Course Signal Width Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.8.14.2 Clearance Signal Width Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.8.15 Ident Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.15.1 Course Signal Ident Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Rev. - January, 1995 iii

SECTION 3. OPERATION (Cont)
3.8.15.2 Clearance Signal Ident Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

3.8.16 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.8.16.1 Course Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.8.16.2 Clearance Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.8.17 Voltage and Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.8.18 Power Amplifier Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.8.18.1 Course Signal Power Amplifier Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.8.18.2 Clearance Signal Power Amplifier Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.8.19 Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.8.20 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.8.21 Far Field/Near Field Monitor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
SECTION 4. STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 INTERCONNECTION CABLE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4 REMOTE MONITOR ALARM THRESHOLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SECTION 5. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 PERFORMANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 OTHER ONSITE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 PERFORMANCE CHECK PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1 Remote Maintenance Monitor Performance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1.1 Remote Maintenance Monitor Operation Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Remote Shutdown/Restart Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.3 Monitor Alarm Point Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.4 CSB Modulation Percentage Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.2.5 Ident Modulation Percentage Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2.6 Voltage and Current Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
iv Rev. - January, 1995

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (Cont)
6.2.7 RF Amplifier Power Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6.2.8 Field Monitor Levels Performance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.2.8.1 Read/Calibrate Course Monitor Offset - Course System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.2.8.2 Read/Calibrate Width Monitor Offset - Course System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.2.8.3 Read/Calibrate Course Monitor Offset - Clearance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.2.8.4 Read/Calibrate Width Monitor Offset - Clearance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.8.5 Total % Modulation (SDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.8.6 1020 Hz Ident Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.8.7 90 Hz Modulation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.9 Transmitter Frequency Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.9.1 Frequency Performance Check Using Internal Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.9.2 Frequency Performance Check Using External Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.2.10 Internal Test Equipment Calibration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.2.11 Voltage Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.2.11.1 AC Voltmeter Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.2.11.2 DC Voltmeter Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.2.12 Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26) Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.2.13 Battery Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.2.13.1 Lead-Acid Battery Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.2.13.2 Gel-Cell Battery Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.3 OTHER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.1 Ground Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.2 Transmission Line Insulation Resistance Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.3 Sideband Null Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.4 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.1 Calibration Checks of Internal Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.2 RF Power Readings Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.3 Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4.4 Modulation Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.4.5 DME Alarm Status Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.4.5.1 Setting DME Alarm Status Voltage for DME/Localizer Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.4.5.2 Setting DME Alarm Status Voltage for Localizer Only Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.4.6 Localizer Shelter Temperature Sensor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.6.1 Setting Shelter Temperature Scaling Factors for Systems Without
Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.6.2 Setting the Shelter Temperature Scaling Factor for Systems With
Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.4.7 Replacing Microprocessor CCA (1A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Rev. - January, 1995 v

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (Cont)
6.4.7.1 Configuring Microprocessor CCA's for Main or Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6.4.7.2 Configuring Microprocessor CCA's for System Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.4.8 Setting the CSB Modulation Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.4.9 Setting the AC Voltage Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.4.10 Setting the DC Voltage Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.4.11 Setting the Primary DC Current Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.4.12 Setting the Power Amplifier (PA) DC Current Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.4.13 Setting Battery Current Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.4.14 Setting the Battery Charge Current Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.4.15 Setting the CSB Forward Power Scale Factor and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6.4.16 Setting the CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.4.17 Setting the SBO Forward Power Scale Factor and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6.4.18 Setting the SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.4.19 Setting the Total Modulation % Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6.4.20 Setting RF Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.4.21 Set Automatic Restart Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.4.22 Set Alarm Shutdown Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.4.23 Setting Transfer Delay Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.4.24 Start-Up Delay Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.4.25 Enter/Exit Phase Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
6.4.26 +28 Vdc Power Supply (1A29) Output Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.4.27 Placing System in Forth Mode by Removing Microprocessor CCA Jumper . . . . . . . 6-68
6.4.28 Determining Unknown Forth Mode Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
SECTION 7. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 ON-SITE CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3.1 General Troubleshooting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 OFF-SITE REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5 OVERHAUL, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.6 PACKING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
SECTION 8. PARTS LIST
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
vi Rev. - January, 1995

SECTION 9. INSTALLATION, INTEGRATION, AND CHECKOUT (Cont)
9.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2 SITE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.3 UNPACKING AND REPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.3.1 Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.4 INPUT REQUIREMENT SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.5.1 Installation Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.5.2 Installation Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.5.3 Shelter Foundation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5.4 Shelter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5.5 Shelter Grounding Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5.6 Exterior Interface Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5.7 Air Conditioner Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.8 Flexible Conduit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.9 Localizer Transmitter Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.10 Battery Backup Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.11 Primary AC Power Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.12 Temperature Sensor Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.13 LPD Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.5.14 Foamflex RF Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.5.15 Audio Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.16 Localizer to Transfer Control Unit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.17 Localizer/DME Keying Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.5.18 Localizer Shelter to Antenna Array Electric Power Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.5.19 Localizer Shelter to Antenna Array Ground Wire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.5.20 Antenna Cables to Distribution Unit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.6 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.7 INITIAL START-UP AND PRELIMINARY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.7.1 Input Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.7.2 Power Supply for 28 Vdc Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.7.3 Low Voltage Power Supply Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.7.4 Installing Modules in Transmitter Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.7.4.1 Synthesizer Assembly (1A6/1A22) Installation and Frequency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.7.4.2 Serial I/O CCA (1A11) Installation and Jumper Location Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.7.4.3 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Installation and Jumper Location Check . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.7.4.4 Analog I/O CCA (1A13) Installation and Jumper Location Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.7.4.5 VIA D/A Converter CCA (1A14) Installation and Jumper Location Check . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.7.4.6 Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24) Installation and Identification
Code Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Rev. - January, 1995 vii

SECTION 9. INSTALLATION, INTEGRATION, AND CHECKOUT (Cont)
9.7.4.7 Installation of Remaining Modules in Transmitter Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

9.7.5 Video Terminal Port Baud Rate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.7.5.1 Video Terminal Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.7.5.2 Modem Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.7.6 Initial Turn-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.7.6.1 Initial Course Turn-On Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.7.6.2 Initial Clearance Turn-On Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.7.7 Setting Modulation Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.7.7.1 Setting Course Modulation Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.7.7.2 Setting Clearance Modulation Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.7.8 Audio Generator SBO Output Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.7.9 Modulation Balance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.7.10 RF Forward Power, Reflected RF Power, and VSWR Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.7.11 Modulation Percentage and Keying Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.7.12 Preliminary Antenna Feedcable Length Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.7.13 Antenna Monitor Feedcable Length Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
9.7.14 Cutting In Antenna Nulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
9.7.15 System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9.7.15.1 Course System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9.7.15.2 Clearance System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
9.7.16 Cutting-In The Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
9.7.17 Monitor Combining Unit and Detector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.7.18 Setting Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
9.7.19 Setting/Checking Station Alarm Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
9.7.19.1 Setting/Checking Alarm Delay, Auto-Restart and Start-up Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
9.7.19.2 Setting/Checking Alarm Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9.8 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
SECTION 10. SOFTWARE
10.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SECTION 11. TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA
11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
viii Rev. - January, 1995

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Description Page
1-0 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer, Family Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

1-1 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Station, Shelter Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Localizer Signal Lobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 Capture-Effect Localizer Transfer Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2-1 Course Radiation Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-2 Clearance Radiation Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3 Direct Digital Synthesizer, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4 RF Amplifier CCA, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-5 ILS Control Interface CCA, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
3-1 Capture-Effect Localizer Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-2 Antenna Fault Data Word for Capture-Effect Localizer Antenna Array . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-3 Example of Display Monitor Readings (140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-4 Example of Display All Readings (141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
6-1 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

6-2 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
9-1 Typical Capture-Effect Localizer Siting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9-2 Typical Shelter Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-3 Typical Trenching Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9-4 Shelter Grounding Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9-5 Typical Capture-Effect Localizer Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-6 Foamflex RF Connector Installation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9-7 Field Monitor/Transmitter Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-8 Capture-Effect Localizer Battery and Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9-9 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9-10 Synthesizer Assembly (1A6/1A22) Switch S1 Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-11 Serial I/O (1A11) CCA Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9-12 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9-13 Analog I/O CCA (1A13) Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9-14 VIA D/A Converter CCA (1A14) Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-15 Audio Generator (1A8/1A24) Assembly Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9-16 Normal SBO Waveform at TP1 of 1A7/1A23 Power Amplifier Assembly . . . . . . . . 9-39
9-17 Clipped SBO Waveform at TP1 of 1A7/1A23 Power Amplifier Assembly
1A8/1A24R66 is Misadjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9-18 Spiked SBO Waveform at TP1 of 1A7/1A23 Power Amplifier Assembly
1A8/1A24R66 is Misadjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9-19 Modulator (1A5) Assembly Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Rev. - January, 1995 ix

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont)
Figure Description Page
9-20 Normal SBO Waveform at TP2 of 1A5 Modulator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

9-21 Potentiometer 1A8/1A24R67 Misadjusted Resulting in Bounce in
SBO Waveform at TP2 of 1A5 Modulator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9-22 Normal Kissing Pattern (0 DDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9-23 90 Hz Modulation is more than 150 Hz Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9-24 150 Hz Modulation is more than 90 Hz Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9-25 Cable Length Adjustment Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
11-1 Capture Effect Localizer, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2 Capture-Effect Localizer Transmitter, Interconnection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11-3 Transfer Control Unit, Interconnection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11-4 Synthesizer (1A6/1A22), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11-5 Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11-6 Synthesizer Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11-7 Power Amplifier (1A7/1A23), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-8 Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11-9 Modulator Assembly (1A5), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
11-10 RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11-11 Microprocessor (1A12), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11-12 Analog I/O CCA (1A13), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11-13 VIA D/A CCA (1A14), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11-14 Serial I/O CCA (1A11), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
11-15 Power Panel Assembly (1A27), Schematic Diagram (Sheet 3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11-16 Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11-17 Input Power Monitor/Watchdog (1A27A2), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
11-18 Low-Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11-19 Phaser Assembly (1A3/1A4), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
11-20 Display CCA (1A1A1), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
11-21 Current Limiter (1A31), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11-22 Power Sensor Assembly (1A34), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
11-23 Synthesizer Coupler Module (1A35/1A36), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
11-24 ILS Control Interface (3A4/3A5), Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
11-25 Transfer Logic CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
11-26 Exterior Interface Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
11-27 Temperature Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
11-28 Localizer/TCU Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
11-29 Battery Back-up Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
11-30 Transmitter Hinge Assembly, Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
x Rev. - January, 1995

LIST OF TABLES
Table No. Description Page
1-1 Equipment Specification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1-2 Equipment and Accessories Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-3 Equipment Required But Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-4 Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2-1 Course Amplitude and Phasing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-2 Clearance Amplitude and Phasing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3-1 Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-2 Control Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-3 Control Codes Used in the Capture-Effect Localizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4 Control Codes Used In The Capture-Effect Localizer (By Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4-1 System Standards and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-2 Signal Standards and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 Remote Monitor Alarm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
5-1 Performance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-2 Other Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6-1 Typical Remote Maintenance Monitor Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-2 Voltage and Current Command Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
7-1 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-2 Capture-Effect Localizer On-Site Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
8-1 Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer System Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2 Transmitter Hinge Assembly Installation Kit (470288-0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-3 Exterior Interface Kit, Capture-Effect Localizer (470331-0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-4 Offset Cable Kit 350 ft. (470071-0006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-5 Interior Interface Box Kit (470246-0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-6 Power Kit (470281-0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-7 Audio Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9-8 Frequency Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-9 Ident Keyer Codes (Audio Generator 1A8/1A24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
11-1 Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Rev. - January, 1995 xi

xii Rev. - January, 1995

SECTION 1. GENERAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS
1.1 INTRODUCTION.- This operation and maintenance manual provides the data required to install,
operate, and maintain the Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Equipment supplied by Airport Systems
International, Inc., Overland Park, Kansas, U.S.A. The capture-effect localizer antenna is not covered in this
manual. For information on the antenna, refer to capture-effect localizer antenna manual part no. 571100-
0009.
In this section there is an equipment description including illustrations and equipment specification data,
a table of equipment and accessories supplied, a table of equipment required but not supplied, and a table
of optional equipment.
1.2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION.- The Model 1100 capture-effect localizer (figure 1-1) as part of an
Instrument Landing System (ILS) provides azimuthal (horizontal) guidance to aircraft during instrument
landings.
The Model 1100 capture-effect localizer can be mounted on a wall inside a shelter or outside in a weather-
tight equipment cabinet. It is self-monitoring, requires low power, has accurate and stable frequencies, and
requires little maintenance. System status can be checked from the control tower or other remote facility
through the remote maintenance monitor. A built-in charging circuit and battery backup extend operation
of the localizer if AC power should fail. Frequency generation is by synthesis, requiring only one crystal
to produce the 40 localizer channels.
The capture-effect localizer is typically installed at sites where irregular terrain features preclude the use of
sideband reference or V-ring configurations. The capture-effect localizer is typically installed about 1,000
feet from the stop end of the runway with the antenna array located on the extended runway centerline. The
equipment shelter is located off to one side, approximately 250 ft. from the centerline. The capture-effect
localizer utilizes a 14 element Log Periodic Dipole (LPD) arrays. This array is directional and provides front
course only.
Rev. - January, 1995 1-1

Figure 1-1. Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Station, Shelter Interior View.
The capture effect localizer transmits two horizontally polarized signals along the runway as shown in figure
1-2. This two frequency system allows a narrow course pattern to minimize the effects of reflections on the
extended centerline path, with the clearance array providing proper coverage information to the ±35 degree
points. The narrow pattern is broadcast by the course transmitter, and is intended to provide guidance along
the extended runway centerline, and out to a few degrees either side of centerline. The broad pattern is
broadcast by the clearance transmitter at a frequency 8 kHz below the course transmitter, and is used to
provide coverage outside of the narrow course pattern out to ±35 degrees from runway centerline.
1-2 Rev. - January, 1995

Figure 1-2. Localizer Signal Lobes.
The radiated patterns provide course guidance in the horizontal plane to approaching aircraft. Frequencies
of 90 Hz and 150 Hz are used to modulate the RF carriers and thus identify the right and left of the runway
centerline. The detected signal is predominantly 90 Hz to the left of runway centerline (as seen by an
approaching aircraft) and predominantly 150 Hz to the right of runway centerline. The localizer signal DDM
(difference in depth of modulation) is displayed on aircraft instruments such as a Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI).
1.2.1 Electronic Equipment Cabinet.- Refer to figure 1-3. The capture-effect localizer transmitter is a
modified version of the standard localizer transmitter. In addition to the standard CSB/SBO primary course
transmitter, a Clearance transmitter is added to the cabinet utilizing components identical to those used in
a standard transmitter. Both transmitters are controlled and monitored by the Microprocessor Circuit Card
Assembly (CCA) (1A12). The 90 and 150 Hz navigation tones of the clearance transmitter are
synchronously generated with the 90 and 150 Hz tones of the course transmitter, and the Clearance
Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) is slaved to the master oscillator in the Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6),
and is offset 8 kHz below the course transmitter's frequency.
The capture effect localizer equipment features direct digital frequency synthesizers for accurate and stable
channel spacing. Forty channel operation is achieved with a single crystal. The localizer transmitter can
be controlled and monitored locally or from remote locations over dedicated or switched telephone lines.
Ease of maintenance is enhanced with built in test equipment consisting of a frequency counter, digital
voltmeter, transmitter forward and reflected power metering, and a transmitter voltage and current monitor.
Battery backup extends operation of the station during failure of main ac power.

Figure 1-3. Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer Cabinet.
In the capture-effect localizer equipment configuration, essentially two separately functional single capture-
effect localizers are utilized. Communication between the two transmitters is accomplished through the
Transfer Control Unit (TCU) and interconnecting cables. The Microprocessor CCAs allows each station
to monitor the status of the other station and to control the CSB and SBO transfer switches. One station is
identified in software as primary and the other as the backup station. The field monitor/control unit for the
dual localizer has two microprocessors, one that communicates with station equipment no. 1 and one that
communicates with station equipment no. 2. The field processors share a common set of signal transducers
for antenna fault, antenna misalignment, course and width data.

1.2.1.1 Status Panel Assembly (1A1).- The Status Panel Assembly is located at the top of the equipment
cabinet and contains three visual indicators: NORM (green), BYPASS (amber), and ALARM (red). The
NORM indicator is illuminated when the localizer transmitter equipment is operating normally. The NORM
indicator flashes when the equipment is in the standby mode of operation. The BYPASS indicator
illuminates when the system is in the bypass mode of operation. The system is still being monitored, but
will not shutdown if an alarm is detected. The ALARM indicator illuminates when a fault is detected in one
of the monitored circuits.
1.2.1.1.1 Phaser Assembly (1A1A2/1A1A3).- The Phaser Assembly is located behind the Status Panel and
is connected in the SBO RF output line. The Phaser Assembly is used to adjust the phase to the SBO signal
relative to the CSB signal. Each Phaser Assembly has a phaser setting scale and a lockable dial for locking
the phase setting into place.
1.2.1.1.2 Display CCA (1A1A1).- The Display CCA is attached to the rear side of the Status Panel
Assembly. It receives station status information from the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) and contains drive
circuitry for the NORM (green), BYPASS (amber), and ALARM (red) station status indicators.
1.2.1.2 Modulator Assembly (1A5).- The Modulator Assembly provides automatic output leveling of the
RF amplifier circuits in the Course and Clearance Power Amplifier Assemblies. The Modulator Assembly
(1A5) also provides a RF level reference and an analog of the modulated audio tones for modulation
percentage calculations by the Microprocessor CCA (1A12). This Modulator Assembly contains two (2)
CCAs, the 1A5A1 and the 1A5A2. Modulator CCA (1A5A1) provides automatic output leveling for the
Course Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7) and Modulator CCA (1A5A2) provides automatic output leveling
for the Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23). Each Modulator CCA measures 2-3/4 x 12 inches
and is attached to an aluminum heat sink assembly via use of six (6) hexagon standoffs. Each Modulator
CCA connects to the main wiring harness via use of a 25 pin D-shell connector.
1.2.1.3 Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6).- The Course Synthesizer Assembly generates the carrier
frequencies of 108 to 112 MHz in 150 kHz increments. It is frequency-locked to the Clearance Synthesizer
Assembly (1A22). The Course Synthesizer Assembly consists of two circuit card assemblies (CCAs): the
Direct Digital Synthesizer (1A6A1) and the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2). DIP switches within the
Synthesizer Assembly are used to program it the proper output frequency as well as configure it for Course
or Clearance operation. Dimensions of the assembly are 2-1/4 x 8 x 8-1/2 inches less connectors and guide.
1.2.1.4 Course Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7).- The Course RF Power Amplifier Assembly amplifies
the Course RF signal from the Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6) to the level necessary for radiation by
the antennae. In addition, the SBO and CSB signals are modulated in this assembly. Dimensions are 2-1/4
x 8 x 8-1/2 inches less connectors.

1.2.1.5 Course Audio Generator CCA (1A8).- The 90 and 150 Hz audio signals used to create upper and
lower sidebands and the 1020 Hz identification tone are generated on this CCA. The identification Keyer
is also located on this CCA. The Course Audio Generator CCA (1A8) produces a 7200 Hz signal which is
used in the generation of the 150 Hz Clearance navigation tone. The 7200 Hz signal is also utilized by the
Course Audio Generator CCA (1A24) to keep the Clearance 90 and 150 Hz phase-locked to the CSB 90 and
150 Hz audio. This CCA measures 8-1/2 x 8-3/4 inches and connects to the main wiring harness through
a 36 pin edge connector.
1.2.1.6 RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25).- The RF Control CCA provides the antenna/dummy load switching
interface between the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) and the Power Amplifier Assemblies. RF Control CCA
(1A9) controls operation of the Course Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7) and RF Control CCA (1A25)
controls operation of the Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23) Additional circuits on the RF Control
CCA filter and amplify the RF power analogs prior to Analog-to-Digital conversion. This CCA measures
are 8-1/2 x 8-3/4 inches and connects to the main wiring harness through a 36 pin edge connector.
1.2.1.7 Low Voltage Power Supply CCA (1A10/1A26).- The Low Voltage Power Supply provides
regulated +12, -12, and +5 Vdc for the localizer transmitter. Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10) is located
on the upper card cage shelf on the right side of the transmitter cabinet and provides regulated voltage for
the Course transmitter. Low Voltage Power Supply (1A26) is located on the lower card cage shelf on the
right side of the transmitter cabinet and provides regulated voltages for the Clearance transmitter. Each Low
Voltage Power Supply CCA measures 8-1/2 inches tall, 1-13/16 inches wide, and 8-3/4 inches deep. The
Low Voltage Power Supply has 5 test points that allow access for monitoring input and output voltages. It
has a 36 pin edge connector that connects to the main wiring harness.
1.2.1.8 Serial I/O CCA (1A11).- The Serial I/O CCA is the transmitter part of the RS-232 monitor
interface. Dimensions are 3-5/8 x 6-1/4 inches. It connects to the main wiring harness through a sixty-four
(64) pin, eight (8) pin, and fourteen (14) pin connectors.
1.2.1.9 Microprocessor CCA (1A12).- The transmitter and monitoring system are controlled by the
Microprocessor CCA, which also provides the user interface for control of the Capture-Effect localizer via
a video terminal. The Microprocessor CCA measures 3-5/8 x 6-1/4 inches and connects to the main wiring
harness through a sixty-four (64) pin and 2 sixteen (16) pin connectors.
1.2.1.10 Analog I/O CCA (1A13).- The Analog I/O CCA converts analog signals within the capture-effect
localizer transmitter for maintenance monitoring of internal voltages, currents, power levels, modulation
percentages, and environmental conditions. Serial data transmission between the Analog I/O CCA and an
external communication device is achieved using signals that conform to EIA standard RS-232-C.
Dimensions are 3-5/8 x 6-1/4 inches. It connects to the main wiring harness through a sixty-four (64) pin
and 2 sixteen (16) pin connectors.

1.2.1.11 VIA D/A CCA (1A14).- The VIA D/A CCA provides the interface between the Microprocessor
CCA (1A12) and external digital devices. Dimensions are 3-5/8 x 6-1/4 inches. It connects to the main
wiring harness through a sixty-four (64) pin and 2 twenty (20) pin connectors.
1.2.1.12 Clearance Synthesizer Assembly (1A22).- The Clearance Synthesizer Assembly generates the RF
carrier frequency which is 8 kHz below the carrier frequency of the Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6).
The Clearance Synthesizer is frequency-locked to the Course Synthesizer (1A6). The Synthesizer Assembly
(1A22) consists of two CCAs: the Direct Digital Synthesizer (1A22A1) and the RF Amplifier CCA
(1A22A2). DIP switches within the Synthesizer Assembly are used to program it for the proper output
frequency as well as configure it for Course or Clearance operation. Dimensions of the assembly are 2-1/4
x 8 x 8-1/2 inches less connectors and guide.
1.2.1.13 Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23).- The Clearance RF Power Amplifier Assembly,
amplifies the Clearance RF signal from the Clearance Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) to the level necessary
for radiation by the antennae. The SBO and CSB signals are modulated in this assembly. Dimensions are
2-1/4 x 8 x 8-1/2 inches less connectors.
1.2.1.14 Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24).- The Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24) receives
a 7200 Hz signal from the Course Audio Generator CCA (1A8) which is used to ensure that the 90 and 150
Hz navigation tones are phase-locked to the navigation tones in the Course Audio Generator CCA. The
Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24) also receives the ident audio 1020 Hz tone from the Course Audio
Generator CCA and directs it to control circuitry on the Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24). This
assures synchronization of the ident audio on the Course and Clearance transmitters. Course or Clearance
utilization is determined by positioning circuit jumpers located on the circuit cards. This CCA measures
8-1/2 x 8-3/4 inches and connects to the main wiring harness through a 36 pin edge connector.
1.2.1.15 Power Panel Assembly (1A27).- The Power Panel Assembly is located at the bottom front of the
cabinet. It measures 14-7/8 inches wide, 6-3/4 inches high, and contains the AC and DC system circuit
breakers, a Low Batt Voltage indicator, the LOCAL/REMOTE switch, a 25 pin D-Shell connector, which
connects to the video terminal, a 5 amp fuseholder, and 2 AC outlets. Attached to the backside of the Power
Panel Assembly are the Voltage and Scaling CCA and Input Power Monitor/Watchdog CCA and one 25 pin
D-Shell connector for remote communications.
1.2.1.15.1 Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1).- The Voltage and Scaling CCA scales the station voltages
and currents for measurement and use by the built-in test equipment. Dimensions are 3 x 4-3/4 inches.

1.2.1.15.2 Input Power Monitor/Watchdog CCA (1A27A2/1A27A3).- The Input Power Monitor/Watchdog
CCA monitors the main DC voltage and the Microprocessor CCA. If the DC voltage drops below a
predetermined level or the station operates on batteries for an extended period, this CCA will disconnect the
batteries from the station. Circuits on this CCA also monitor operation of the Microprocessor CCA and
remove power from the Modulator Assembly if the Microprocessor malfunctions. Dimensions are 3 x 4-3/4
inches.
1.2.1.1.16 Main Power Supply Assembly (1A29).- The Main Power Supply Assembly is located at the base
of the equipment cabinet behind the Power Panel Assembly. It converts the input voltage of 115 or 230 Vac
into +28 Vdc.
1.2.1.1.17 ILS Current Limiter (1A31).- ILS Current Limiter protects the Main Power Supply Assembly
(1A29) by limiting its output current. It is located on behind the Power Panel Assembly on the right side
of the transmitter cabinet and measures 5-7/8 inches long and 2 inches tall.
1.2.1.1.18 Power Sensor Assembly (1A34).- The Power Sensor Assembly is located in the transmitter
cabinet behind the Status Panel Assembly and senses forward and reflected powers.
1.2.2 Transfer Control Unit (TCU).- Refer to figure 1-4. The purpose of the TCU is to control system
transfer between dual Capture-Effect Localizer transmitters. It enables one 1100 Capture-Effect transmitter
to operate as the selected main while the second transmitter is in standby status. In the event of failures of
the selected main transmitter, the TCU initiates a transfer to the standby unit. The TCU is a metal enclosure
that measures 30 inches high by 24 inches wide by 8 inches deep. It contains the Transfer Logic CCA, the
RSCU Interface CCA (012713-1001), the Transient Suppressor Assembly, the Transfer Relays, and
associated components to execute system transfer.
1.2.2.1 Transfer Logic CCA (3A1).- Under the direction of the transmitter Microprocessor CCA (1A12),
the Transfer Logic CCA initiates systems transfer. It measures 3-5/8 x 6-1/4 inches and connects to the main
wiring harness through a sixty-four (64) pin and 2 sixteen (16) pin connectors.
1.2.2.2 ILS Control Interface CCA (3A4/3A5) (Optional).- This ILS Control Interface CCA provides the
Remote Status Control Unit (RSCU) with operating status of the TCU for visual display. The ILS Control
Interface also decodes control signals from the RSCU for use within the TCU. It measures 6-1/4 inches long
and 3-15/16 inches tall.
1.2.2.3 Transient Suppressor Assembly (3A2).- All communications with the outside environment passes
through this circuit. The transient suppressor is a protective device that prevents dangerous voltage
potentials from entering the Localizer equipment and damaging vital circuitry within the system.

1.3 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION DATA.- The equipment specification data is listed in table 1-1.
Table 1-1. Equipment Specification Data.
Equipment Manufacturer Airport Systems International, Inc.
Equipment Type Capture-Effect Localizer Station
Model Number 1100
Course CSB Power 15 Watts nominal, adjustable
Course SBO Power 400 mW nominal, adjustable
Clearance CSB Power 15 Watts nominal, adjustable
Clearance SBO Power 400 mW nominal, adjustable
Bandwidth 50 kHz
Frequency Control Synthesized/Crystal
Frequency Stability ±0.002%
Type of Radiation Horizontally polarized

Figure 1-4. Capture-Effect Localizer Transfer Control Unit.

Table 1-1. Equipment Specification Data (Cont).
Antenna Array 14 Element Capture-Effect LPD
Modulation Frequencies 90 Hz, 150 Hz, 1020 Hz
Modulation Depth 40% (nominal) (90+150 Hz)
8% (nominal) 1020 Hz
Remote Status Is used for station control and status monitoring when
Control Unit the ILS Control Interface CCA is installed in the localizer
Dimensions (Cabinet) 48.26 cmW x 31.12 cmD x 106.68 cmH

(19 in.W x 12.25 in.D x 42 in.H)
Weight 54 kg (120 lbs)
Environmental:
Temperature -10E C to 50E C
Relative Humidity 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Altitude 0 to 4000 m MSL (0 to 13,120 ft MSL)
Duty Cycle Continuous, unattended
Primary Power 120/230 Vac, 47-63 Hz, single phase
Standby Power +28 Vdc no-break battery backup system with charger
Power Consumption 255 VA (nominal)

1.4 EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED.- Table 1-2 is a list of equipment and accessories
supplied with the Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer.
Table 1-2. Equipment and Accessories Supplied.
Quantity Nomenclature Part Number
1 Localizer Transmitter Assembly 001100-0202

1 Accessory Kit 470069-0002
1 Temperature Sensor Kit 470078-0000
2 Technical Manual 571100-0202
2 Technical Manual 571100-0009
1 Battery Backup Kit 470057-0001
1 Exterior Interface Box Kit 470331-0001
1 Offset Cable Kit 470071-0006
1 Shelter Mounting Kit 470087-0002
1 Interior Interface Box Kit 470246-0002
1 Power Kit (120 V) 470281-0001
1 Power Kit (240 V) 470281-0002
1 Antenna Array Kit (14 element LPD) 470285-0005
1 Computer Kit with Modem (120 V) 470074-0003
1 Computer Kit with Modem (240 V) 470074-0008
1 Communications Control Unit (CCU) 030341-0002
1 Installation Kit, Transmitter 470288-0001
1 Maintenance Kit, Capture-Effect Loc 470328-0001
1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED.- Table 1-3 is a list of equipment that is not supplied
but is required to make the station operational. Equipment having equivalent characteristics and accuracy
may be substituted.
Table 1-3. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.
Name Suggested Equipment Part No.
Resistor 16 ohm, 100 watt

Multimeter Fluke 77
Wattmeter Bird 43FN
Detecting Element, Directional CPLR-Bird 4274-025 950262-0000
Detecting Element, Directional, 100 mW Bird 430-3 950274-0000
Detecting Element, Directional, 250 mW Bird 430-16 950275-0000
Detecting Element, Directional, 1.0 W Bird 275-1 950276-0000

Table 1-3. Equipment Required But Not Supplied (Cont).
Name Suggested Equipment Part No.
Detecting Element, Directional, 5.0 W CPLR-Bird 5D 950277-0000

Detecting Element, Directional, 25.0 W
Oscilloscope Tektronix 2225
Frequency Counter B & K 1855, to 1.2 GHz
Frequency Counter Fluke 1953A
Portable ILS Receiver Airport Systems 001137-0104
Vector Voltmeter HP8508A option 001 Hewlett Packard 950505-0000
Vector Voltmeter Accessory Kit HP11570A Hewlett Packard 950505-0001
Grounding Clip HP85089A Hewlett Packard 950505-0002
50 Ohm Dummy Loads
RF Signal Generator
Resistor 5.1 k ohm
1-6. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.- Table 1-4 is a list of optional equipment.
Table 1-4. Optional Equipment.
Quantity Nomenclature Part Number
1 Remote Status Monitor (Receiver) (120 V) 001134-0102

1 Remote Status Monitor (Receiver) (240 V) 001134-0104
1 Remote Status/Control System (120 Vac) 001138-0101
1 Remote Status/Control System (240 Vac) 001138-0201
1 Spares Kit 480033-0001
1 Portable ILS Receiver 001137-0104
1 Test Equipment Kit 470077-0006
1 DME Keying Interface Kit 470301-0001
1 Equipment Shelter 8 ft. x 10 ft. 950284-XXXX*
or
1 Equipment Shelter 8 ft. x 12 ft. 950282-XXXX*
* Shelter, accessories, and dash number determined at the time of order.

THIS SHEET IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK

SECTION 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section comprises simplified theory of operation (block diagram theory at
the station level) and detailed theory of operation that includes block diagram theory and circuit theory
for each module.
Simplified theory of operation includes that for dual-equipment capture effect localizer stations.
If theory of operation for a module is not complex enough to require both block diagram and circuit
theory, only one paragraph, titled detailed theory of operation, is given.
2.2 SIMPLIFIED THEORY OF OPERATION.- The capture-effect localizer configuration was

developed for use at sites where buildings, aircraft, or some reflecting terrain characteristic is present in
the approach region. The capture-effect localizer is able to overcome these types of siting difficulties by
producing a very narrow course beam width, which in turn reduces the energy that may be reflected from
the terrain or other obstructions. This narrow beam-width is compensated for by the addition of a
clearance signal which has a relatively wide beam-width but at a much lower power level. The clearance
signal frequency is offset by 8 kHz from that of the course (main guidance) signal.
The term capture-effect is derived from the manner in which a conventional AM (amplitude-modulation)
detector responds to two RF signals, both within the receiver bandpass, which are applied
simultaneously. When one of the RF signals is slightly greater in amplitude, the detector circuit will
discriminate against the weaker signal. This results in a much greater ratio of the audio outputs due to
each input signal, as compared to the ratio of the input signals themselves. Thus, the receiver will
"capture" the stronger signal.
The capture-effect localizer operates on this principle. When an aircraft is flying in the course sector, the
localizer receiver will respond to the primary guidance signals. To the right or left of the course, the
localizer receiver will capture the clearance signal resulting in the aircraft's indicator showing a strong
fly right or left indication. Since the radiation of the primary course forming signals have a very narrow
beam-width with the capture-effect system, less multipath interference will be indicated on the aircraft's
crosspointer. Some of the clearance signal may be reflected and received by the aircraft, but since the
amplitude of the reflected clearance signal is much lower (and 8 kHz different in frequency), than the
course signal, these reflected signals will be discriminated against by the receiver.
The capture-effect localizer transmitter produces four radio frequency (RF) signals. The primary course-
forming signals are called the CSB (Carrier plus SideBands) and SBO (SideBand Only) signals. The
CSB signal is simply the primary RF carrier amplitude modulated 90 Hz and 150 Hz audio tones to a
depth of 20 percent for each tone. (Note that in the capture-effect localizer the primary RF carrier
frequency is offset above the assigned station frequency by 4 kHz.) The SBO signal is a double-
sideband, suppressed carrier signal, with 90 and 150 Hz sidebands only, spaced around the primary
carrier frequency.
The clearance signals produced by the transmitter consist of a CSB and SBO signal similar to those of
the course transmitter but at a frequency 4 kHz below that of the assigned station frequency, or 8 kHz

below the course frequency. In order to maintain frequency stability and separation, the clearance signal
and the course signal use the same reference frequency.
The operation of the capture-effect localizer involves very specific amplitude and phase relationships at
the radiating antennas in order to develop the proper radiation pattern for the course and clearance
signals. Table 2-1 illustrates the amplitude and phasing of the course and clearance signals for use with
a 14 element log periodic antenna array, along with the distance from runway centerline.
Table 2-1. Course Amplitude and Phasing Chart.
+))))))))))0))))))))))0)))))))))0)))))))))))0)))))))))0)))))))))))))),
* * CSB * CSB * SBO * SBO * Spacing *
* Antenna * Current * Phase * Current * Phase * in inches *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 07L * 182 mA * 0E * 431 mA * 0E * 515.03 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 06L * 236 mA * 0E * 631 mA * 0E * 434.57 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 05L * 364 mA * 0E * 916 mA * 0E * 354.10 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 04L * 464 mA * 0E * 1.000 A * 0E * 273.62 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 03L * 745 mA * 0E * 947 mA * 0E * 193.15 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 02L * 1.000 A * 0E * 632 mA * 0E * 112.69 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 01L * 909 mA * 0E * 237 mA * 0E * 32.22 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 01R * 909 mA * 0E * 237 mA * 180E * 32.22 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 02R * 1.000 A * 0E * 632 mA * 180E * 112.69 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 03R * 745 mA * 0E * 947 mA * 180E * 193.15 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 04R * 464 mA * 0E * 1.000 A * 180E * 273.62 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 05R * 364 mA * 0E * 916 mA * 180E * 354.10 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 06R * 236 mA * 0E * 631 mA * 180E * 434.57 *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))3))))))))))))))1
* 07R * 182 mA * 0E * 431 mA * 180E * 505.03 *
.))))))))))2))))))))))2)))))))))2)))))))))))2)))))))))2))))))))))))))-
The course CSB signal is applied to the antenna array with the amplitudes shown and all signals in
phase. The course SBO signal is applied with the amplitudes shown and the signals applied to 1R
through 7R 180% out of phase, producing the course radiation pattern shown in figure 2-1.
The clearance CSB and SBO signals are applied with the phase and amplitude relationships as shown in
table 2-2. Only antennas 1L through 3L and 1R through 3R are being fed clearance signals. The
clearance radiation pattern is shown in figure 2-2.

Table 2-2. Clearance Amplitude and Phasing Chart.
+))))))))))0))))))))))0)))))))))0)))))))))))0))))))))),
* * CSB * CSB * SBO * SBO *
* Antenna * Current * Phase * Current * Phase *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 03R * 133 mA * 180E * 205 mA * 0E *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 02R * 60 mA * 0E * 880 mA * 0E *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 01R * 1.000 A * 0E * 1.000 A * 0E *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 01L * 1.000 A * 0E * 1.000 A * 180E *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 02L * 60 mA * 0E * 880 mA * 180E *
/))))))))))3))))))))))3)))))))))3)))))))))))3)))))))))1
* 03L * 133 mA * 180E * 205 mA * 180E *
.))))))))))2))))))))))2)))))))))2)))))))))))2)))))))))-
2.2.1 Capture-Effect Localizer Station Simplified Theory.- Two essentially independent transmitters, a
Course transmitter and a Clearance transmitter comprise a capture-effect localizer station. Any
Course/Clearance transmitter interactions are discussed in the appropriate text. Course/Clearance
Synthesizer Assemblies (1A6/1A2) generate RF signals in the range 108 MHz to 112 MHz in 50 kHz
increments. The Course and Clearance Synthesizer Assemblies (1A6/1A22) operate from the same main
clock. The Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6) is set to generate a frequency 4 kHz above the station
frequency and the Clearance Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) is set 4 kHz below. This allows selection of
any of the 40 available localizer channels. The output of the Synthesizer Assemblies (1A6/1A22) is
applied to Course/Clearance Power Amplifier Assemblies (1A7/1A23), where the power is divided, the
carrier is canceled for SBO generation, and the RF signals are amplified and modulated. The output of
the Power Amplifiers is applied to RF Power Sensors (1A34) for forward and reflected power and
VSWR measurement. The Course/Clearance sideband signals are applied to Phaser Assemblies
(1A3/1A4), which are used to adjust the phase of the SBO signal with respect to the CSB signal,
resulting in the correct radiation pattern.
The audio modulation signals of 90 Hz and 150 Hz are generated digitally by the Audio Generator CCAs
(1A8/1A24). Summed and difference audio signals are programmed into Read-Only Memories (ROM)
at various levels to provide the modulation signals. The modulator provides the drive to modulate the
Course/Clearance CSB and SBO RF signals. The Audio Generator CCAs are started in sequence by the
same signal causing them to be phase coherent.



Probes in each of the antenna elements sample the radiated signals. The sampled RF signals are
recombined and applied to Course/Clearance path and width integral detectors. The path and width
integral detectors separate the Course and Clearance path and width signals from the combined signals
and provide separate Course path and width and Clearance path and width audio signals to the field
monitor processor for integral monitoring. A field path monitor input detector is also provided. The
field-monitor processor computes the integral course path DDM, the Course width DDM, Clearance path
DDM, and Course and Clearance RF and modulation levels. The field monitor sends the parameters to
the transmitter microprocessor for comparison with alarm limits. The microprocessor receives the data
from the field monitor and performs the appropriate action based on the monitored levels and alarm
limits. The microprocessor will initiate an automatic shutdown of the transmitter at a preprogrammed
delay (0-120 seconds) after an out-of-limit parameter is received. The microprocessor will initiate
transmitter restart at programmed intervals.
The RF Control Circuit Card Assemblies (CCA) (1A9/1A25) interface the Microprocessor CCA (1A12)
with the RF output controls of the Course/Clearance Power Amplifier Assemblies (1A7/1A23)). It also
filters the outputs of the CSB and SBO RF Power Sensor Assemblies (1A34).
The Microprocessor CCA (1A12) receives data from the Field Monitor Microprocessor CCAs via Serial
I/O CCA (1A11) and performs appropriately. VIA D/A CCA (1A14) interfaces the Microprocessor
CCA with external digital inputs/outputs and analog outputs. Sixteen digital I/O lines and two analog
output lines are provided. The generation of the 90 Hz and 150 Hz navigation tones, the 1020 Hz
identification tone, and keying is accomplished by the Audio Generator CCAs (1A8/1A24). The
Modulator Assembly (1A5) provides the drive to modulate the Course/Clearance CSB and SBO RF
signals.
The Course/Clearance CSB and SBO signals are sent from the Power Amplifier Assemblies (1A7/1A23)
to the Distribution Unit (DU) where each of the RF signals is divided appropriately between the
antennae. Appropriate amplitude and phase relationships of the signals and the antenna geometry
provide the required radiation patterns.
The SBO signals are radiated 180E out of phase on each side of the antenna array center. The SBO
signals then recombine with the CSB signals to produce a Course/Clearance DDM between the 90 Hz
and 150 Hz signals relative to the angle from the runway centerline. Depending on the aircraft location
in the localizer beam, either the course or clearance signal will be received by the aircraft receiver which
has filters to produce needle movement on an indicator relative to the difference in level between the two
audio tones.
The Transfer Control Unit (TCU) contains RF switches which control which pair of power amplifiers
will excite the antenna. Through ILS Control Interface CCAs (3A4/3A5), the Remote Status Control
System (RSCS) monitors and controls the status of the localizer system. Control signals from the
Remote Status Control Unit (RSCU) are applied to the Microprocessor and can turn the equipment on or
off through this route.

Through the ILS Control Interface, the RSCS monitors and controls the status of the localizer. Control
signals from the RSCU, decoded in the ILS Control Interface, are used to drive the Microprocessor
CCAs (1A12), turning off or turning on the station, or transferring operation from one localizer
transmitter to another.
2.3 DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION.- Detailed theory consists of block diagram theory and
circuit theory for each assembly. In some cases, the assembly theory of operation is not complex enough
to justify block diagram theory, so only circuit theory is given.
The capture-effect Clearance transmitter operates in much the same manner as the Course transmitter. It
is controlled by the Microprocessor CCA (1A12). A complete list of control codes are listed in table 3-
2.
The Clearance forward and reflected RF powers may be read and calibrated by using scale factors and
offsets. The VSWR of the antenna system may also be read.
The Clearance transmitter RF power may be continuously adjusted or toggled on and off by entering the
proper control code.
Clearance modulation control is provided to toggle the Clearance modulation on and off and modulation
percentages of both the 90 and 150 Hz are continuously adjustable, using the proper control code.
The Microprocessor CCA (1A12) monitors Clearance course and width DDM and the Clearance
frequency lock. The Clearance course and width DDM is read from the Clearance course and width
detector outputs by the Field Monitor/Control Microprocessor CCA located in the antenna electronics
assembly. Data from the Field Monitor/Control Microprocessor CCAs is applied serially to the Transfer
Logic CCA (3A1) located in the TCU. The information is directed to either transmitter no. 1 or no. 2's
Microprocessor CCA depending on which transmitter is on line.
The Clearance Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) is referenced to the Course Synthesizer Assembly (1A6)
using a 260 Hz reference frequency that is generated by the Course Synthesizer. The Clearance
Synthesizer Assembly (1A22) uses that 260 Hz signal to offset the Clearance RF frequency that is 8 kHz
below that of the Course frequency.
The Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24) receives a 7200 Hz signal from the Course Audio
Generator CCA (1A8) which is used in the generation of the Clearance 90 and 150 Hz tones. This 7200
Hz signal is used as a reference for the Course and Clearance 90 and 150 Hz tones.
The Clearance Audio Generator CCA (1A24) also receives the ident audio 1020 Hz tone from the
Course Audio Generator CCA (1A8) and directs it to control circuitry on the Clearance Audio
Generator CCA (1A24). This assures synchronization of the ident audio on the Course and Clearance
transmitters. The Course and Clearance Audio Generator CCAs are identical. Course or Clearance
utilization is determined by positioning circuit jumpers located on the CCAs.

2.3.1 Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) Assembly (030579-0001) (1A6/1A22).- The Synthesizer
Assembly consists of two CCA's: the Direct Digital Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) and the RF
Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2). Each CCA is described in the following paragraphs.
2.3.1.1 Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) Block Diagram Theory.- Refer to figure 2-3. The
synthesizer U8 generates a 8 to 12 MHz signal. A 100 MHz crystal oscillator is the time base for the
synthesizer, as well as the local oscillator for the mixer. The output frequency is adjusted using the dip
switches (S1). RF switching (U1 and U2) is provided so that each module may be used as the master or
slave synthesizer.
The frequency loader consists of Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM) U7 and
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) U5 which translates the S1 switch positions into usable data. S1 also
contains switches (bit 8 through bit 11) which control single frequency or capture effect version,
clearance or course, and localizer or glideslope modes of operation. Bit 10 of S1 selects reset or operate.
For normal operation, bit 10 should always be in the operate position. The reset position is for factory
test use only.
Transistor Q1 and crystal Y1 comprise the 100 MHz crystal oscillator circuit. Crystal Y1 is a 5th
overtone quartz crystal. Master/Slave switch U1 and U2 provide the switching necessary for configuring
the module as a single frequency version or capture-effect version.
In a single frequency system or as a master in a capture-effect version system, the crystal oscillator
output is switched to the buffer amplifier Q2. A sample out of the buffer amplifier is routed through U2
to connector P3 as an output. This sample output is used as a time base reference signal for a clearance
frequency synthesizer.
When the synthesizer is used as a slave, capture-effect version system, the crystal oscillator is disabled.
A sample 100-MHz signal from the master synthesizer is applied to connector P3 and routed to the input
of the buffer amplifier Q2. The slave module uses this external time base reference as its clock.
All RF switches are controlled by a quad op-amp switch driver U3. Depending upon the S1 switch
positions, U3 drives the proper RF switches with -5V and turns on the necessary transistors.
Transistor Q2 is the buffer amplifier for the 100 MHz time base reference. This signal may come from
the internal crystal oscillator or from an external reference. The buffer amplifier isolates the crystal
oscillator and increases its power level. The buffer amplifier output is split between connector P3, the
mixer MX1, and the bandpass filter.
Mixer (MX1) uses the 100 MHz crystal oscillator signal as its local oscillator input. The RF input is the
8-12 MHz signal coming from the synthesizer filter. This 8-12 MHz signal is converted to a 108-112
MHz IF, which is applied to the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2).
The three ports of MX1 are padded with 3 dB of attenuation to improve the impedance match at each
port.

Bandpass Filter precedes U9 (divide-by-two) to reduce the amount of spurious signals being fed back
from U9 into the buffer amplifier Q2. Divider U9 is a high frequency "D" flip-flop configured as a
divide-by-two divider. The 100 MHz crystal oscillator time base is reduced to 50 MHz for use as the
synthesizer (U8) clock input by U9 (divide-by-two).
Figure 2-3. Direct Digital Synthesizer, Block Diagram.
The fully self-contained synthesizer (U8) is mounted on its own circuit card. The synthesizer receives a
50 MHz clock (CLK) which comes from the 100 MHz crystal oscillator. The synthesizer receives the
programmed frequency through eight data bits (D0-D7) and two address bits (A0-A1). The output
frequency range is 8-12 MHz.

Filtering the output of the synthesizer is necessary due to the out of band spurious signals generated in
the digital synthesis process. The synthesizer filter contains two filters in series and connected together
by an attenuator. Power out of the filter is applied to mixer MX1.
The output power detection circuit on the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) is buffered by two
inverter gates on U6 (part of the built-in-test). A Transistor Transistor Logic (TTL) HIGH signal is
supplied when the RF Amplifier CCA is supplying power.
An output frequency sample signal is received from the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) and is an
input to divider U10. The sample signal is divided by 256 and converts the analog input into a digital
output. Divider U11 further divides this sample signal by 10. The digital frequency is the module
output frequency divided by 2560.
2.3.1.2 Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) Detailed Theory.- Refer to figure 11-5. EPROM U7 and
PAL U5 translate the frequency loader S1 switch positions into 32 bits of usable data. The 32 bits are
loaded into the buffers of synthesizer U8 by sending four 8-bit words. S1 also contains switches (bit 8
through bit 11) which control single frequency or capture-effect version, clearance or course, and
localizer or glideslope modes of operation. Bit 10 of S1 selects reset or operate. For normal operation,
bit 10 should always be in the operate position. The reset position is for factory test use only. Because
of the S1 switch translation, a single switch in S1 can completely reconfigure the synthesizer. The 32 bit
synthesizer U8 is capable of .012 Hz resolution, although only 4 kHz is required for capture-effect
frequency shifts. Power Interruption Detector U4 automatically reloads synthesizer U8 when the main
system power fails. Jumpering J1-1 to J1-2 continually reloads frequency data for test and
troubleshooting use. The localizer's microprocessor can also reload the synthesizer buffer through
inverter U6.
Transistor Q1 and crystal Y1 comprise the 100 MHz crystal oscillator circuit. Crystal Y1 is a 5th
overtone quartz crystal. Switching diode CR1 acts as a limiter to compress and flatten the oscillator's
output power. Variable capacitor C6 adjusts the output power and insures proper operating conditions
for the crystal oscillator. Adjust C6, while monitoring test point TP2, for a minimum voltage.
Transistor switch Q3 turns on the oscillator and is enabled when the module is being used alone, or as
the master in a capture-effect version system.
Master/Slave Switch U1 and U2 provide the switching necessary for configuring the module as a single
frequency version or capture-effect version.
In a single frequency system or as a master in a capture-effect version system, the crystal oscillator
output is switched to a buffer amplifier Q2. A sample out of the buffer amplifier is routed to connector
P3 through E15 as a 100 MHz output. This sample output is used as a time base reference signal for a
clearance frequency synthesizer.
When the synthesizer is used as a slave, capture-effect version system, the crystal oscillator is disabled.
A sample 100 MHz signal from the master synthesizer is applied to connector P3 and routed through
switches U1 and U2 to the input of the buffer amplifier Q2. The slave module uses this external time
base reference as its clock.

All RF switches, Q3 on this CCA, and Q3 on the RF amplifier CCA are controlled by quad op-amp
switch driver U3. Zener diode CR3 is a 2.4 V reference input for all four op-amps. The
course/clearance (CRS/CLR) and bandswitch (GS/LOC) lines from S1 are the other inputs to U3.
Depending upon the frequency loader S1 switch positions, switch driver U3 drives the proper RF
switches with -5V and turns on the necessary transistors.
Transistor Q2 and its surrounding components comprise the buffer amplifier for the 100 MHz time base
reference. This 100 MHz signal may come from the on-board crystal oscillator or from the master
synthesizer, in a capture effect system. The buffer amplifier isolates the crystal oscillator and increases
its power level. Q2's output power is split between connector P3 (through RF switch U2), MX1, and the
bandpass filter. Capacitors C17, C19, and C25 reactively couple output power from the buffer amplifier
to these circuits. Mixer LO drive is adjusted to +4 dBm by selecting resistors R37, R38, and R39.
Bandpass filter power is 0 dBm. Power to connector P3 is adjusted to +1 dBm by selecting resistors
R34, R35, and R36.
MX1 uses the 100 MHz crystal oscillator signal as its local oscillator input. The RF input is the 8-12
MHz signal coming from the synthesizer filter. This 8-12 MHz signal is converted to a 108-112 MHz
IF, which is applied to the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) through a coax cable to terminal E13.
The three ports of MX1 are padded with a minimum of 3 dB of attenuation to improve the impedance
match at each port. Impedance matching yields minimum IF intermodulation. Terminal E13 output
power is -22 dBm.
Capacitors C25, C26, C27, C31, C32, and inductors L6 and L7 form a capacitively coupled bandpass
filter. This filter precedes divide-by-two U9 to reduce the amount of spurious signals being fedback
from U9 into the buffer amplifier Q2. Adjustable inductors L6 and L7 are adjusted for minimum
insertion loss at test point TP1.
Divider U9 is a high frequency "D" flip-flop configured as a divide-by-two divider and reduces the 100
MHz time base reference to 50 MHz for use as the synthesizer (U8) clock input. The fully self-
contained synthesizer (U8) is mounted on its own CCA. The synthesizer receives a 50 MHz clock
(CLK) which comes from the 100 MHz crystal oscillator. The synthesizer receives the programmed
frequency information through eight data bits (D0-D7) and two address bits (A0-A1). The synthesizer
has 32 bit frequency resolution (approximately .01 Hz). Inductors L5, L15, and capacitors C21, C51 is a
filtering circuit for the -5 Vdc supply. This voltage supply is applied to synthesizer pins 32, 33 and
diode CR7 which supplies a voltage reference to pin 3. Diode CR7 is a 3.3V Zener diode. CR7 forces a
fixed bias across the voltage divider R40 and R41 which provides a stable reference voltage to
synthesizer pin 3. The output frequency range is 8-12 MHz and is applied to the first of two filters.
Synthesizer output power is -5 dBm.
Filtering the output of the synthesizer is necessary due to the out of band spurious signals generated in
the digital synthesis process. The synthesizer filter contains two filters in series and connected together
by an attenuator. The first filter (C35 thru C38 and L8 thru L10) is a high pass filter which uses fixed
components and is not tuneable. The second filter is a low pass filter and also uses fixed components.
The pass band of the combined filters is 8-12 MHz. An attenuator pad (resistors R47, R48, and R49)
reduces the mismatch between filters. Power out of the filter is -9 dBm which is applied to the MX1.

Built-In-Test (BIT) circuitry consists of inverter U6, dividers U10, and U11. The output power detection
circuit on the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) is buffered by two inverter gates on U6. A logic "1"
is applied to connector P1-15 when the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) is supplying power to
connector P2.
An output frequency sample signal is received from the RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) through
E9 and is an input to divider U10. The sample signal is divided by 256 and converts the analog input
into a digital output. Divider U11 further divides this sample signal by 10. The digital frequency
present at connector P1-10 is the module output frequency divided by 2560.
2.3.1.3 RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) Block Diagram Theory.- Refer to figure 2-4. The RF
Amplifier CCA receives a 108-112 MHz converted signal and filters and amplifies it to meet overall
module specifications.
A 108-112 MHz signal from the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) is applied to bandpass filter No. 1.
Bandpass filter No. 1 is a capacitively coupled filter which filters out the 100 MHz LO, 90 MHz image,
harmonics, and other undesirable spurious signals from the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) mixer
output. The bandpass filter is tuned for minimum insertion loss in its 108-112 MHz pass band.
Amplifier No. 1 U1 is a high gain Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit (MMIC) which amplifies
the 108-118 MHz signal and also provides isolation between the two bandpass filters. Isolation
improves filter response by presenting a 50 ohm matched load to output of filter No. 1 and the input to
filter No. 2.
Filter No. 2 is identical to the filter No. 1 and provides further reduction of the undesirable spurious and
harmonic signals.
Amplifier No. 2 U2 is a MMIC amplifier with 12.5 dB of gain.
U3 and U4 are MMIC RF switches used in signal routing when selecting between localizer and
glideslope functions. A -5 volt signal is sent from the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) to control the
switch positions. When the localizer is selected, the signal goes directly to amplifier U5.
The output amplifier U5 is a hybrid, broad band, amplifier. It features high gain and an output power
capability which meets the module specification. Compressed output can be adjusted by varying the
values of resistors R15 and R17 in voltage regulator U2.
Voltage Regulator U2 is a variable regulator. This regulator supplies output amplifier U5 with a variable
voltage needed to control the compressed output power of the module.
Voltage Regulator U1 is a fixed regulator. This regulator supplies -5 volts to the Synthesizer CCA
(1A6A1/1A22A1).

A BIT sample signal from output amplifier 1A6U5 is routed through resistors R25, R24, and U6A. This
sample signal is divided-by-2560 (U10) on the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) and is the BIT signal
from the module.
The detected output power from the output amplifier U5 is amplified by U6A and sent to the synthesizer.
2.3.1.4 RF Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2) Detailed Theory.- Refer to figure 11-6. A RF coax cable
applies a 108-112 MHz signal from the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) to terminal E1. Nominal
power at this point is -22 dBm.
Filter No. 1 (capacitors C1 thru C7 and inductors L1 thru L3) is a capacitively coupled bandpass filter.
This CCA filters out the 100 MHz LO, 90 MHz image, harmonics, and other undesirable spurious
signals from the Synthesizer CCA mixer output. The bandpass filter is tuned for minimum insertion
loss, at test point TP1, in its 108-112 MHz pass band by adjusting inductors L1 thru L3. Coil L12 and
capacitor C38 form a notch filter at 100 MHz. Local oscillator power leaking through MX1 is reduced
by adjusting capacitor C38. The power level at the bandpass filter output is -28 dBm.
MMIC Amplifier U1 amplifies the signal and also provides isolation between the two bandpass filters.
Isolation improves filter response by presenting a 50 ohm matched load to output of filter No. 1 and the
input to filter No. 2. Output power is -7 dBm.
Filter No. 2 (capacitors C10 thru C15 and inductors L4 thru L6) is identical to the filter No. 1. Inductors
L4, L5, and L6 are adjusted for minimum insertion loss at test point TP2. Filter No. 2 provides further
reduction of the undesirable spurious and harmonic signals. Output power is -13 dBm.
Amplifier U2 is a silicon MMIC amplifier with 12.5 dB of gain. Output power is +2 dBm.
U3 and U4 are GaAs MMIC RF switches used in signal routing when selecting between localizer and
glideslope functions. A -5 volt signal is sent from the Synthesizer CCA to control the switch positions.
When the localizer is selected, the signal goes directly to amplifier U5.
The output amplifier U5, which is not mounted on the Synthesizer RF Amplifier CCA, is a hybrid, broad
band amplifier. This amplifier features high gain and an output power capability which meets the
module specification. Compressed output can be adjusted by varying the power supply voltage U2. The
input and output of the amplifier is buffered by 2 dB pads, resistors R11 thru R13 and R20 thru R22, to
insure stability and protect the amplifier's output when an impedance mismatch appears at the module's
output.

Figure 2-4. RF Amplifier CCA, Block Diagram.

Voltage Regulator U2, which is not mounted on the Synthesizer RF Amplifier CCA, is an LM317
variable voltage regulator. This regulator supplies output amplifier U5 with a variable voltage needed to
control the compressed output power of the module. When the glideslope mode is selected, transistors
Q2 and Q3 switch R17 into the regulator circuit.
When the localizer mode is selected, transistor Q4 switches R15 into the regulator circuit. Resistor R15
is selected to meet the localizer output power requirement.
Voltage Regulator U1, which is not mounted on the Synthesizer RF Amplifier CCA, is an MC7905CT
fixed voltage regulator. This regulator supplies -5 volts to the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A6A22)
through feedthrough capacitor filter, F11.
A sample signal from output amplifier U5 is routed through resistors R25 and R24. This sample signal
is divided-by-2560 (U10) on the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) and is the BIT signal from the
module.
Resistor R27, diode CR1, and R26 sample and detect the output power from the output amplifier U5.
This DC detected level is amplified by U6A and sent to the Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1) through
feedthrough capacitor filter, FL12.
2.3.2 Power Amplifier (1A7/1A23) Theory of Operation .- Refer to figure 11-7. The incoming signal
level is divided approximately 3:1. One-third of the power is applied to the SBO amplifier section with
the remainder being applied to the CSB amplifier.
The CSB amplifier section consists of Q1, Q2, and associated matching networks. The output of Q1
drives Q2, resulting in an output capability of 15 watts with full localizer modulation. Both Q1 and Q2
are modulated.
The CSB output is applied to PIN diodes CR2 and CR3, which are switched by a dc voltage on the CSB
transfer line. A positive voltage on the transfer line switches the CSB output to low-pass filter FL1. A
negative voltage switches the output to internal dummy load R15. FL1 is an elliptical, low-pass filter
that attenuates harmonics more than 60 dB.
The SBO portion of the incoming RF signal is applied to transformer T1. The signal is alternately
switched through the secondary of T1 to shift the signal 180 degrees, coincident with the zero crossings
of the audio modulation. This results in cancellation of the carrier. The RF signal is then applied to the
SBO amplifier consisting of Q5, Q3, and Q4. The signal is amplified and modulated to a level of 400
mW with full modulation. Diode CR7 detects a portion of the SBO signal for test point TP1 and the
SBO automatic leveling feedback error amplifier in the modulator.
The SBO output is applied to PIN diodes CR8 and CR9, which are switched by a dc voltage on the SBO
transfer line. A positive voltage on the transfer line switches the SBO output to low-pass filter FL2. A
negative voltage switches the output to internal dummy load R36.
FL2 is an elliptical, low-pass filter that attenuates harmonics more than 60 dB.

2.3.3 Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24) Circuit Theory.- Refer to figure 11-8. The 90 Hz and 150 Hz
navigation tones are generated on this assembly. Reference clock oscillator Y1 provides a 1.8432 MHz
clock, from which the other clock frequencies for the audio generator are produced by counters U1
through U5. Counter U1 provides an output at 450 Hz (TP2). This frequency is the basic sample rate
used to clock through the addresses of the audio and key Read-Only Memories (ROM). Counter U1 also
provides a 14.4 kHz signal to U5 and a 450 Hz signal to U2. Counter U1 also provides a 7.2 kHz signal
to E3 and, if so jumpered, to U18.
The 7.2 kHz square wave clocks presettable counters U17 and U18, whose outputs select an address
sequence on EPROMs U19, U20, and U21. The Microprocessor CCA (1A12) writes a value
representing a selected address to latch U16. Then U16 latches the selected address on to the address
lines of EPROMs U19, U20, and U21. The address selected is the base address used by the EPROMs to
generate a composite 90 + 150 Hz signal, a 90-150 Hz signal, and a switching signal for a selected DDM
level.
The digital output of EPROM U19 is converted to analog by Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) U22.
Low-pass filter U24A removes the sampling frequency and the audio signal is sent to multiplying DAC
U25.
Modulation level data from the Microprocessor CCA (1A12), used to set power and modulation levels,
is latched by U26. The latched data are multiplied by the incoming 90 + 150 Hz signal to establish
modulation percentage. Amplifier U33B buffers the signal and U33A sums the reference dc level, the
identification tone, and the 90 + 150 Hz tones. The combined navigation and identification tone is then
applied to multiplying DAC U29. The RF level data from the Microprocessor are latched by U30. The
latched data are multiplied in U29 and buffered by U33C to control the RF output level.
EPROM U21 provides a digital representation of an absolute value 90-150 Hz signal. The digital signal
is converted to analog by DAC U23. The analog signal is filtered by U24B and applied to multiplying
DAC U28.
Level data from the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) are latched by U27. The latched data are multiplied by
the analog signal in U28 and buffered by U34D. The output of U34D is applied to summing amplifier
U34C where a dc level is added to provide quiescent biasing of the RF amplifier and reduce distortion.
The resulting waveform is applied to the RF Amplifier Assembly for modulation of the SBO signal.
EPROM U20 provides a switching signal that changes (5 or 0 Vdc) each time the composite waveform
crosses zero reference. The switching signal is applied to amplifier U24D and is increased to +12 Vdc
by transistors Q3 and Q4. The output of Q3 and Q4 drives phase switch diodes in the RF Amplifier.
Counter U5, controlled by NAND gate U6D, divides the 14.4 kHz signal by seven to obtain 2057 Hz.
The NAND gate enables the output of U5 based upon inputs from the Microprocessor to enable the
keying or provide a continuous tone. The 2057 Hz is then divided by the second stage of counter U3 to
obtain a 1028 Hz square wave. The square wave is shaped and amplified by U34A and U34B. The
resulting sine wave is applied to multiplying DAC U32 (TP12). Converter U32 multiplies the incoming
signal by a digital count from the Microprocessor CCA to set the modulation level of the identification
tone. The output of U32 is buffered and summed with navigation tones.

The 450 Hz output of U1 is divided by U2, U3, and U4 to obtain a 4 Hz sample rate for keyer EPROM
U13. Counter U14 sequences through the low-order address lines of EPROM U13 until reset. Switches
S1 to S24 are used to select any combination of four letters or numbers. The switch settings represent a
high-order address of keyer ROM U13. Keyer ROM U13 contains a digital representation of the
International Morse Code for each alphanumeric character.
Buffers U7, U8, U9, and U10 latch the high-order address onto the keyer ROM as sequenced by counter
U11. Sequencer U11 counts up from zero to three, based upon the output of counter U12. Counter U12
increments the count upon a letter-end signal from EPROM U13. The letter-end signal also resets
counter U14. A 0.125 Hz signal from U4 establishes the word rate. The 0.125 Hz signal resets counters
U12 and U13 to zero. This restarts the four-letter sequence.
The keying output of U13 controls counter U5 when U6D is enabled by the keying ON control. The
keying output from U13 is also routed to U6A and U6B. When these devices are enabled by U35A and
U35B (E1 and E2 are not jumpered) keying is provided for a distance measuring equipment (DME).
When DME keying is required, every fourth localizer keying sequence is sent to the DME. When E1
and E2 are jumpered, no DME keying is present, and all keying sequences are sent to the localizer.
Potentiometer R39 controls the dc offset of filter U24B and is normally set so the minimums of the
absolute 90-150 Hz signal (as viewed at TP9) are 0 volt dc. Potentiometer R66 controls the dc level that
is summed with the absolute 90 - 150 Hz signal in U34C. This dc level is of sufficient amplitude to
overcome the turnon bias of the SBO final amplifiers in the power amplifier assembly. Potentiometer
R67 controls the plus to minus swing of the bi-phase drive signal to compensate for differences in the
switching power amplifier diodes CR4 and CR5.
2.3.4 Modulator Assembly (1A5) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-9. The detected RF
envelope from the CSB amplifier is applied to inverting buffer U2D. Buffer U2D isolates and amplifies
the detected signal. The signal is then applied to error amplifier U2C. The amplifier compares the
detected envelope with the reference modulation from the audio module (CSB audio) and uses the error
signal to drive power amplifier modulator Q4.
Leveler Q3 sets a maximum level to protect the power amplifier. This error amplifier comparison
reduces distortion and provides automatic leveling of the power circuit.
The detected signal is also applied to a filter circuit and the audio portion is applied to precision rectifier
circuit U1B and U1C and filter U1D. The filtered output provides an RF level reference to the built-in
test equipment, and the precision rectifier provides an analog of the modulated navigation tones. The
signals are used to compute modulation percentage.
The detected SBO envelope is processed by inverting buffer U2B and error amplifier U2A. The error
amplifier compares the detected SBO with the SBO reference modulation from the audio module. The
resulting error output drives power amplifier modulator Q2. Transistor Q1 and potentiometer R16 set
the minimum voltage to prevent potential power amplifier damage.

2.3.5 RF Control Assembly (1A9/1A25) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-10. The RF Control
Assembly interfaces the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) to the RF output control circuits of the Power
Amplifier Assemblies and filters the outputs of the CSB and SBO RF Power Sensors.
From the Serial I/O CCA (1A11), a digital signal from the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) is applied to
comparator U1A on the CSB transfer control line. The input signal is compared by U1A to a reference
dc level from voltage divider R1 and R2. If the input signal is higher than the reference (approximately
+1.8 Vdc) the output goes to -12 Vdc, and to +12 Vdc if the input signal is lower than the reference.
The output current of the operational amplifier is limited, so a driver stage is required to supply PIN
diode current. The PIN diode driver is a push-pull emitter follower (totem pole) that supplies bi-
directional load current to the Power Amplifier. If the output of U1A is -12 Vdc, Q1 switches off and
Q2 is on, resulting in an output of -12 Vdc. If the output of U1A is +12 Vdc, Q1 switches on and Q2 is
off for +12 Vdc output. Transistors Q1 and Q2 provide current to the RF power amplifier to switch the
CSB transfer control to either the internal dummy load or the antenna output.
The SBO transfer control line operates identically to the CSB line, with U1B providing the comparison
and Q3 and Q4 the drive.
An analog of forward RF power level from the CSB forward power sensor is applied to the input of
buffer U3A. U3B then amplifies the voltage by a factor of 25. The output of U3B is then filtered by
U3C and associated components to eliminate any remaining audio components. Any signals with
frequencies above approximately 4 Hz are filtered out. The resulting dc level is then applied to the
analog I/O. The CSB reflected power, the SBO forward power, and the SBO reflected power level
circuits operate similarly to that of the CSB forward power circuit except for the CSB reflected power is
amplified by 50, the SBO forward power voltage is amplified by 50, and the SBO reflected power is
amplified by a factor of 50.
Capacitors C14 and C15 filter the -12 Vdc. Capacitors C11 and C12 filter the +12 Vdc.
2.3.6 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Theory of Operation.- The Microprocessor CCA provides the user
interface for control of the localizer transmitter with a video terminal. All power, modulation, and
switching functions are controlled by this microprocessor. In addition, monitor tolerance levels are
stored in non-volatile memory on the microprocessor assembly. All monitor comparisons and alarms are
executed by the assembly.
Refer to figure 11-11. The circuit of Q1 and Q2 is not used and will not be described. Clock oscillator
CR1 provides a l.8432 MHz reference signal, which is divided to 921.6 kHz by counter U13. The 921.6
kHz signal is sent to microprocessor U5 as the phase-0 clock. The Schmitt trigger inverters U12A and
U12F provide a reset signal to the microprocessor when power is applied to the assembly. The reset
signal is applied through pins 8 and 10 of the component carrier in U14.
All addressing and data collection for the assembly are provided by microprocessor U5. The system
software is contained in EPROMs U1 and U2, which are read by microprocessor U5 each time the
assembly is booted up. U5 contains a battery-backed time keeper to save memory when power is lost.

Random-Access Memory (RAM) is provided by U3 for temporary variable storage and housekeeping for
the microprocessor. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) U4 provides
non-volatile storage of alarm values, timeout limits, etc. These variables can be changed, but are
retained when power is removed from the Microprocessor CCA.
The interface adapters are U15 and U16, which interface external digital signal circuits with the
microprocessor. Timing and frequency measurements are performed in U15 and U16.
Terminals E1 and E2 provide a hard restart to microprocessor U5. A momentary short between these
two terminals will restart U5. Removing the jumper that is normally installed on terminals E3 and E4
places the microprocessor assembly in the "Forth" or terminal mode. In terminal mode, the localizer
operator can change the system password, security word, dial out telephone numbers, etc. Terminals E5
and E6 control the baud rate the microprocessor uses for RS-232 communications to the local video
terminal or modem. When E5 is connected to E6, the microprocessor is communicating at 300 baud.
When the jumper is removed, the microprocessor is communicating at 1200 baud. Terminals E7 and E8
enable EEPROM U4 ready line. If the jumper between E7 and E8 is removed, the operator will not be
able to write new data, such as scaling factors, alarm time outs, etc.
RF Switch Driver U17 drives the two RF switches that select the operating localizer transmitter.
2.3.7 Analog I/O CCA (1A13) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-12. To be provided. The
primary function of this assembly is to convert sixteen single-ended analog input channels to 12-bit
digital words to be read by the microprocessor for software comparison to alarm or alert limits. The
analog input levels provide maintenance monitoring of internal voltages, currents, power levels,
modulation percentages, and environmental conditions.
The CCA also provides serial data transmission conforming to EIA standard RS-232-C between the
microprocessor and an external devices such as a video terminal or modem. Asynchronous
Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA) U3 is the interface between the microprocessor controlled
parallel data bus at backplane connector P1 and an external serial communications device. The ACIA
has an internal baud rate generator driven by a 1.8432 MHz clock source at P1-17C and may be set
under program control to any one of 15 different rates from 50 to 19,200 baud. The ACIA has
programmable word lengths of 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits. It can have even, odd, or no parity and 0, 1, or 2 stop
bits. The ILS software configures the ACIA to operate at 300 or 1200 baud with an 8-bit word, 1 stop
bit, and no parity bit.
The base address of the ACIA is set by the address decoding that drives the UART line on P1-18C offset
by hex 40. For example, if UART goes low on hexadecimal address 1000 to 1FFF then the base address
for U3 is 1040. Once the chip is enabled, then the four internal registers can be selected using RS0 and
RS1.

U4 and U5 are used to convert the TTL signals (+5V=HI, GND=LO) used by the ACIA to RS-232 levels
(-12V=HI, +12V=LO) for transmission to the serial communication device. Handshaking and control
lines RTS, CTS, and DTR are not used for communication, but they are still connected to non-inverting
RS-232 drivers and receiver for a default input and future expansion. Data in and out of the ACIA is
sent Least-Significant-Bit (LSB) first.
Operational amplifier U11 amplifies and band-pass filters the audio input from J2-7 before it is
converted to a TTL square wave using comparator U6 as a zero-crossing detector with hystersis. This
output, which can be found on test pin TP2, is applied to the D1 data input on U7. An identical circuit
used only for clearance channel audio starts at J2-6 and uses op-amp U13 and comparator U12; the
output is on TP4 and D5 input of U7.
J2-11 is a TTL signal derived from the RF oscillator that is applied to transistor Q1 and inverting
Schmitt trigger U9A to produce a square wave input to U8. This signal frequency is divided by 16 and
applied to the D2 input on U7 and test point TP1. An identical circuit used for clearance RF frequency
uses Q2, U9B, and U8B to produce output for D6 on U7 and TP3.
U7 is an 8 to 1 digital multiplexer (MUX) that selects one of eight inputs for frequency measurement
using 16-bit timers in the VIA chips on the microprocessor board. Frequency select lines 1 and 2
connect to the microprocessor VIA's on P1-14A and P1-15A. Select line 3 on J2-15 is normally not
connected and thus pulled low with resistor R10. For capture effect systems, this line is driven high to
measure clearance frequencies and low for course frequencies.
Analog multiplexer U1 and A/D convertor U2 form a precision 16-channel data acquisition system
which converts a voltage signal into a 12-bit digital word. Microprocessor address lines A0 through A3
select the input channel to be converted.
MUX U1 selects one of 16 single-ended analog input signals (CH0 through CH15) which is routed to
A/D U2 pin 14 for conversion. The base address of the multiplexer is set by the address decoding that
drives the MUX line on P1-19A. The microprocessor selects a channel by writing a dummy data byte to
one of the MUX addresses. U10C provides the falling edge that latches the address lines to select the
next channel to convert.
Analog to digital (A/D) convertor U2 is a 12-bit successive approximation type converter with an on-
board voltage reference and a 20 microsecond conversion time. The analog input voltage range is +10V
to -10V. The base address of the A/D is set by the address decoding that drives the ADC line on P1-
20A. The 8 Most Significant Bits (MSB) of each conversion are read at the base address, while the
remaining 4 LSBs of the conversion are located in the upper half of the data read at the base address + 1.
The 4 LSB of the base address + 1 data are always zero. Each analog to digital conversion is initiated by
writing a dummy word to the A/D base address. After at least a 25 microsecond delay, the 12-bit
number is read by the microprocessor in a two step sequence where the base address is read before base
address + 1, then the full 12-bit digital conversion is recombined by the microprocessor software.

Jumper terminals E1 and E2 are normally connected so ACIA U3 can interrupt the microprocessor each
time an incoming serial data character is received. This jumper should only be removed during
troubleshooting to determine if the ACIA is halting the system by constantly interrupting the
microprocessor.
2.3.8 VIA D/A CCA (1A14) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-13. The Versatile Interface
Adapter (VIA) provides an interface between the Microprocessor CCA and external digital inputs or
outputs. Sixteen digital I/O lines and two analog output lines are provided. The microprocessor address
lines are buffered by U2 and U3, then decoded by U5 and U10 to select either versatile interface adapter,
U4 or DACs U6 and U7. Digital data bus buffering is provided by U1. The buffered data bits are routed
to U4, U6, and U7.
The outputs of U4 are buffered by U8 and U9 before they are sent to J1 and J2.
The outputs of DACs U6 and U7 are directly applied to the output connector pins. The outputs control
switching functions of the localizer (RF power direction, etc.) and the digital level control for RF power
and modulation percentage.
2.3.9 Serial I/O CCA (1A11) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-14. The Serial I/O CCA
provides the transmitter portion of the RS-232 monitor interface. It contains 4 serial data channels:
Channel Address UART Transmit Receive

1 base + 080 U4 J2-5 J2-3
2 base + 020 U6 J1-5 J1-3
3 base + 100 U11 J2-6 J2-4
4 base + 200 U12 J1-6 J1-4
The Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitters (UARTs) convert parallel data to and from a serial
digital 8 bit data stream of ASCII characters. When a UART's receive buffer is full, it generates an
interrupt. The microprocessor then polls all possible interrupt causes. When it senses the interrupt was
caused by one of the UARTs it addresses the UART parallel data register through the address bus. The
address lines are buffered by U2. The interface IC's U7, U8, U9, and U10 convert the TTL logic levels
to and from RS-232 interface voltage levels. U13 and U14 are used to invert the control signals CTS
and RTS/DTR.
Channel 1 has been traditionally used for the field monitor data. Channel 2 is used for near field monitor
or far field monitor data. Channel 3 will be used for interprocessor data between a dual system's
transmitters and channel 4 will be for future use. The connector J3 provides a direct path from the
backplane to the wire harness for the four signals CSB XFR, SBO XFR, 8 Hz KEY RATE, and 1 HZ
FOR WATCHDOG.

The jumpers E7-E18 and E25-E36 enable the transmit and receive lines to be reversed. The default
positions are E7-E8, E11-E12, E12-E14, E17-E18, E25-E26, E29-E30, E31-E32, E35-E36. Jumpers
E1-E6 and E19-E24 are used for handshaking. They are left open for this application.
2.3.10 Power Panel (1A27) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-15. Primary ac power for the
localizer system enters the electronic cabinet through TB2 at the back of the cabinet base. From there it
is controlled by dual 10-ampere circuit breaker CB1. One line goes to Power Supply (1A29) and the
other to resistor R7, current limiter for the internal lamp of CB1.
Power Supply (1A29) is a +28-Vdc source of power for the station's electrical circuits and for the backup
battery pack (charged through CB2). In a dual configuration, the dc voltage is OR'ed at the anodes of
CR4 and CR5 for monitoring the main supply voltage for the system.
There are two relays on the Power Panel Assembly. Relay K1 is the battery backup relay, controlled by
a low-voltage sensor on input power monitor 1A27A2. Relay K2 is energized by a ground from the
power CCA and provides +28 Vdc to the Modulator Assembly (1A5).
One section (line 1) of CB2 controls 28 Vdc to the localizer station. The other section controls current
to the battery backup assembly. High-current diode CR2 is attached to the battery control side of CB2
and, if the negative terminal of the battery pack is inadvertently connected to the positive output, the
resulting high current will cause CB2 to open and disconnect Power Supply Assembly (1A29) from the
battery.
If the primary ac power is off for an extended time, and the battery backup is in operation, a sensor on
the input power monitor will de-energize K1 when the battery voltage drops to 21.5 V. When relay K1
is de-energized, the LOW BATT VOLTAGE indicator lights.
LOCAL/REMOTE switch S1 transfers data between the front panel RS-232 connector (LOCAL) and the
REMOTE connector on back of the front panel. Resistor R1 on the ILS Current Limiter (1A31) limits
battery charging current. Diode CR1 allows for current bypass when operating on batteries only.
2.3.10.1 Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-16. This CCA
scales the station voltages and currents for use by the built-in test equipment. Since the circuits that
scale the PRI DCI and BATT DCI are functionally the same only the circuit used to scale the PRI DCI is
discussed.
The PRI DCI at connector J1 pin 10 and is applied to the inverting input of differential amplifier U1A
through resistor R2. Scaling of the primary DC current, the course and clearance DC current and the
battery charging current is identical, operationally. The voltage difference between pins 2 and 3 is
inverted and amplified by approximately 10 by U1A. The output of U1A exits the CCA via connector
J1 pin 7 and is applied to the Analog I/O CCA. Zener diode CR3 provides over voltage protection by
eliminating voltages in excess of +7.5 or below -.7 Vdc.

The AC HI Input voltage enters the CCA via connector J1 pin 14 and is stepped down to 6 Vac by
transformer T1. The 6 Vac is then rectified by diodes CR1 and CR2, filtered by R14 and C5, and
applied to the Analog I/O CCA (1A13). The primary of T1 can be configured for 120 of 220 Vac
operation. Connections made between jumpers E1-E3 and E2-E4 are for 120 Vac operation.
Connections between jumper E2-E3 configure the CCA for 220 Vac operation.
The PRI DCV (+28 Vdc) enters the CCA via connector J1 pin 9 and is stepped down to 2.9 Vdc by R5
and R6. The 2.9 Vdc is filtered by C12 and exits the CCA on pin 8 where it is applied to the Analog I/O
CCA (1A13).
The zener diodes on the op amp outputs protect the A/D inputs by breaking down at 7.5 V.
2.3.10.2 Input Power Monitor/Watchdog (1A27A2/1A27A3) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-
17. If the main DC voltage drops below approximately 21.5, for example after extended station
operation on batteries, the input power monitor will disconnect the batteries from the station by opening
a relay. When the main DC voltage drops below the reference established by voltage divider R8 and R9,
U3 will turn off Q3, removing ground from the battery backup relay.
The circuits of U5, U6, U7, and Q4 are the watchdog. These circuits will cause the station to shut down
by disconnecting DC power to the modulator assembly if the transmitter control microprocessor stops
functioning, but this is an abnormal condition. If there is an alarm, the normal shutdown is
accomplished by the microprocessor turning off the CSB and SBO audio signals on the audio generator.
The microprocessor normally produces several watchdog pulses per second. The watchdog pulse is
applied to U5, a pulse generator that creates a pulse approximately 50 microseconds wide. This pulse is
applied to the clear input of binary counter U6 through NAND gates U7C and U7D. When the binary
counter is reset, the output (pin 12) is a HIGH which will cause Q4 to remain biased on. A ground at
E12 allows relay(s) K2 (single systems) or K2/K3 (dual systems) to energize, applying 28 Vdc to the
modulator. The clock to U6 is the 8-Hz from the audio generator, buffered by NAND gates U7A and
U7B. It takes 16 clock pulses or two seconds for U6 to time out. If U6 times out, Q4 will remove the
ground from relay K2 on the power panel. This will remove DC power from the modulator, causing the
station to shut down. However, if the Microprocessor is functioning normally, it will be applying a
watchdog pulse to the clear input of counter U6 at least once every two seconds. Therefore, as long the
Microprocessor is functioning normally, U6 will not time out.
2.3.11 Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-18. The low
voltage power supply provides ±12 and +5 Vdc for the localizer station. The power supply consists of
two circuits: one supplies ±12 and the other +5 Vdc. In the first circuit, the +28 Vdc primary supply is
filtered by capacitor C1 and then applied to Z1, a dual-output dc/dc converter that supplies ±12 Vdc with
±1% regulation under load. The breakdown voltage of Zener diodes CR1 and CR2 is 14.3 Vdc
minimum to protect the circuits from overvoltage. The output voltages are filtered by C2 and C3.

Operation of the +5 Vdc supply is similar. Power supply Z2 output is approximately +5.2 Vdc.
Resistors R1 and R2 are used to set the voltage slightly above 5 volts. Zener diode CR3 has a
breakdown voltage rating of 6.45. Capacitor C5 filters the output voltage.
2.3.12 Phaser (1A3/1A1A4) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-19. This assembly is installed in
the SBO RF output line. RF phase is set by variable capacitor C3.
2.3.13 Display CCA (1A1A1/1A1A4) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-20. The three status
indicator circuits operate identically. For example, a HIGH at J3-16 turns on Q1, completing the dc path
for the LED to light the green NORMAL indicator.
2.3.14 ILS Current Limiter (1A31) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-21. Resistor R1 is used to
limit the battery charging current. During battery charging, diode D1 is reversed biased. When the
system is operating from the battery backup, diode D1 conducts to reduce the voltage drop across the
current limiter to a minimum.
2.3.15 Power Sensor Assembly (1A34) Theory of Operation.- Refer to Capture-Effect Localizer
Interconnect schematic, figure 11-22. The Power Sensor Assembly consists of four power sensors, one
in each of the CSB output lines and one in each of the SBO output lines. The power sensors return
detected forward and reverse power to the RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25).
The Power Sensor Assembly (1A34) contains a Bird power sensor for each RF signal exiting the cabinet.
The power sensors for the CSB signals contain a 25 W sensor for forward power and a 10 W element for
reflected power. The SBO power sensors contain 5 W elements for both forward and reflected power.
The sensor outputs a current proportional to the RMS power of the signal entering it. A shunt resistor
placed across the sensor indicator outputs generates a proportional voltage that is then amplified by the
RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25).
2.3.16 Synthesizer Power Coupler Module (1A35/1A36) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-23.
This assembly receives the synthesizer RF output signal at J1. Most of the signal passes directly out of
J2, and on to the Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7/1A23). A sample of the signal is coupled through
C1, and amplified and buffered by a monolithic amplifier, U1. This amplified signal is routed through
J3 and sent to the Transfer and Control Unit. U2 is a fixed +12 Vdc regulator that regulates the +28 Vdc
input to J4. R1, R2, and L1 form the bias network for the monolithic amplifier.
2.3.17 Transfer Control Unit Simplified Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-3. In the dual
capture-effect localizer, two separate transmitter cabinets are used. The cabinets are identified as
equipment 1 or equipment 2, and are interchangeable only through software. Data stored in EEPROMs
in each unit identifies it as either equipment 1 or equipment 2. The two cabinets are interconnected with
the antenna system through the Transfer Control Unit (TCU), which performs the functions needed to

place either equipment on-line with the antenna system. Control signals and DC power are routed from
each transmitter cabinet to the TCU via shielded cables connected to DB-25 connectors located on the
bottom of the TCU. The six RF output signals from each transmitter are routed through RF cables
before entering through the top of the TCU via 12 bulkhead jack "N" connectors. A large exterior access
hole is provided for routing data, power and RF cables to the antenna system.
The TCU, identified as equipment 3, is housed in a painted metal enclosure and includes one circuit card
assembly, six RF relays, 4 dummy loads, 4 wattmeter bodies, one transient suppressor assembly, one
shelter temperature sensor assembly, a wiring harness assembly and several RF cable assemblies. The
Relay Logic CCA (3A1) controls and monitors six RF relays (K1 -K6). The relays are used to connect
the active transmitter's RF output signals to the antenna system and connect the idle transmitter's CSB
and SBO outputs to dummy loads (R1, R2, R3 and R4). The Transient Suppressor assembly (3A2)
protects the circuitry of the TCU and both transmitters from potentially damaging transients which may
be present on the external wiring entering the TCU. The Shelter Temperature Sensor Assembly (3A3)
sends shelter temperature data to both transmitter cabinets for processing.
The TCU also provides mounting locations, interface wiring and transient suppression circuitry for the
following optional equipment modules: 3A4 (Equipment/RSCU Interface CCA), 3A5 (Far Field
Monitor/RSCU Interface CCA), 3A6 (DME Keying Interface Transmitter CCA) and 3A7 (Far Field
Monitor/Short Haul Modem Assembly).
If an optional Near Field Monitor is installed, bulkhead "N" connector J17 on the top of the TCU is used
for routing the RF input signal to the Near Field Monitor cabinet.
2.3.17.1 Transfer Control Unit (TCU) Theory of Operation.- Refer to figure 11-3. Control signals and
DC power are routed to the TCU from each transmitter cabinet via shielded cables which connect to two
DB-25 connectors, J1 and J2. J1 is connected to equipment 1 and J2 is connected to equipment 2. The
six RF output signals from each transmitter (COURSE CSB, COURSE SBO, CLEARANCE CSB,
CLEARANCE SBO, COURSE SYNTHESIZER COUPLED RF and CLEARANCE SYNTHESIZER
COUPLED RF) enter the TCU via 12 bulkhead jack "N" connectors (J5 through J16). These RF signals
are then routed through cables to RF relays K1 through K6. All relays are latching type relays and
contain position indicating circuitry. RF relays K1, K2, K3 and K4 are used to connect the active
transmitter's COURSE CSB, COURSE SBO, CLEARANCE CSB and CLEARANCE SBO outputs to
the antenna system and connect the idle transmitter's RF outputs to dummy loads R1 through R4.
Wattmeter bodies DC1, DC2, DC3, and DC4 are connected by RF cables to the output ports of relays
K1, K2, K3, and K4, providing a convenient location for making CSB and SBO RF power
measurements when used in conjunction with the CE LOC Maintenance kit (Part No. 470328-0001),
which contains a wattmeter and various wattmeter elements. The RF signals at the output ports of the
wattmeter bodies are then routed out through the TCU's exterior access hole to the antenna system. RF
relays K5 and K6 connect the active transmitter's COURSE and CLEARANCE SYNTHESIZER
COUPLED RF signals to the antenna system.

2.3.17.2 Transfer Logic CCA (3A1) Circuit Theory.- Refer to figure 11-25. +28 Vdc power is routed
from equipment 1 to J1-6B and from equipment 2 to J1-6C of the Relay Logic CCA (3A1). These
inputs are diode OR'ed together by CR3 and CR4 and routed through fuse F1. From there, +28 VDC is
routed off-board through J1-4C where it is used to energize RF relays K1 through K6. Fused +28 VDC
power is also routed on-board to power supply module PS1, which is used to derive +5 VDC power for
use on-board and also off-board through J1-16A, where it is used to power the relay position indicator
circuitry for all six RF relays located inside the TCU. Timer Device U2 and it's associated circuitry are
connected as an astable multivibrator to provide a 40 Hz clock signal to U1-1. R1, C1, and CR1 form a
power-on reset circuit which temporarily disables U1 during initial power-up, preventing power or input
signal glitches from causing nuisance alarms, transfers or equipment shutdowns.
On initial power-up, equipment 1 communicates it's status (on-line) to equipment 2. Equipment 1 then
sends a LOW-going pulse to the SELECT 1 input pin (J1-12C) of the Relay Logic board. This causes
the PAL (U1) to output a HIGH-going pulse at pin 14. This pulse drives Q1 into saturation, which in
turn drives all six latching RF relays to position 1. If all six relays successfully switch to position 1, the
relay position indicator circuitry inside each relay will force all input pins at U7 to a logic LOW and all
input pins at U8 to a logic HIGH. The outputs from U7 and U8 are routed to the PAL (U1), which sees a
logic LOW at U1-3 and a logic HIGH at U1-5. This causes PAL output U1-16 to go LOW which in turn
causes comparator output U4-7 to go LOW. This output (XFER VALID (1)) is then routed off board
through J1-4A to equipment 1 where the logic LOW causes equipment 1 to begin transmitting. If,
however, any one of the six relays or their associated circuitry fails to switch to position 1, the logic level
at J1-4A will remain HIGH and a "TRANSFER SWITCH FAILURE" notice is transmitted to the
terminal and equipment 1 will shutdown. Following the transfer delay, equipment 2 will attempt to
come on-line by sending a low-going pulse to the SELECT 2 input pin (J1-11C) of the Relay Logic
(3A1) board. This causes the PAL (U1) to output a HIGH-going pulse at pin 15. This pulse drives Q2
into saturation, which in turn drives all six latching RF relays to position 2. If all six relays successfully
switch to position 2, the relay position indicator circuitry inside each relay will force all input pins at U7
to a logic HIGH and all input pins at U8 to a logic LOW. The outputs from U7 and U8 are routed to the
PAL (U1), which sees a logic HIGH at U1-3 and a logic LOW at U1-5. This causes PAL output U1-21
to go LOW which in turn causes comparator output U5-7 to go LOW. This output (XFER VALID (2))
is then routed off board through J1-9A to equipment 2 where the logic LOW causes equipment 2 to
begin transmitting. If, however, any one of the six relays or their associated circuitry fails to switch to
position 2, the logic level at J1-9A will remain HIGH and a "TRANSFER SWITCH FAILURE" notice is
transmitted to the terminal and equipment 2 will shutdown.
2.3.17.3 Transient Suppressor Assembly (3A2) Circuit Theory.- All power and NON-RF signal lines to
the antenna system or any remote optional equipment are first routed through the Transient Suppressor
assembly (3A2), which is designed to protect the TCU and each transmitter cabinet's circuitry from
potentially damaging transients which may be present on the external wiring entering the TCU.
2.3.17.4 Shelter Temperature Sensor Assembly (3A3) Circuit Theory.- Refer to figure 11-27. The
Shelter Temperature Sensor output is routed from the TCU to each transmitter cabinet for further
processing.

2.3.17.5 ILS Control Interface CCA Block Diagram Theory (Optional).- Refer to figure 2-5. The ILS
Control Interface CCA is an optional CCA that is installed in the localizer transmitter cabinet. It
provides the RSCU with a visual indication of the operating status of the localizer system. The ILS
Control Interface CCA also decodes control signals from the RSCU for use within the localizer system.
The Encoder State/Time-Base Generator consists of timer U16 and counter U15. This circuit creates a
4-bit binary count that is applied to the Tone Encoder/Transmitter.
The Tone Encoder/Transmitter consists of PAL U14 and Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) generator
U13. Status signals from the localizer and the binary count from the Encoder State/Time-Base
Generator are applied to the Tone Encoder/Transmitter where they are encoded into DTMF signals and
applied to the Data Access Arrangement (DAA) circuit as the Tone Out signal.
The 3.58 MHz oscillator creates the timing signal for the Tone Encoder/Transmitter and the Tone
Receiver. The oscillator consists of inverters U1D, U1E, and U1F; resistors R3 and R19; and crystal Y1.
The DAA circuit is an amplifier buffer circuit that consists of amplifiers U12A, U12B, and U12C and
coupling transformer T1. The Tone Out signal is amplified and buffered within the DAA circuit then
sent to the RSCU on the Tip and Ring telephone lines as a Tone Coded Data Stream.
The Tone Coded Data Stream, from the RSCU, is applied to the DAA circuit where it is amplified,
buffered, and applied to the Tone Receiver circuit as the Tone In signal.

Figure 2-5. ILS Control Interface CCA, Block Diagram.
The Tone Receiver circuit consists of DTMF receiver U7 and terminal boards TB1 and TB2. U7
decodes the Tone In signal into 4-bit binary data which is applied to the Decoder circuit. Jumpers on
terminal boards TB1 and TB2 are used to select the sensitivity of U7.
The Decoder consists of decoders U8 and U11 and inverter U1A. U8 and U11 decode the data from U7
and generate preset (PR) or clear (CL) signals that are applied to the Function Latch/Driver circuit.
The Function Latch/Driver circuit consists of quad D flip-flops U2, U5, and U9, and positive AND
drivers U3 and U10. It converts the PR or CL signals into control signals that are applied to ILS for
processing.

The Unmonitored Line Detector consists of retriggerable monostable multivibrator U4A. U4A receives
a Strobe from U7. During normal operation, the Strobe constantly triggers U4A never allowing it to
time out. If the strobe is absent for more than 3.4 seconds, U4A will time out, sending a communication
fault to the Function Latch/Driver.
2.3.17.6 ILS Control Interface CCA (012713-1001) Detailed Circuit Theory.- Refer to figure 11-24.
Inverters U1E and U1F; resistors R19 and R3; capacitor C26; and crystal Y1 form an oscillator which
creates the 3.58 MHz timing signal that is applied to DTMF Generator U13 and DTMF Receiver U7.
Timer U16 is configured to operate as an astable multivibrator. It creates a 10 Hz signal which is

applied to the A input of monolithic counter U15.
Monolithic counter U15 is configured to operate as a 4-bit binary counter with a maximum count of
eight. The RO (1) input of U15 is connected to +5 Vdc and its RO (2) is connected to the Q̄ output of D-
type flip-flop U9A. Whenever the QD output of U15 goes from a LOW to a HIGH, U9A is clocked.
This causes the Q̄ output of U9A to go HIGH which resets U15 to a count of zero. U15 will remain at a
count of zero until U9A is reset, which allows U15 to count again.
PAL U14 encodes the #1 Ant, Alarm, Equip 1 Status, Equip 2 Status, and #2 Ant status signals by
means of the binary count from U15. This information is encoded by U14 to develop row and column
data information for DTMF generator U13. Unused inputs of U14 are pulled HIGH by resistor pack R4.
The eight inputs of U13 are organized to represent the four rows and columns of an expanded keypad.
Selecting a unique row and column combination causes U13 to generate the unique DTMF tone
associated with that combination. The DTMF signal from U13 is the Tone Out signal that is applied to
amplifier U12B. Potentiometer R10 is used to adjust the level of the tone before it is applied to
amplifier U12B. The Tone Out signal is adjusted to produce a 1 Vpp signal on the telephone lines. This
level is approximately equivalently -7 dbm at 600 ohms and insures that the signal driving the tone
decoder circuit in the RSCU is not distorted from being overdriven.
U12B is a low power JFET operational amplifier with an approximate gain of 1. The Tone Out signal
generated by U13 is applied to the inverting input of U12B. Voltage divider network R17 and R18
establishes a reference voltage of approximately 3 volts at the non-inverting input of U12B. The output
of U12B is applied to the inverting input of U12A. The non-inverting input of U12A is also set to a
reference of approximately 3 volts. The output of U12A is applied to transformer T1 and exits the CCA
via connector P1 pins 1 and 2 and is applied to the Tip and Ring telephone lines.
The DTMF signals enter the ILS Control Interface CCA via connector P1 pins 1 and 2. These signals
consist of a dual-tone multifrequency, similar to that produced by U13. After entering the CCA the
DTMF signals are applied to transformer T1.
From T1 the DTMF signals are applied to the inverting input of U12C. U12C is a low power, JFET
operational amplifier with a gain of approximately 1. The output of U12C is approximately 2.5 volts
and is coupled to U7 by capacitor C3.

U7 is a DTMF receiver with dial tone reject filter. U7 is used to decode the DTMF signals into four bit
binary data words that are applied to decoders U8 and U11. The Strobe output of U7 is used to enable
U8 and U11, it is also applied to the A input of the unmonitored line detector U4A. The Strobe goes to
logic HIGH after a valid tone pair is sensed and decoded. It remains HIGH until a valid end-of-signal
pause occurs or the Clear input of U7 is driven HIGH by U9A. Once cleared, Strobe will remain LOW
until a new valid tone is detected.
Jumpers on terminal boards TB1 and TB2 select the sensitivity of the Signal In input to a maximum of -
38 dBm.
Decoders U8 and U11 decode the lower three hexadecimal bits from U7 and generate active-LOW PR
and CL signals that go to the D-type flip-flops in the function latch/driver. The D3 output of U7 is
applied to the G2A enable input of U8 and to G2A enable input of U11 through inverter U1A.
Whenever the D3 output is HIGH U11 will be enabled and whenever the D3 output is LOW U8 will be
enabled. The Strobe output of U7 is applied to the G1 inputs of U8, U11 and to the A input of U4A.
Under normal conditions the Strobe output of U7 will be HIGH enabling U8 and U11. A LOW Strobe
will disable U8 and U11 causing all of their outputs to go HIGH.
Retriggerable monostable multivibrator U4A has an output pulse width of approximately 3.7 seconds.
U4A gets its trigger input from the Strobe of U7. The Strobe from U7 is constantly changing from
HIGH to LOW and from LOW to HIGH depending on the condition of the valid tones that are being
received and the condition of the Clear input of U7. When the Strobe, from U7, goes LOW, U4A trips
and outputs a HIGH from its Q output. As long as U7 continues to receive valid tones, U7 will continue
to trigger U4A. If the trigger from U7 is absent for more than 3.7 seconds, U4A will time out. This
causes the Q output of U4A to go LOW. The LOW exits the CCA via connector J2 pin 5 as the No Data
signal. Under normal circumstances U4A will never be allowed to time out.
D-type flip-flops U2A, U2B, U5A, U5B, and U9B all operate the same, so only the operation of U2A
will be discussed. Active LOW signals from decoder U8 are applied to either the PR or CL of U2A. A
LOW on the PR input of U2A causes its Q̄ output to go HIGH. A LOW applied to the CL input of U2A
will cause its Q̄ output to go LOW. These signals are applied to terminal board TB4. Jumpers across
TB4 are used to select the Q or Q̄ outputs of U2A.
From TB4 the output of U2A is applied to the B2 input of positive-AND driver U3. A LOW applied to
the B2 input of U3 causes it to output a LOW. The output of U3 exits the CCA via connector J2 pin 8 as
the #2 ON signal via J1-8.
D-type flip-flop U9A resets binary counter U15 and clears DTMF receiver U7. Whenever a LOW is
applied to the PR input of U9A, its Q output goes HIGH and its Q̄ output goes LOW. The HIGH from
the Q output sends a Clear pulse to DTMF Receiver U7 which forces its Strobe output to a LOW. The
LOW from the Q̄ output is applied to the R0 (2) input of U15 which resets its count to zero.
Bypass capacitor C1 filters the +5 Vdc entering via connector P1 pins 1C and 32C. Zener diodes VR1
and VR2 eliminate voltage spikes in excess of 5.1 volts.
Retriggerable multivibrator U4B and amplifier U12D are not used.

SECTION 3. OPERATIONS
3.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section identifies the operating controls and indicators and details procedures
for using the computer terminal numeric code system.
3.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.- The Model 1100-0202 Capture-Effect Localizer is controlled via
a video terminal. All power levels, modulation levels and control functions are set with the terminal. Refer
to table 3-1 for descriptions of controls, indicators, protective devices, and connectors. Control and indicator
locations are shown in figure 3-1.
Table 3-1. Controls and Indicators.
Control or Indicator Ref Des Function
AC Circuit Breaker 1A27CB1 Primary AC on/off switch breaks AC path when current
drawn by station is excessive. AC indicator lights when
power is applied.
DC Circuit Breaker 1A27CB2 Primary DC on/off switch breaks DC path when station
current is excessive.
NORM Indicator 1A1A1DS1 Green LED lights when station operation is normal.
ALARM Indicator 1A1A1DS2 Red LED lights when station is in alarm.
BYPASS Indicator 1A1A1DS3 Amber LED lights when station monitor is bypassed.
CONTROL SELECT 1A27S1 Selects local or remote control of station.

LOCAL/REMOTE
REMOTE Indicator 1A27DS2 Lights to indicate control is remote.
LOCAL Indicator 1A27DS3 Lights to indicate control is local.

Figure 3-1. Capture-Effect Localizer Controls and Indicators.

3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION USING CONTROL CODES.- A video terminal is used to control all the
localizer control and level setting functions. An RS-232, 25-pin, D-shell connector is provided on the front
panel for direct connection to a Wyse WY-30 Video terminal, a Links MC5 video terminal, or any
equivalent ASCII terminal at 1200 baud. The video terminal must be set to communicate with 8 data bits,
no parity, 1 stop bit, and XON/XOFF handshaking is enabled. Consult the video terminal operating manual
for configuration instructions. The LOCAL/REMOTE switch (on the Power Panel Assembly) must be
placed in the LOCAL positon to allow on-site communication with the video terminal. When leaving the
shelter, set the switches to the REMOTE position, on each system, to allow phone line communication
through the modem. The control codes for the Model 1100-0202 Capture-Effect Localizer are listed in
tables 3-3 and 3-4.
The sign-on message "Main Loop Entry" will be displayed on the video terminal screen after application of
power. Then, the station requires entry of the password so the operator can read the various transmitter
levels and settings. Enter the password and the transmitter will reply "Password Recognized". The operator
may now read transmitter parameters such as voltage levels, alarm limits, etc. When reading levels are
continuously displayed, it is necessary to use CTRL J (hold the CTRL key down and strike J) to exit the
command. On keyboards equipped with a LINE FEED key, LINE FEED can be used in place of the CTRL
J.
To alter transmitter settings or to change monitor alarm limits, the station must be in the bypass mode of
operation. To enter the bypass mode the station password must already have been entered. The response
will be the display of "ENTER SECURITY CODE". On entering the station security code, the response
displayed will be "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS". The security code must be entered within 5 seconds
after receiving the ENTER SECURITY CODE prompt or the station will respond with ACCESS DENIED.
Neither the password nor the security code are displayed on the terminal or the printer.
Transmitter parameters, such as RF power and modulation levels, are changed by first entering the
appropriate control code (tables 3-3 and 3-4) while in bypass, then using certain numeric keys to adjust the
level. For example, to adjust carrier power, enter "100", then to increase power, strike the "5" key. Notice
that the RF power increases and the DAC count (number in parentheses) increments by a value of 10. For
a finer adjustment, strike the "9" key. This will increase the RF power in smaller steps as the DAC count
increments by 1. To decrease RF power, the "1" key will decrement the DAC count by 10 as the power
decreases by a proportional amount. The "7" key is the fine adjustment, decrementing the DAC count by
1. Do not use the ENTER key when making adjustments. Simply press the proper numeric key to change
the level. To escape from the command when the desired level is attained, use CTRL J as discussed
previously.
100 ENTER
9 (increments level 1 step)
5 (increments level 10 steps)
7 (decrements level 1 step)
1 (decrements level 10 steps)
CTRL J (exit from command)

3.3.1 Turn-on Procedure.- Refer to figure 3-1. Refer to section 7 if there is an alarm.
a. Connect the communications cable, to the D-shell connector on the Localizer Power Panel Assembly
of the desired station. Connect the other end of the communication cable to the modem port of the
video terminal.
b. Place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to the LOCAL position.
c. Place the video terminal ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
d. Place the Main and Standby system AC and DC circuit breakers in the ON position. Verify the
battery back-up circuit breaker is in the ON position.
e. Verify the NORMAL (green), ALARM (red), and BYPASS (amber) indicators on both systems
illuminate. After 1 to 5 seconds, all status indicators will extinguish. The NORMAL indicator on
the Main system will then come on to indicate normal system operation. The NORMAL indicator
on the Standby system will begin to flash.
f. Verify the video terminal displays the sign-on message "MAIN LOOP ENTRY". The Localizer is
in the Normal Mode of operation.
3.3.2 Log-On Procedure.-
a. Using the video terminal, enter the station password and press the [ENTER] key. System will
respond with a "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED". Read codes listed in tables 3-3 and 3-4 may be
performed at this time.
NOTE
The system password has been supplied by Airport Systems and is noted on the equipment
data sheet. If it has been changed for local requirements it will be made available from the
responsible authority.
b. To place the system in the bypass mode of operation, enter control code "99" (Enter Bypass) and
press the [ENTER] key. System will response with a "ENTER SECURITY CODE" message.
c. Entering the system security code and press the [ENTER] key. System will response with a
"ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message. The security code must be entered within 5 seconds
after receiving the ENTER SECURITY CODE prompt or the station will respond with ACCESS
DENIED.
d. Verify the BYPASS indicator illuminates. Once the system is in the Bypass Mode, all control,
display, and set functions may be performed.

e. Simultaneously press the [CONTROL] and [J] keys. This will scroll the screen in preparation for
the next control code entry.
f. Exit the Bypass Mode by typing control code "98" (Exit Bypass) and pressing the [ENTER] key.
Verify the BYPASS indicator extinguishes.
g. Before returning the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE and leaving the shelter, type control
code "91" (Sign-off) and press the [ENTER] key. This forces the equipment to exit all levels of
security. The station will respond with "GOODBYE".
3.3.3 Sign-on Procedure Using the RMM Video Terminal.-
a. On the RMM, Type [ATDT] or [ATDP], [the telephone number of the site], and press the [ENTER]
key. The equipment will establish communications and the terminal "connect" will print out.
b. Using the video terminal, enter the equipment password and press the [ENTER] key. System will
respond with a "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED". Read codes listed in tables 3-3 and 3-4 may be
performed at this time.
NOTE
The system password has been supplied by Airport Systems and is noted on the equipment
data sheet. If it has been changed for local requirements it will be made available from the
responsible authority.
c. To place the system in the bypass mode of operation, enter control code 99 (enter bypass) and press
the [ENTER] key. System will response with a "ENTER SECURITY CODE" message.
d. Entering the system security code and press the [ENTER] key. System will respond with a
"ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message. The security code must be entered within 5 seconds
after receiving the ENTER SECURITY CODE prompt or the station will respond with "ACCESS
DENIED".
e. Verify the BYPASS indicator illuminates. Once the system is in the Bypass Mode, all control,
display, and set functions may be performed.
f. Simultaneously press the [CONTROL] and [J] keys. This will scroll the screen in preparation for
the next control code entry.
g. When system checks are complete, exit the Bypass Mode by typing control code "98" (Exit Bypass),
and pressing [ENTER].
h. Hang-up from remote location by typing control code "091" (Hang-up From Remote Location) and
pressing [ENTER]. Modem will disconnect and system will operate normally.

3.3.4 Entering System in FORTH.- The station password, security code, and FORTH Mode password are
entered by placing the system in the FORTH mode of operation. In the following procedures, quotation
marks (" ") are used to aid clarity and are NOT to be used when typing commands into the terminal. The
underline (_) is used indicate a spacebar entry and is NOT used when typing commands into the video
terminal.
NOTE
This procedure causes a station shutdown, and must have prior approval by the appropriate
air traffic coordination at any commissioned facility.
a. Enter control code "99" (Enter Master Bypass) to place the station in the BYPASS mode of
operation.
b. Enter "5432", or the site-specific Forth Mode Password, if it has been changed by the responsible
authorities. The station terminal response will be TERMINAL MODE FORTH-65V 4.0 and the
station will shut down.
c. Enter "DECIMAL". The station terminal will respond OK. The station is now in the FORTH mode
.
NOTE
Without entering the "DECIMAL" command, all keyboard entries will be entered in
hexadecimal.
d. To exit FORTH, enter "LOCGS.CONTROL". The station terminal response will be "MAIN LOOP
ENTRY" and a station restart.
3.3.5 Changing Station Password.- The station password can be any number up to 65535. Due to software
requirements, only numbers may be entered as the station's password.
NOTE
operation.
authorities. The station video terminal response will be TERMINAL MODE FORTH-65V 4.0 and
the station will shut down.

.
NOTE
hexadecimal. This will write a hexadecimal equivalent into the station's memory. Thus, the
number entered as the new password will not allow users access to the system.
d. Enter "PSWRD_@_.", or "PSWRD_?". The station will respond with the current password
followed by an OK.
e. Enter new password number, up to 65535 as follows: "XXXX_PSWRD_WRPROM" (X

being the number to be entered as the password). The command will look like this: XXXX
PSWRD WRPROM. The video terminal response will be OK.
f. Verify the new station password by entering "PSWRD_@_.", or "PSWRD_?". The station video
terminal will response with the new password and an OK message.
g. Return the station to normal operation by exiting the FORTH mode of operation, enter
"LOCGS.CONTROL". The station video terminal response will be "MAIN LOOP ENTRY" and
the station will restart.
3.3.6 Changing the Security Code.- Follow the same procedures as in paragraph 3.3.5 when changing the
password. Substitute "SECWRD" for "PSWRD" in each entry. The security code can be any number up
to 65535. Due to software requirements, only numbers may be entered as the station's security code.
NOTE
operation.
authorities. The station video terminal response will be TERMINAL MODE FORTH-65V 4.0 and
c. Enter "DECIMAL". The station terminal will respond OK. The station is now in the FORTH mode.

NOTE
number entered as the new security code will not allow users access to the system.
d. Enter "SECWRD_@_.", or "SECWRD_?". The station video terminal will respond with the current
password followed by an OK.
e. Enter new security code, up to 65535 as follows: "XXXX_SECWRD_WRPROM" (X being the

number to be entered as the security code). The command will look like this: XXXX SECWRD
WRPROM. The video terminal response will be OK.
f. To verify the new security code, enter "SECWRD_@_.", or "SECWRD_?". The station video
terminal response with the new security code and an OK message.
g. Return the station to normal operation by exiting the FORTH Mode of operation, enter
"LOCGS.CONTROL". The station video terminal response will be "MAIN LOOP ENTRY" and
the station will restart.
3.3.7 Changing Forth Mode Password.- Follow the same procedures as in paragraph 3.3.5 when changing
the password. Substitute "OUTWRD" for "PSWRD" in each entry. The Forth Mode Password can be any
number, up to 65535. Due to software requirements, only numbers may be entered as the station's Forth
Mode Password.
NOTE
a. Enter control code "099" (Enter Bypass) to place the station in the BYPASS mode of operation.
authorities.The station video terminal response will be TERMINAL MODE FORTH-65V 4.0 and
.
NOTE
number entered as the new forth mode password will not allow users access to the system.

d. Read the forth mode password by entering "OUTWRD_@_.", or "OUTWRD_?"
e. Enter new forth mode password, up to 65535 as follows: "XXXX_OUTWRD_WRPROM" (X being

the number to be entered as the password). The command will look like this: XXXX OUTWRD
WRPROM. The video terminal response will be OK.
f. Read the new forth mode password by entering "OUTWRD_@_.", or "OUTWRD_?"
g. Return the station to normal operation by exiting FORTH, enter "LOCGS.CONTROL". The station
terminal response will be "MAIN LOOP ENTRY" and a station restart.
3.3.8 Changing the Station Identifier Message.- This procedure should be used to change the station
identifier message in the call-out message as seen on the video terminal. This identifier message is not to
be confused with the radiated station ID.
a. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to place the station in the Bypass mode of operation.
b. Enter control code "017". The station video terminal will display the current identifier message.
c. Enter control code "977". The station video terminal response will be with a ">". Enter the
identifying message, up to 15 characters in length.
d. Enter control code "017". The station video terminal response will be the new identifier message.
e. Exit the Bypass Mode by typing control code "98" (Exit Bypass) and pressing the [ENTER] key.
3.3.9 Changing the Call-out Telephone Number.-
a. Enter control code "099" (Enter Bypass) to place the station in the Bypass mode of operation.
b. Enter control code "957" (Set Dial-Out Phone Number). The station terminal response will be:
FOR DIAL OUT: Enter the Modem Command Plus Phone Number
FOR NO DIAL OUT & LOCAL MESSAGE PRINT: Enter Asterisk (*)
c. For dial-out, enter "ATDT" for tone type dialing or "ATDP" for pulse type dialing, and the telephone
number you wish to call with an error message. Example: ATDT 1-913-555-1234. If no modem
is connected to the station, enter "*". This will cause the station to display the fault message on the
video terminal and not try to connect to a remote location.

d. Enter control code "16" (Display Dial-Out Phone Number). The station terminal response will be
the new modem command and phone number entered or an "*".
e. Exit the Bypass Mode by typing control code "98" (Exit Bypass) and pressing the [ENTER] key.
3.3.10 Setting Date and Time.- Read the time and date by entering control code "018" on the video
terminal. To change the current station date and/or time settings follow this procedure:
The system operator enters "070" to update both the date and the time. To change only the date, enter
control code "071". Control code "072" allows the time to be updated. A system prompt, consisting of the
parameter name and the allowable input data range will be displayed on the operator's terminal screen. Enter
the appropriate response following the prompt (>). For example, to change the date to 06/08/94 and the time
to 09:25:
>070
Enter Year 00-99
>94
Enter Month 01-12
>06
Enter Date 01-31
>08
Enter Hour 00-23
>09
Enter Minutes 00-59
>25
3.3.11 Set Bypass Time Limit.- On the video terminal, type control code "077". When the prompt (>)
appears, enter the desired bypass time limit, in seconds, maximum setting 32,000.
NOTE
The Bypass mode time limit can be set up for an approximate 9-hour period to allow for
maintenance tasks. When the Bypass mode is exited and then re-entered, the time limit is
automatically reset to 15 minutes. Do not extend Bypass time from a remote location.
3.4 MODEM OPERATIONS.- Following an alarm-induced shutdown or a maintenance alert condition,

the station will initiate a call-out and send a message detailing the system fault.
When calling a station from a remote location, or when receiving an fault message call-out, the station will
normally hang up after successfully delivering its message. A station hang-up would necessitate recalling
the station. To prevent a station hang-up, the station can be captured on the first call by striking the return
key while the message is being sent.

Following an alarm-induced shutdown on the primary station, the station will initiate a call-out and send the
fault message. The standby system will come on-line after the transfer delay expires. If an alarm occurs on
this secondary system, it will shutdown, initiate a call-out, and send the fault message. The secondary
station will restart at the end of the auto-restart delay time (read code 26) which is normally set at 20
seconds. This restart can take up to approximately 35 seconds if the station is sending a message through
the modem, with the auto-restart delay time set to 20 seconds. The station will wait until the modem hangs
up before restarting. If the secondary station is still in alarm after the restart, a shutdown will occur after
the selected startup delay time (read code 227), but no call-out will occur.
If the secondary station fails to connect with the remote point following its shutdown, the restart will cancel
the call and restart the station. If the station is still in alarm once it has been restarted, a call-out will occur
on shutdown. If a connection with the remote point still cannot be made, and the alarm is still present after
the 5-minute restart, the station will again attempt to call out upon shutdown. If a connection is still not
established, the station will attempt a call-out every ten minutes until the message is sent. Once a connection
is made and the fault message is transmitted, the station will not attempt any further calls until the station
is restarted, which initiates the sequence again.
3.5 Executive and Maintenance Fault Conditions.- Maintenance alarms will initiate a call-out after the
selected alarm delay but will not cause a station shutdown. Each of the maintenance alarms has an
adjustable limit with the exception of Primary DC Voltage whose limit is fixed at 26.0 volts. The station
parameters that will initiate maintenance alarms are:
Primary AC Voltage CRS Power Amplifier DC Current

Primary DC Voltage CLR Power Amplifier DC Current
Shelter Temperature DME Status Voltage
CRS CSB VSWR CLR CSB VSWR
CLR SBO VSWR CLR SBO VSWR
Most of the executive parameters have both, alert limits and alarm limits. The maintenance alert limits
should be programmed by the operator to be narrower than the corresponding executive alarm limits so that
an dial-out due to an alert condition occurs before an alarm condition exists. An executive alert, like an
maintenance alarm, will initiate a call-out after the selected alarm delay and will not cause a station
shutdown. An executive alarm, however, will shut the station down and then initiate the call-out. The
station parameters that have both executive alerts and alarms are:
CRS Centerline total modulation CLR Centerline total modulation

CRS Centerline DDM CLR Centerline DDM
CRS Centerline RF Level CLR Centerline RF Level
CRS Width DDM CLR Width DDM
CRS Width RF Level CLR Width RF Level
NFM/FFM RF Level NFM/FFM DDM Level
NFM/FFM total modulation

The following maintenance parameters have alarm limits only, and no alert limits. A fault condition of
either of these parameters will shut the station down, causing a transfer to the standby station.
CRS ID Modulation Depth

CLR ID Modulation Depth
3.6 System Delay Time Parameters.- The Dual Capture-Effect Localizer system has these delay time
parameters: startup delay time, alarm delay time, auto-restart delay time, alarm clear time, transfer delay
time, FFM alarm delay, bypass time limit, and RSCU lockout timeout.
The startup delay time parameter sets the length of time immediately following a power-up or restart that
an fault condition may persist while the monitor system stabilizes before the station shuts down. This delay
must be set to a value that is long enough to allow the station to stabilize and operate normally. The delay
should be set short as necessary, based on the particular system.
The alarm delay time parameter sets the length of time an alarm condition must persist once the monitor
system has stabilized and operated normally before the station reports the alert condition or shuts down. A
maximum value of 5 seconds is recommended for this parameter.
The Alarm Clear time parameter is designed to reduce the number of station call-outs to a remote modem
in response to a borderline alarm or alert condition. The station will not call-out due to a fault condition
unless the system has been operating normally for a period of time greater than the Alarm Clear Time. The
Alarm Clear Time is independent of the Alarm Delay Time; the station will always shutdown if a
maintenance alarm condition persists of longer than the programmed Alarm Delay Time. A value of 120
seconds is recommended for this parameter.
The Restart Delay time parameter sets the length of time after the secondary station shuts down due to a fault
condition before attempting a restart. A minimum value of 20 seconds is required for this parameter.
The Transfer Delay time parameter sets the length of time the standby station waits before coming on-line
after a shutdown of the main station. A minimum value of 20 seconds is required for this parameter.
The FFM Alarm Delay parameter is similar to the Alarm Delay parameter. It sets the length of time that an
alarm or alert reported by the FFM must persist before the station reports the alert or shuts down. A value
of 45 seconds is recommended for this parameter.
The Bypass Time limit parameter sets the length of time that the station will remain in Master Bypass mode.
Upon entering Master Bypass mode, the default is 15 minutes. This can be set for a period approximately
9 hours in length to allow for maintenance tasks. When Bypass mode is exited, the time limit is
automatically reset to 15 minutes. For security reasons, this Bypass Time limit should not be extended from
a remote location.
The RSCU Lockout time parameter is similar to the Bypass Time limit. It sets the length of time that the
RSCU will remain locked-out before it is automatically enabled. Upon disabling the RSCU from within
Master Bypass, the default duration is 15 minutes. This can be set for a period approximately 9 hours in

length to allow for maintenance tasks. When the RSCU is enabled once again, the time limit is
automatically reset to 15 minutes. For security reasons, this time limit should not be extended from a remote
location.
3.7 Numeric Listing of Command Codes.- Refer to table 3-2 for a list of the control code definitions. Refer
to tables 3-3 and 3-4 for a list of control codes used in the capture-effect localizer.
Table 3-2. Control Code Definitions.
Adjust Change the value of a parameter by incrementing or decrementing. The value of the
parameter is continuously displayed. ASCII character "1" (49) causes a coarse increment,
"7" (55) a fine increment, "5" (53) a coarse decrement, and "9" a fine decrement. <CTRL>-J
(ASCII 10, or line feed) terminates the adjustment.
Display Show the value of a fixed parameter.
Offset offsets are subtracted from measurements to compute value of corresponding parameter
(after measurement has been multiplied by scale factor, if appropriate). Negative offsets
should be calculated by: actual offset = 65536-desired offset.
Read Continuously show the value of a parameter which could be changing. <CTRL>-J (ASCII
10, or line feed) terminates the command.
Set Enter a new value for a parameter directly. A prompt will be issued; a decimal number,
followed by a carriage return (ASCII 13), will then be read from the terminal. If a carriage
return is entered without entering a number, the value of the parameter will remain
unchanged.
Scale factor Value of measured parameter is proportional to corresponding scale factor (default value is
2048).
Table 3-3. Control Codes Used in the Capture-Effect Localizer.
001* Modem request for status message. Displays software version, station name, primary/secon-
dary mode, system type, and status message. Intended as a response to the modem "connect"
code.
002* Clear password
007* Display alarm clear time; sec
008* Display status message; 1 or more of following:
009* Display system type; always 0 for Dual Capture-Effect Localizer
010* Read primary AC voltage
011* Read primary DC voltage
012* Read primary DC current
013* Read battery charge current
015* Read DME alarm status voltage
016* Display dial-out telephone number
017* Display station identifier message
018* Read date and time
019* Display software version

Table 3-3. Control Codes Used in the Capture-Effect Localizer (Cont).
020* Read CRS CSB forward power

021* Read CRS CSB reflected power
022* Read CRS SBO forward power
023* Read CRS SBO reflected power
024* Read CRS power amplifier current
025* Read shelter temperature
026* Display auto-restart delay time: sec
027* Display alarm delay time: sec
028* Read antenna faults
029* Display transfer delay time: sec
030* Read CRS centerline RF level from integral monitor
031* Read CRS centerline DDM from integral monitor
032* Read CRS width RF level from integral monitor
033* Read CRS width DDM from integral monitor
036* Read CRS centerline total modulation from integral monitor
037* Read CRS ident modulation depth from integral monitor
038* Read CRS CSB VSWR
039* Read CRS SBO VSWR
040* Display CRS centerline RF level alarm limit
041* Display CRS centerline DDM alarm limit
042* Display CRS width RF level alarm limit
043* Display CRS centerline total modulation upper alarm limit
044* Display CRS width DDM wide alarm limit
045* Display CRS width DDM narrow alarm limit
046* Display CRS centerline total modulation lower alarm limit
047* Display CRS centerline ident modulation depth alarm limit
048* Display CRS CSB VSWR alert limit
049* Display CRS SBO VSWR alert limit
050 Set CRS centerline RF level alarm limit
051 Set CRS centerline DDM alarm limit: unit .001 (alarm condition occurs if absolute value of
DDM exceeds limit)
052 Set CRS width RF level alarm limit
053 Set CRS centerline total modulation upper alarm limit: unit .1%
054 Set CRS width DDM wide alarm limit: unit .001 (enter positive value; alarm condition
occurs if width DDM is above the negative of this alarm limit)
055 Set CRS width DDM narrow alarm limit: unit .001 (enter positive value; alarm condition
occurs if width DDM is below the negative of this alarm limit)
056 Set CRS centerline total modulation lower alarm limit: unit .1%
057 Set CRS centerline ident modulation depth alarm limit: unit .1%
058 Set CRS CSB VSWR alert limit: unit .1
059 Set CRS SBO VSWR alert limit: unit .1
060 Set shelter temperature lower alert limit: unit .1EC
061 Set CRS power amplifier current alert limit: unit 1 mA

062 Set primary AC voltage alert limit: unit .1 V

063 Set DME alarm status voltage alert limit: unit .01 V
064 Set shelter temperature upper alert limit: unit .1EC
065* Display shelter temperature upper alert limit
066* Display DME alarm status voltage alert limit
067* Display shelter temperature lower alert limit
068* Display CRS power amplifier current alert limit
069* Display primary AC voltage alert limit
* Indicates Read or Display Function
070 Set time and date

071 Set date
072 Set time
075 Set alarm clear time: unit 1 sec
076 Set transfer delay time: unit 1 sec
077 Set bypass time limit: unit 1 sec
078 Set auto-restart delay time: unit 1 sec; maximum 119 sec
079 Set alarm delay time: unit 1 sec
080* Read CRS transmitter frequency
081* Read CRS modulation frequency
082* Read CRS keyer dot length
084 Enable phase test mode
085 Disable phase test mode
088 Initiate station shutdown
089 Initiate station transfer
091 Remote hangup: cancels level 1 password, clears monitor bypass mode
098 Clear bypass, restart
099 Enter monitor bypass mode
100 Adjust CRS CSB power output
101 Adjust CRS SBO power output
102 Adjust CLR CSB power output
103 Adjust CLR SBO power output
104 Turn CLR transmitter on (CSB and SBO)
105 Turn CLR transmitter off (CSB and SBO)
108 Turn CLR SBO RF on
109 Turn CLR SBO RF off
110 Turn CRS CSB RF on
111 Turn CRS CSB RF off
114 Turn CRS SBO RF on
115 Turn CRS SBO RF off

118 Turn transmitter on (CRS and CLR, CSB and SBO)

119 Turn transmitter off (CRS and CLR, CSB and SBO)
120 Adjust CRS modulation depth
121 Adjust CRS ident modulation depth
124 Set 90 Hz modulation only
125 Set 150 Hz modulation only
126 Turn 90/150 Hz modulation on
127 Turn 90/150 Hz modulation off
128 Set modulation normal
129 Adjust CLR modulation depth
130 Turn ident keying on
131 Turn ident keying off
132 Set continuous ident tone
135* Display CRS modulation balance
138 Adjust CRS modulation balance
140* Read all monitor readings
141* Display all readings
160 Set CRS centerline DDM offset: unit .001
161 Set CRS width DDM offset: unit .001
163 Set primary AC voltage scale factor
164 Set primary DC voltage scale factor
165 Set primary DC current scale factor
166 Set CRS power amplifier current scale factor
167 Set battery charge current offset: unit .01 A
168 Set battery charge current scale factor
169 Set CRS CSB forward power scale factor
170 Set CRS CSB reflected power offset: unit 1 mW
171 Set CRS CSB reflected power scale factor
172 Set CRS SBO forward power scale factor
173 Set CRS SBO reflected power offset: unit 1 mW
174 Set CRS SBO reflected power scale factor
175 Set CLR centerline DDM offset: unit .001
176 Set CLR width DDM offset: unit .001
177 Set CRS SBO forward power offset: unit 1 mW
178 Set shelter temperature scale factor
179 Set CRS centerline total modulation scale factor
180* Display CRS centerline DDM offset
181* Display CRS width DDM offset
183* Display primary AC voltage scale factor
184* Display primary DC voltage scale factor
185* Display primary DC current scale factor
186* Display CRS power amplifier current scale factor

187* Display battery charge current offset

188* Display battery charge current scale factor
189* Display CRS CSB forward power scale factor
190* Display CRS CSB reflected power offset
191* Display CRS CSB reflected power scale factor
192* Display CRS SBO forward power scale factor
193* Display CRS SBO reflected power offset
194* Display CRS SBO reflected power scale factor
195* Display CLR centerline DDM offset
196* Display CLR width DDM offset
197* Display CRS SBO forward power offset
198* Display shelter temperature scale factor
199* Display CRS centerline total modulation scale factor
200 Set CLR centerline RF level alarm limit
201 Set CLR centerline DDM alarm limit: unit .001
202 Set CLR centerline total modulation upper alarm limit: unit .01%
203 Set CLR centerline total modulation lower alarm limit: unit .01%
204 Set CLR width RF level alarm limit
205 Set CLR width DDM narrow alarm limit: unit .001 (enter positive value; alarm condition
occurs if width DDM is below the negative of this alarm limit)
206 Set CLR width DDM wide alarm limit: unit .001 (enter positive value; alarm condition
occurs if width DDM is above the negative of this alarm limit)
210* Display CLR centerline RF level alarm limit
211* Display CLR centerline DDM alarm limit
212* Display CLR centerline total modulation upper alarm limit
213* Display CLR centerline total modulation lower alarm limit
214* Display CLR width RF level alarm limit
215* Display CLR width DDM narrow alarm limit
216* Display CLR width DDM wide alarm limit
220* Read CLR centerline RF level from integral monitor
221* Read CLR centerline DDM from integral monitor
222* Read CLR width RF level from integral monitor
223* Read CLR width DDM from integral monitor
224* Read CLR ident modulation depth from integral monitor
227* Display startup alarm delay time
240* Display CLR CSB forward power scale factor
241* Display CLR CSB reflected power scale factor
242* Display CLR CSB reflected power offset
243* Display CRS CSB forward power offset
244* Display CLR SBO reflected power scale factor

245* Display CLR SBO reflected power offset

247* Display CLR centerline ident modulation depth alarm limit
248* Display CLR CSB VSWR alert limit
249* Display CLR SBO VSWR alert limit
250 Set CLR CSB forward power scale factor
251 Set CLR CSB reflected power scale factor
252 Set CLR CSB reflected power offset: unit 1 mW
253 Set CRS CSB forward power offset: unit 1 mW
254 Set CLR SBO reflected power scale factor
255 Set CLR SBO reflected power offset: unit 1 mW
257 Set CLR centerline ident modulation depth alarm limit
258 Set CLR CSB VSWR alert limit: unit .1
259 Set CLR SBO VSWR alert limit: unit .1
260* Read CLR CSB forward power
261* Read CLR CSB reflected power
262* Read CLR CSB VSWR
263* Read CLR SBO forward power
264* Read CLR SBO reflected power
267* Display CLR modulation balance
270* Read NFM/FFM RF level
271* Read NFM/FFM DDM
279 Set startup alarm delay time: unit 1 sec
280 Set NFM/FFM RF level alarm limit
281 Set NFM/FFM DDM alarm limit: unit .001
282 Set NFM/FFM DDM offset: unit .001
284 Set FFM alarm delay: unit 1 sec
285 Set NFM/FFM mode:
0 inactive
1 NFM active
2 FFM maintenance
3 FFM executive
290* Display NFM/FFM RF level alarm limit
291* Display NFM/FFM DDM alarm limit
292* Display NFM/FFM DDM offset
294* Display FFM alarm delay
295* Display NFM/FFM mode
338 Switch CRS CSB to antenna (turns CRS CSB off first)
339 Switch CRS CSB to dummy load (turns CRS CSB off first)
381* Display CRS ident modulation scale factor
382* Display CRS ident modulation offset
391 Set CRS ident modulation scale factor
392 Set CRS ident modulation offset

438 Switch CRS SBO to antenna (turns CRS SBO off first)
439 Switch CRS SBO to dummy load (turns CRS SBO off first)
503* Display CRS centerline total modulation upper alert limit
504* Display CRS centerline total modulation lower alert limit
513 Set CRS centerline total modulation upper alert limit: unit .1%
514 Set CRS centerline total modulation lower alert limit: unit .1%
518 Turn CRS transmitter on (CSB and SBO)
519 Turn CRS transmitter off (CSB and SBO)
523* Display CRS centerline DDM alert limit
533 Set CRS centerline DDM alert limit: unit .001
544* Display CRS centerline RF level alert limit
554 Set CRS centerline RF level alert limit
563* Display CRS width DDM narrow alert limit
564* Display CRS width DDM wide alert limit
573 Set CRS width DDM narrow alert limit: unit .001
574 Set CRS width DDM wide alert limit: unit .001
584* Display CRS width RF level alert limit
594 Set CRS width RF level alert limit
602* Display CLR CSB forward power offset
612 Set CLR CSB forward power offset: unit 1 mW
617 Adjust CLR modulation balance
618 Turn CLR CSB RF on
619 Turn CLR CSB RF off
627* Read CLR transmitter frequency: resolution 1 kHz; ±1 kHz
638 Switch CLR CSB to antenna (turns CLR CSB off first)
639 Switch CLR CSB to dummy load (turns CLR CSB off first)
647* Read CLR modulation frequency
681* Display CLR ident modulation scale factor
682* Display CLR ident modulation offset
690 Adjust CLR ident modulation depth
691 Set CLR ident modulation scale factor
692 Set CLR ident modulation offset
701* Display CLR SBO forward power scale factor
702* Display CLR SBO forward power offset
711 Set CLR SBO forward power scale factor
712 Set CLR SBO forward power offset: unit 1 mW
738 Switch CLR SBO to antenna (turns CLR SBO off first)
739 Switch CLR SBO to dummy load (turns CLR SBO off first)
740* Read CLR SBO VSWR
760* Read CLR power amplifier current
761* Display CLR power amplifier current scale factor

763* Display CLR power amplifier current alert limit

771 Set CLR power amplifier current scale factor
773 Set CLR power amplifier current alert limit: unit 1 mA
800* Read CLR centerline total modulation from integral monitor: unit .1%
801* Display CLR centerline total modulation scale factor
803* Display CLR centerline total modulation upper alert limit
804* Display CLR centerline total modulation lower alert limit
811 Set CLR centerline total modulation scale factor
813 Set CLR centerline total modulation upper alert limit: unit .1%
814 Set CLR centerline total modulation lower alert limit: unit .1%
823* Display CLR centerline DDM alert limit
833 Set CLR centerline DDM alert limit: unit .001
844* Display CLR centerline RF level alert limit: resolution .001
854 Set CLR centerline RF level alert limit
863* Display CLR width DDM narrow alert limit
864* Display CLR width DDM wide alert limit
873 Set CLR width DDM narrow alert limit: unit .001
874 Set CLR width DDM wide alert limit: unit .001
884* Display CLR width RF level alert limit
894 Set CLR width RF level alert limit
897 Set RSCU lockout timeout: unit 1 sec
898 Enable RSCU
899 Disable RSCU
900* Read NFM/FFM total modulation
903* Display NFM/FFM total modulation upper alert limit
904* Display NFM/FFM total modulation lower alert limit
905* Display NFM/FFM total modulation upper alarm limit
906* Display NFM/FFM total modulation lower alarm limit
907* Display antenna fault mask
913 Set NFM/FFM total modulation upper alert limit: unit .1%
914 Set NFM/FFM total modulation lower alert limit: unit .1%
915 Set NFM/FFM total modulation upper alarm limit: unit .1%
916 Set NFM/FFM total modulation lower alarm limit: unit .1%
917 Set antenna fault mask: binary
923* Display NFM/FFM DDM alert limit
933 Set NFM/FFM DDM alert limit: unit .001
944* Display NFM/FFM RF level alert limit
954 Set NFM/FFM RF level alert limit
957 Set dial-out telephone number
977 Set station identifier message

NOTE: Shaded codes are only accessible while in master bypass.
Table 3-4. Control Codes Used In The Capture-Effect Localizer (By Function).
alert limits alarm limits
parameter scale factor offset high low high low
group parameter READ SET READ SET READ SET READ SET READ SET READ SET READ SET
course CSB forward power 020 100 189 169 243 253
signal CSB reflected power 021 191 171 190 170
CSB VSWR 038 048 058
SBO forward power 022 101 192 172 197 177
SBO reflected power 023 194 174 193 173
SBO VSWR 039 049 059
modulation balance 135 138
Total modulation % 036 120 199 179 503 513 504 514 043 053 046 056
centerline DDM 031 180 160 523 533 041 051
centerline RF level 030 544 554 040 050
width DDM 033 181 161 563 573 564 574 045 055 044 054
width RF level 032 584 594 042 052
ident modulation depth 037 121 381 391 382 392 047 057
transmitter frequency 080
modulation frequency 081
keyer dot length 082
power amplifier current 024 186 166 068 061
CSB RF on 110
CSB RF off 111
CSB RF to antenna 338
CSB RF to dummy load 339
SBO RF on 114
SBO RF off 115
SBO RF to antenna 438
SBO RF to dummy load 439
transmitter on 518
transmitter off 519
clearance CSB forward power 260 102 240 250 602 612
signal CSB reflected power 261 241 251 242 252
CSB VSWR 262 248 258
SBO forward power 263 103 701 711 702 712
SBO reflected power 264 244 254 245 255

clearance
signal SBO VSWR 740 249 259
modulation balance 267 617
Total modulation % 800 129 801 811 803 813 804 814 212 202 213 203
centerline DDM (CH 3) 221 195 175 823 833 211 201
centerline RF level (CH 220 844 854 210 200
3)
width DDM (CH 4) 223 196 176 863 873 864 874 215 205 216 206
width RF level (CH 4) 222 884 894 214 204
ident modulation depth 224 690 681 691 682 692 247 257
transmitter frequency 627
modulation frequency 647
power amplifier current 760 761 771 763 773
CSB RF on 618
CSB RF off 619
CSB RF to antenna 638
CSB RF to dummy load 639
SBO RF on 108
SBO RF off 109
SBO RF to antenna 738
SBO RF to dummy load 739
transmitter on 104
transmitter off 105
modulation 90 Hz only 124
150 Hz only 125
modulation normal 128
90/150 Hz on 126
90/150 Hz off 127
ident keying on 130
ident keying off 131
continuous ident tone 132
monitor antenna fault word 028
antenna fault mask 907 917
NFM/FFM mode 295 285
NFM/FFM RF level 270 944 954 290 280
NFM/FFM DDM 271 292 282 923 933 291 281

monitor NFM/FFM Total 900 903 913 904 914 905 915 906 916
Modulation
monitor bypass mode 099

phase test mode on 084
phase test mode off 085
status message 008
all monitor readings 140
system transmitter on 118
control transmitter off 119
all readings 141
clear bypass, restart 098
remote hangup 091
modem request for status 1
clear password 2
initiate station shutdown 088
initiate station transfer 089
dial-out telephone num- 016 957
ber
station name 017 977
system type 009
disable RSCU 899
enable RSCU 898
software version 019
delay times alarm delay time 027 079
startup alarm delay time 227 279
auto-restart delay time 026 078
alarm clear time 007 075
transfer delay time 029 076
FFM alarm delay 294 284
bypass time limit 077
RSCU lockout timeout 897

voltage, primary AC voltage 010 183 163 069 062

current, primary DC voltage 011 184 164
temperature
primary DC current 012 185 165
battery charge current 013 188 168 187 167
DME alarm status voltage 015 066 063
shelter temperature 025 198 178 065 064 067 060
time and time and date 018 070
date date only 071
time only 072

3.8 CONTROL CODE FUNCTIONS.-
3.8.1 Course CSB Power Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are
used to operate the Course CSB power functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
display functions may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
100 SET CSB/SBO POWER OUTPUT: Allows user to adjust the CSB power level while the SBO power
is automatically adjusted in order to maintain the current ratio between the CSB and SBO, keeping
the Width DDM Constant.
020 READ CSB FORWARD POWER: Display function. Displays CBS forward power as calculated
by built-in test equipment.
189 DISPLAY CSB FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current
CSB forward power scaling factor.
169 SET CSB FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the CSB forward power.
243 DISPLAY CSB FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays CSB forward power
offset.
253 SET CSB FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track CSB forward power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
with control code 169 to help calibrate the built-in test equipment.
021 READ CSB REFLECTED POWER: Display function. Displays CSB reflected power as calculated
191 DISPLAY CSB REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current
CSB reflected power scaling factor.
171 SET CSB REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the CSB reflected power.
190 DISPLAY CSB REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the CSB reflected
power offset.
170 SET CSB REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track CSB reflected power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
with control code 171 to calibrate the built-in test equipment.
038 READ CSB VSWR: Display function. Display the current VSWR as calculated by the built-in test
equipment.
048 DISPLAY CSB VSWR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the VSWR setting at which an
alert will occur.
058 SET CSB VSWR ALERT POINT: Sets the point a which the CSB VSWR will alert at. Decimal
entries are interpreted as ratios (121 = 1.2:1).

3.8.2 Clearance CSB Power Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that
are used to operate the Clearance CSB power functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that
indicate display functions may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
102 SET CSB/SBO POWER OUTPUT: Allows user to adjust the CSB power level while the SBO power
is automatically adjusted in order to maintain the current ratio between the CSB and SBO, keeping
the Width DDM Constant.
260 READ CSB FORWARD POWER: Display function. Displays CBS forward power as calculated
240 DISPLAY CSB FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current
CSB forward power scaling factor.
250 SET CSB FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the CSB forward power.
602 DISPLAY CSB FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays CSB forward power
offset.
612 SET CSB FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track CSB forward power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
with control code 250 to help calibrate the built-in test equipment.
261 READ CSB REFLECTED POWER: Display function. Displays CSB reflected power as calculated
241 DISPLAY CSB REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current
CSB reflected power scaling factor.
251 SET CSB REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the CSB reflected power.
242 DISPLAY CSB REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the CSB reflected
power offset.
252 SET CSB REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track CSB reflected power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
262 READ CSB VSWR: Display function. Display the current VSWR as calculated by the built-in test
equipment.
248 DISPLAY CSB VSWR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the VSWR setting at which an
alert will occur.
258 SET CSB VSWR ALERT POINT: Sets the point a which the CSB VSWR will alert at. Decimal
entries are interpreted as ratios (121 = 1.2:1).
3.8.3 Course CSB - Modulation.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used
to operate the Course CSB modulation functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
124 SET 90 Hz ONLY MODULATION: Turns off the 150 Hz modulation, leaving only the 90 Hz
modulation.
modulation.
126 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION ON: Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation on.

127 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION OFF: Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation off.
128 SET MODULATION NORMAL: Returns the 90/150 Hz and Ident modulation to normal.
120 SET CSB % MODULATION: Allows for adjustment of the CSB % modulation.
036 READ CSB % MODULATION: Display function. Displays the CSB % modulation as measured
by the Field Monitor.
199 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current total
modulation scaling factor. Used to calibrate the Field Monitor's total modulation measurement.
179 SET TOTAL MODULATION SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scale factor used to calibrate the Field
Monitor's total modulation measurement.
046 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - LOWER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation lower alarm point.
056 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - LOWER: Sets the total modulation lower alarm
point. Entries are interpreted as having decimal points (350 = 35.0%).
043 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - UPPER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation upper alarm point.
053 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - UPPER: Sets the total modulation upper alarm
504 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - LOWER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation lower alert point.
514 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - LOWER: Sets the total modulation lower alert
503 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - UPPER: Display function. Displays the Field
Monitor's total modulation upper alert point.
513 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - UPPER: Sets the total modulation upper alert point.
Entries are interpreted as having decimal points (450 = 45.0%).
3.8.4 Clearance CSB - Modulation.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are
used to operate the Clearance CSB modulation functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that
modulation.
modulation.
126 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION ON: Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation on.
127 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION OFF: Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation off.
128 SET MODULATION NORMAL: Returns the 90/150 Hz and Ident modulation to normal.
129 SET CSB % MODULATION: Allows for adjustment of the CSB % modulation.
800 READ CSB % MODULATION: Display function. Displays the CSB % modulation as measured
by the Field Monitor.
801 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the current total
modulation scaling factor. Used to calibrate the Field Monitor's total modulation measurement.
811 SET TOTAL MODULATION SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scale factor used to calibrate the Field
Monitor's total modulation measurement.

213 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - LOWER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation lower alarm point.
203 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - LOWER: Sets the total modulation lower alarm
212 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - UPPER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation upper alarm point.
202 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALARM POINT - UPPER: Sets the total modulation upper alarm
804 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - LOWER: Display function. Displays the
Field Monitor's total modulation lower alert point.
814 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - LOWER: Sets the total modulation lower alert
803 DISPLAY TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - UPPER: Display function. Displays the Field
Monitor's total modulation upper alert point.
813 SET TOTAL MODULATION ALERT POINT - UPPER: Sets the total modulation upper alert point.
Entries are interpreted as having decimal points (450 = 45.0%).
3.8.5 Course SBO Power Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are
used to operate the Course SBO power functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
101 SET SBO ONLY POWER OUTPUT: This control code allows the user to adjust the SBO output
power while leaving the CSB power level unchanged.
022 READ SBO FORWARD POWER: Display function. Allows user to read the SBO forward power
as calculated by the built-in test equipment.
192 DISPLAY SBO FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function.
172 SET SBO FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculated the SBO forward power.
197 DISPLAY SBO FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the current SBO
forward power offset factor.
177 SET SBO FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track SBO forward power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
023 READ SBO REFLECTED POWER: Display function. Allows user to read the SBO reflected power
194 DISPLAY SBO REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the scaling
factor the built-in test equipment uses to calculate the SBO reflected power.
174 SET SBO REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used by the built-in test
equipment to calculate the SBO reflected power.
193 DISPLAY SBO REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the current SBO
reflected power offset factor.
173 SET SBO REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track SBO reflected power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction

039 READ SBO VSWR: Display function. Displays the SBO VSWR as calculated by the built-in test
equipment.
049 DISPLAY SBO VSWR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the point at which the SBO
VSWR will initiate a system alert.
059 SET SBO VSWR ALERT POINT: Sets the SBO VSWR alert point. Decimal entries will be
interpreted as a ratio (121=1.2:1).
3.8.6 Clearance SBO Power Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that
are used to operate the clearance SBO power functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that
103 SET SBO ONLY POWER OUTPUT: This control code allows the user to adjust the SBO output
power while leaving the CSB power level unchanged.
263 READ SBO FORWARD POWER: Display function. Allows user to read the SBO forward power
701 DISPLAY SBO FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function.
711 SET SBO FORWARD POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculated the SBO forward power.
702 DISPLAY SBO FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the current SBO
forward power offset factor.
712 SET SBO FORWARD POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track SBO forward power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
264 READ SBO REFLECTED POWER: Display function. Allows user to read the SBO reflected power
244 DISPLAY SBO REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the scaling
factor the built-in test equipment uses to calculate the SBO reflected power.
254 SET SBO REFLECTED POWER SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used by the built-in test
equipment to calculate the SBO reflected power.
245 DISPLAY SBO REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Display function. Displays the current SBO
reflected power offset factor.
255 SET SBO REFLECTED POWER OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will properly
track SBO reflected power over the localizer's power range. This control code is used in conjunction
740 READ SBO VSWR: Display function. Displays the SBO VSWR as calculated by the built-in test
equipment.
249 DISPLAY SBO VSWR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the point at which the SBO
VSWR will initiate a system alert.
259 SET SBO VSWR ALERT POINT: Sets the SBO VSWR alert point. Decimal entries will be
interpreted as a ratio (121=1.2:1).

3.8.7 Phasing.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to operate the
Phasing functions within the localizer transmitter.
084 ENTER PHASE TEST MODE: Enables maintenance personnel to determine the phasing of a facility
by changing the source of the audio signal to the Field Monitor/Control Unit from the course width
integral detector to an in-line phasing detector, connected in-line with one of the antenna feedlines.
The in-line phasing detector provides a signal with the course SBO portion entirely canceled out if
the course CSB and course SBO RF signals are in phase.
085 EXIT PHASE TEST MODE: Exits the phase test mode of operation.
3.8.8 Antenna Fault .-
907 READ ANTENNA FAULT MASK: Display function. Displays the antenna fault mask set with
code 917.
917 SET ANTENNA FAULT MASK: For systems which use less than 14 antenna elements, the bits
corresponding to the unused elements should be set in the antenna fault mask to prevent alarming
on errors for these elements.
028 READ ANTENNA FAULT WORD: Display function. Allows maintenance personnel to read the
antenna fault word. Each bit will be 1 for normal operation, 0 to indicate an open circuit (fault
condition). An example of an antenna fault word shown in figure 3-2. Bit 14 is used for the antenna
alignment. Bit 15 is unused and set to 1.
Misalignment Antenna
Detector 7L 6L 5L 4L 3L 2L 1L 1R 2R 3R 4R 5R 6R 7R
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
As observed on Terminal
0 = Antenna Fault
Figure 3-2. Antenna Fault Data Word for Capture-Effect Localizer Antenna Array.
3.8.9 System Control Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used
to operate various system control functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate display
functions may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
118 TRANSMITTER ON: Turns both Course and Clearance, CSB and SBO signals on.
119 TRANSMITTER OFF: Turns both Course and Clearance, CSB and SBO signals off.
099 ENTER MASTER BYPASS: Use of this control code places the system in the Bypass mode of
operation. This allows maintenance personnel to accomplish maintenance or troubleshooting
procedures without system shutdown. System will remain in the Bypass mode of operation for 15
minutes unless this time limit is extended using control code 077.

098 CLEAR MASTER BYPASS SYSTEM RESTART/RESET: Exits the Bypass mode of operation.
Restarts systems after a system shutdown.
091 HANG UP FROM REMOTE LOCATION: Used to log-off of the system from the RMM. This
command is similar to "098", with the additional features exiting all levels of security and forcing
the local modem to hang up.
002 CLEAR PASSWORD (FOR USE WITH CCU): This control code inhibits station communication
following a telephone line disruption. It is used internally by a modem or the Communications
Control Unit (CCU). If this code is entered accidently, it will be necessary to reenter the station
password in order to communicate with the system.
088 INITIATE STATION SHUTDOWN: Shuts down the station. If this command is issued to
transmitter A, it will shutdown and system control will be transferred to transmitter B, which will
come on-line. It is not applicable to transmitter B.
089 INITIATE STATION TRANSFER: This control code transfers transmitters.
008 FAULT MESSAGE: Display function. Displays system status or fault message, if system is in alarm
or has shutdown.
001 MODEM REQUEST FOR FAULT MESSAGE: Display function. Used by the local modem, when
valid connection to the RMM is established, to initiate the display of the pending fault message.
077 SET BYPASS TIME LIMIT: Sets the time limit, in seconds, that the system will remain in the
Bypass mode of operation after control code 099 has been entered. The Bypass time limit can be set
up for an approximately 9 hour period to allow for maintenance tasks. When BYPASS is exited, the
time limit is automatically reset to 15 minutes. If a time limit exceeds the system parameters, the
system will respond with a "TIME TOO LONG" message. For security reasons, do not extend
Bypass time from a remote location.
140 DISPLAY MONITOR READINGS: Display function. This control code displays all monitor
readings. Refer to figure 3-3 for an example of the video terminal display when control code 140
is entered:
140
CRS WID CRS CRS CLR WID CLR CLR NFM/FFM NFM/FFM NFM/FFM
DDM DDM RF SDM DDM DDM RF SDM DDM RF SDM
0.000 0.156 216 0.400 0.000 0.155 207 0.401 0.001 221 0.400
Figure 3-3. Example of Display Monitor Readings (140).
141 DISPLAY ALL READINGS: Display function. This control code displays all system readings.
Refer to figure 3-4 for an example of the video terminal display when control code 141 is entered:
141
Example - EQUIPMENT #1
STATION ON-LINE (IN MASTER BYPASS)

DATE: 1/1/94 TIME: 8:38:04

PRI. AC V : 120.4 PRI. DC V : 28.28
PRI. DC I : 5.99 BAT. DC I : 0.16
CRS PA DC I : 2.99 CLR PA DC I : 2.99
SHELTER T : 23.1
CRS CSB F PWR : 15.3 CRS CSB R PWR : .009
CRS SBO F PWR : .300 CRS SBO R PWR : .000
CLR CSB F PWR : 15.1 CLR CSB R PWR : .001
CLR SBO F PWR : .300 CLR SBO R PWR : .000
CRS CSB VSWR : 1.0 CRS SBO VSWR : 1.0
CLR CSB VSWR : 1.0 CLR SBO VSWR : 1.0
CRS CTR DDM : 0.000 CRS WID DDM : 0.155
CRS C RF LVL : 206 CRS W RF LVL : 212
CRS SDM : 40.0 CLR SDM : 40.0
CRS IDENT LVL : 8.0 CLR IDENT LVL : 8.0
CH3 DDM : 0.000 CH3 LVL : 221
CH4 DDM : 0.155 CH4 LVL : 217
NFM/FFM DDM : 0.000 NFM/FFM SDM : 0.399
NFM/FFM LVL : 200
Figure 3-4. Example of Display All Readings (141).
3.8.10 System Administrative.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used
to operate various system administrative functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
009 DISPLAY STATION TYPE: Display function. There are five system types that use the same basic
software. The system type is identified in the SYSTEM TYPE message when command code 009
is executed. The system type is identified by numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. The following explains the
numbering scheme:
Type 0 = All localizer stations.

Type 1 = A glideslope station with one path monitor and one width monitor.
Type 2 = A glideslope station with one path monitor, one width monitor, and one near field
path monitor.
Type 3 = A glideslope station with one path monitor, one width monitor, one near field path
monitor, and one additional width monitor.
Type 4 = A glideslope station with one path monitor and two additional width monitors.
NOTE
All localizer systems, single or dual, with or without near field or far field monitors, Capture effect
or single frequency, should be set to system type 0. Any other value could cause improper operation.

016 DISPLAY CALL-OUT PHONE NUMBER: Display function. Displays the telephone number that
system will call in the event of a fault condition.
957 SET CALL-OUT PHONE NUMBER: Set function. Sets the telephone number that system will call
in the event of a fault condition.
017 DISPLAY STATION NAME: Display function. Displays the station identifier message as seen on
the video terminal. This is not to be confused with the radiated station identifier.
977 SET STATION NAME: Set function. Sets the station identifier message as seen on the video
terminal. This is not to be confused with the radiated station identifier.
019 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION: Display function. Displays the version of software installed
in the system.
987 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER: Display function. Displays the station number.
Valid station numbers are:
1=Primary station
2=Secondary station
3=Single equipment
899 DISABLE RSCU: Disables all system control initiated by the RSCU.
898 ENABLE RSCU: Enables system control initiated by the RSCU.
3.8.11 System Delay Times.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to
operate the system delay time functions of the transmitter. All codes that indicate display functions may be
accessed without inputting the station's security code.
026 DISPLAY AUTO-RESTART DELAY TIME: Display function. Displays the number of seconds
that the localizer will delay after a transmitter B system shutdown has occurred before attempting
a restart.
078 SET AUTO-RESTART DELAY TIME: Sets the time, in seconds, the standby system waits
following an alarm shutdown before the first automatic restart attempt. A minimum value of 20
seconds is required.
027 DISPLAY ALARM DELAY TIME: Display function. Display the amount of time, in seconds, the
system must be in alarm before the system shuts down.
079 SET ALARM DELAY TIME: Sets the time, in seconds, that an alarm condition must persist before
a station shutdown and/or dial-out occurs. A maximum value of 1 second is recommended for a
Category II system. A maximum value of 5 seconds is recommended for a Category I system.
007 DISPLAY ALARM CLEAR TIME: Display function. Displays the alarm clear time in seconds.
075 SET ALARM CLEAR TIME: Sets the time, in seconds, the system dial-out feature waits after an
alarm has cleared before a dial-out in response to a new alarm condition will be initiated. This
feature prevents continuous dial-outs in response to a condition where the system drifts in and out
of alarm. A value of 120 seconds is recommended.
029 DISPLAY TRANSFER DELAY TIME: Display function. Displays the transfer delay time in
seconds.
076 SET TRANSFER DELAY TIME: Sets the time, in seconds, the standby system waits before starting
following shutdown of the main system. A minimum value of 20 seconds is required.
227 DISPLAY STARTUP DELAY TIME: Display function. Displays the value set with code (279).

279 SET STARTUP DELAY TIME: Sets the time, in seconds, monitor action is inhibited on system cold
startup to allow the monitor system to stabilize. This delay must be set to a value that is long enough
to allow the station to stabilize and operate normally.
897 SET RSCU LOCKOUT TIMEOUT: Sets the time limit, in seconds, that the RSCU will be disabled
after control code 899 has been entered. The RSCU time limit can be set up for approximately 9
hour period to allow for maintenance tasks. When the RSCU is enabled, the time limit is
automatically reset to 15 minutes. If a time limit exceeds the system parameters, the system will
respond with a "TIME TOO LONG" message.
3.8.12 RF Control Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to
operate the RF control functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate display function
may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
3.8.12.1 Course Signal RF Control Functions.-
110 SET CSB RF ON: Enables the CSB portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly and allows CSB to
radiate to the antenna.
111 SET CSB RF OFF: Disables the Power Amplifier Assembly and turns off the CSB RF.
338 SET CSB OUTPUT TO ANTENNA: This control code directs the CSB output to the antenna array.
339 SET CSB OUTPUT TO DUMMY LOAD: This control code sets the CSB output to internal dummy
loads on the Power Amplifier Assembly.
114 SET SBO RF ON: Enables the SBO portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly and allows SBO to
115 SET SBO RF OFF: Disables the SBO portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly.
438 SET SBO OUTPUT TO ANTENNA: Sets the SBO output to the antenna instead of internal dummy
loads.
439 SET SBO OUTPUT TO DUMMY LOAD: Sets the SBO output to internal dummy loads on the
Power Amplifier Assembly.
518 TURN TRANSMITTER ON: This control code issues a command to the Audio Generator Assembly
which, in turn, enables the Power Amplifier Assembly.
519 TURN TRANSMITTER OFF: This control code issues a command to the Audio Generator
Assembly which, in turn, disables the Power Amplifier Assembly. In dual systems only the Power
Amplifier that is currently on-line is effected.
3.8.12.2 Clearance Signal RF Control Functions.-
618 SET CSB RF ON: Enables the CSB portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly and allows CSB to
619 SET CSB RF OFF: Disables the Power Amplifier Assembly and turns off the CSB RF.
638 SET CSB OUTPUT TO ANTENNA: This control code directs the CSB output to the antenna array.
639 SET CSB OUTPUT TO DUMMY LOAD: This control code sets the CSB output to internal dummy
loads on the Power Amplifier Assembly.

108 SET SBO RF ON: Enables the SBO portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly and allows SBO to
109 SET SBO RF OFF: Disables the SBO portion of the Power Amplifier Assembly.
738 SET SBO OUTPUT TO ANTENNA: Sets the SBO output to the antenna instead of internal dummy
loads.
739 SET SBO OUTPUT TO DUMMY LOAD: Sets the SBO output to internal dummy loads on the
Power Amplifier Assembly.
104 TURN TRANSMITTER ON: This control code issues a command to the Audio Generator Assembly
which, in turn, enables the Power Amplifier Assembly.
105 TURN TRANSMITTER OFF: This control code issues a command to the Audio Generator
Assembly which, in turn, disables the Power Amplifier Assembly. In dual systems only the Power
Amplifier that is currently on-line is affected.
3.8.13 Centerline Monitor.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to in
conjunction with the centerline monitoring functions in the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
display function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
3.8.13.1 Course Signal Centerline Monitor.-
031 READ CENTERLINE DDM: Display function. Continually refreshing display of the DDM
developed by the integral centerline monitor including any offset value. The display is stopped by
entering "CTRL J".
523 DISPLAY CENTERLINE MONITOR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
monitor alert point as entered using control code 533.
533 SET CENTERLINE MONITOR ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the centerline
position monitor alerts for both clockwise (150 Hz predominant) and counterclockwise (90 Hz
predominant) centerline shifts.
041 DISPLAY CENTERLINE MONITOR ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
monitor alarm point as entered using control code 051.
051 SET CENTERLINE MONITOR ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the centerline
position monitor alarms for both clockwise (150 Hz predominant) and counterclockwise (90 Hz
030 READ CENTERLINE RF LEVEL: Display function. Displays the Centerline RF Level relative
value which is a measure of the transmitter output power. The value is developed by the Centerline
detector in the antenna distribution unit. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
544 DISPLAY CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
RF level alert point as set using control code 554.
554 SET CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Centerline
monitor alerts when the transmitter power is reduced to the low power alert limit, normally 3 dB.
040 DISPLAY CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
RF level alarm point as set using control code 050.
050 SET CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Centerline
monitor alarms when the transmitter power is reduced to the low power alarm limit, normally 3 dB.

135 READ MODULATION BALANCE SETTING: Display function. Displays the modulation balance
setting.
138 SET MODULATION BALANCE: Interactive code for setting the modulation balance. The
modulation balance is changed in steps of 5 or 1 (0.005 DDM or 0.001 DDM) by momentarily
depressing the digits 1 (decrease) and 5 (increase) or 7 (decrease) and 9 (increase) on the terminal
keyboard. The display is continuously refreshing and simultaneously displays ALARMS (Centerline
(C) or Width (W)) as they occur, CRS DDM value, WID DDM value and MOD BAL setting. Range
of the MOD BAL setting is from -30 to +30 (-0.030 DDM to +0.030 DDM).
180 DISPLAY CENTERLINE DDM OFFSET: Display function. Displays the offset value that is set
using control code 160.
160 SET CENTERLINE OFFSET: Sets an offset value into the centerline monitor to make the Centerline
DDM (Read Centerline DDM 031) reading agree with the DDM reading obtained on the runway
centerline in the far field.
NOTE
The normal setting for this parameter is "0". The monitor indication should agree with the
value as measured on the runway centerline in the far field. If the far field and monitor
values do not agree, an offset value is entered to bring the monitor into agreement with the
far field value. THIS STEP IS REQUIRED FOR THE MONITOR TO TRACK
ACCURATELY WHEN THE CENTERLINE IS SHIFTED TO THE ALARM
LIMITS. The need for an Offset value greater than approximately 10 (0.010 DDM) is
indicative of an improperly adjusted monitoring system and requires investigation of the
cause.
3.8.13.2 Clearance Signal Centerline Monitor.-
221 READ CENTERLINE DDM: Display function. Continually refreshing display of the DDM
developed by the integral centerline monitor including any offset value. The display is stopped by
entering "CTRL J".
823 DISPLAY CENTERLINE MONITOR ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
monitor alert point as entered using control code 833.
833 SET CENTERLINE MONITOR ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the centerline
position monitor alerts for both clockwise (150 Hz predominant) and counterclockwise (90 Hz
211 DISPLAY CENTERLINE MONITOR ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
monitor alarm point as entered using control code 201.
201 SET CENTERLINE MONITOR ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the centerline
position monitor alarms for both clockwise (150 Hz predominant) and counterclockwise (90 Hz
220 READ CENTERLINE RF LEVEL: Display function. Displays the Centerline RF Level relative
value which is a measure of the transmitter output power. The value is developed by the Centerline
detector in the antenna distribution unit. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
844 DISPLAY CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
RF level alert point as set using control code 854.

854 SET CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Centerline
monitor alerts when the transmitter power is reduced to the low power alert limit, normally 3 dB.
210 DISPLAY CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the centerline
RF level alarm point as set using control code 200.
200 SET CENTERLINE RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Centerline
monitor alarms when the transmitter power is reduced to the low power alarm limit, normally 3 dB.
267 READ MODULATION BALANCE SETTING: Display function. Displays the modulation balance
setting.
617 SET MODULATION BALANCE: Interactive code for setting the modulation balance. The
modulation balance is changed in steps of 5 or 1 (0.005 DDM or 0.001 DDM) by momentarily
depressing the digits 1 (decrease) and 5 (increase) or 7 (decrease) and 9 (increase) on the terminal
keyboard. The display is continuously refreshing and simultaneously displays ALARMS (Centerline
(C) or Width (W)) as they occur, CRS DDM value, WID DDM value and MOD BAL setting. Range
of the MOD BAL setting is from -30 to +30 (-0.030 DDM to +0.030 DDM).
195 DISPLAY CENTERLINE DDM OFFSET: Display function. Displays the offset value that is set
175 SET CENTERLINE OFFSET: Sets an offset value into the centerline monitor to make the Centerline
DDM (Read Centerline DDM 221) reading agree with the DDM reading obtained on the runway
centerline in the far field.
NOTE
The normal setting for this parameter is "0". The monitor indication should agree with the
value as measured on the runway centerline in the far field. If the far field and monitor
values do not agree, an offset value is entered to bring the monitor into agreement with the
far field value. THIS STEP IS REQUIRED FOR THE MONITOR TO TRACK
ACCURATELY WHEN THE CENTERLINE IS SHIFTED TO THE ALARM
LIMITS. The need for an Offset value greater than approximately 10 (0.010 DDM) is
indicative of an improperly adjusted monitoring system and requires investigation of the
cause.
3.8.14 Width Monitor.- This paragraph lists a brief description, numerically listed, of the control codes that
are used in conjunction with the width monitoring functions in the Localizer transmitter. All codes that
indicate display function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
3.8.14.1 Course Signal Width Monitor.-
033 READ WIDTH DDM: Display function. Displays the DDM developed by the integral width
monitor including any offset value. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
564 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value set
574 SET WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width monitor
alerts when the Localizer is adjusted to its wide alert limit.

563 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value
set using control code 573.
573 SET WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width
monitor alerts when the Localizer is adjusted to its narrow alert limit.
044 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value set
054 SET WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width monitor
alarms when the Localizer is adjusted to its wide alarm limit.
045 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value
055 SET WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width
monitor alarms when the Localizer is adjusted to its narrow alarm limit.
022 READ SBO POWER LEVEL: Displays the SBO output power level as measured within the
transmitter. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
101 SET SBO POWER LEVEL: Sets the transmitter SBO output power level. The Sideband-Only
output power level is changed in coarse or fine steps by momentarily depressing the digits 1
(decrease) and 5 (increase) or 7 (decrease) and 9 (increase) on the video terminal keyboard. The
display is continually refreshing and displays the Sideband-Only power level along with the
corresponding Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) count. This control is used to adjust the
Localizer Course Width to the correct value.
032 READ WIDTH RF LEVEL: Display function. Displays the Width RF Level relative value which
is a measure of the RF power level as seen by the Width detector in the antenna distribution unit.
The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
584 DISPLAY WIDTH RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 594.
594 SET WIDTH RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Sets the relative value at which the width monitor alerts
when the RF power level, seen by the Width Detector, is reduced. The value is determined by
reducing the transmitter CSB output to its low-power alert limit and reading the corresponding width
RF level, control code 032. The Width RF Level Alarm Point is then set at a value well below the
value read to insure that the Course monitor alerts well before the Width monitor when the
transmitter power is reduced.
042 DISPLAY WIDTH RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 052.
052 SET WIDTH RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the width monitor alarms
reducing the transmitter CSB output to its low-power alarm limit and reading the corresponding
width RF level, control code 032. The Width RF Level Alarm Point is then set at a value well below
the value read to insure that the Course monitor alarms well before the Width monitor when the
181 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR DDM OFFSET: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 161.
161 SET WIDTH MONITOR DDM OFFSET: Sets an offset value into the width monitor to make the
Width DDM (Read Width DDM 033) reading indicate the desired value.

NOTE
Width DDM offset is used to compensate for the difference, if any, between the width DDM
value obtained after setting the attenuator in the antenna system Monitor Combining Unit and
the desired monitoring value which is normally -0.155 DDM.
3.8.14.2 Clearance Signal Width Monitor.-
223 READ WIDTH DDM: Display function. Displays the DDM developed by the integral width
monitor including any offset value. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
864 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value set
874 SET WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width monitor
alerts when the Localizer is adjusted to its wide alert limit.
863 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value
873 SET WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALERT POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width
monitor alerts when the Localizer is adjusted to its narrow alert limit.
216 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value set
206 SET WIDTH MONITOR WIDE ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width monitor
alarms when the Localizer is adjusted to its wide alarm limit.
215 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value
205 SET WIDTH MONITOR NARROW ALARM POINT: Sets the DDM value at which the width
monitor alarms when the Localizer is adjusted to its narrow alarm limit.
263 READ SBO POWER LEVEL: Displays the SBO output power level as measured within the
transmitter. The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
103 SET SBO POWER LEVEL: Sets the transmitter SBO output power level. The Sideband-Only
output power level is changed in coarse or fine steps by momentarily depressing the digits 1
(decrease) and 5 (increase) or 7 (decrease) and 9 (increase) on the video terminal keyboard. The
display is continually refreshing and displays the Sideband-Only power level along with the
corresponding Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) count. This control is used to adjust the
Localizer Course Width to the correct value.
222 READ WIDTH RF LEVEL: Display function. Displays the Width RF Level relative value which
is a measure of the RF power level as seen by the Width detector in the antenna distribution unit.
The display is stopped by entering "CTRL J".
884 DISPLAY WIDTH RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 894.
894 SET WIDTH RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Sets the relative value at which the width monitor alerts
reducing the transmitter CSB output to its low-power alert limit and reading the corresponding width
RF level, control code 222. The Width RF Level Alarm Point is then set at a value well below the
value read to insure that the Course monitor alerts well before the Width monitor when the

214 DISPLAY WIDTH RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 204.
204 SET WIDTH RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the width monitor alarms
reducing the transmitter CSB output to its low-power alarm limit and reading the corresponding
width RF level, control code 222. The Width RF Level Alarm Point is then set at a value well below
the value read to insure that the Course monitor alarms well before the Width monitor when the
196 DISPLAY WIDTH MONITOR DDM OFFSET: Display function. Displays the value set using
control code 176.
176 SET WIDTH MONITOR DDM OFFSET: Sets an offset value into the width monitor to make the
Width DDM (Read Width DDM 223) reading indicate the desired value.
NOTE
Width DDM offset is used to compensate for the difference, if any, between the width DDM
value obtained after setting the attenuator in the antenna system Monitor Combining Unit and
the desired monitoring value which is normally -0.155 DDM.
3.8.15 Ident Keying.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used in
conjunction with the Morse Code Identification functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that
indicate display function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
130 SET KEYING ON (CRS and CLR): Allows for system keying at normal localizer intervals.
131 SET KEYING OFF (CRS and CLR): Disables the keying circuits on the Audio Generator Assembly.
When this control code is activated, an alarm is initiated.
132 SET CONTINUOUS IDENT TONE (CRS and CLR): Commands the Audio Generator Assembly
to emit a continuous keying tone. When this control code is activated, an alert is initiated.
NOTE
Placing the station in BYPASS automatically removes the Identification signal and generates
an Ident alarm. The identification signal may be restored at any time with the station in
bypass by entering code (130). Removing the BYPASS condition will automatically restore
the normal Identification signal.
3.8.15.1 Course Signal Ident Keying.-
037 READ IDENT MODULATION DEPTH: Display function. Displays the Ident level as calculated
by the Course Detector in the antenna distribution unit.

121 SET ID % MODULATION (90/150 Hz Modulation Off): Sets the modulation level of the
transmitter 1020 Hz Identification signal. The modulation level is changed in coarse or fine steps
by momentarily depressing the digits 1 (decrease) and 5 (increase) or 7 (decrease) and 9 (increase)
on the terminal keyboard. The display is continually refreshing and indicates the Identification
modulation level and the corresponding Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) count. The Ident
modulation level must be adjusted with the 90Hz and 150Hz navigation tones Off and the
Identification signal adjusted for a continuous tone.
047 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value
057 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Ident
monitor alarms when the Ident modulation percentage is reduced to its low alarm limit. The value
is obtained by setting the Ident tone to continuous and reducing the level to the low limit.
381 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the
value set using control code 391.
391 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the ident modulation depth.
382 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH OFFSET: Display function. Displays the value set
392 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH OFFSET: Sets the offset the built-in test equipment uses to
calculate the ident modulation depth.
082 READ KEYER DOT LENGTH: Display function. Displays the Course and Clearance Keyer Dot
Length in milliseconds. The Clearance keyer is synchronized to the Course keyer so the dot lengths
are the same.
3.8.15.2 Clearance Signal Ident Keying.-
224 READ IDENT MODULATION DEPTH: Display function. Displays the Ident level as calculated
by the Clearance Detector in the antenna distribution unit.
247 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the value
257 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH ALARM POINT: Sets the relative value at which the Ident
monitor alarms when the Ident modulation percentage is reduced to its low alarm limit. The value
is obtained by setting the Ident tone to continuous and reducing the level to the low limit.
681 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the
value set using control code 391.
691 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the ident modulation depth.

682 DISPLAY IDENT MODULATION DEPTH OFFSET: Display function. Displays the value set
692 SET IDENT MODULATION DEPTH OFFSET: Sets the offset the built-in test equipment uses to
calculate the ident modulation depth.
3.8.16 Frequencies.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to operate
the frequency functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate display function may be
accessed without inputting the station security code.
126 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION ON (CRS and CLR): Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation on.
127 SET 90/150 Hz MODULATION OFF (CRS and CLR): Turns the 90/150 Hz modulation off.
124 SET 90 Hz ONLY MODULATION (CRS and CLR): Sets only the 90 Hz % modulation.
125 SET 150 Hz ONLY MODULATION (CRS and CLR): Sets only the 150 Hz % modulation.
3.8.16.1 Course Frequencies.-
080 READ TRANSMITTER FREQUENCY: Display function. Allows maintenance personnel to read
the transmitter frequency as calculated by the built-in test equipment.
081 READ MODULATION FREQUENCY: Display function. Allows maintenance personnel to read
the modulation frequency as calculated by the built-in test equipment. Set 90 Hz only & Keying off
to read 90 Hz. Set 150 Hz only & Keying off to read 150 Hz. Set 90/150 Hz off & Keying to
Continuous to read 1020 Hz.
3.8.16.2 Clearance Frequencies.-
627 READ TRANSMITTER FREQUENCY: Display function. Allows maintenance personnel to read
the transmitter frequency as calculated by the built-in test equipment.
647 READ MODULATION FREQUENCY: Display function. Allows maintenance personnel to read
the modulation frequency as calculated by the built-in test equipment. Set 90 Hz only & Keying off
to read 90 Hz. Set 150 Hz only & Keying off to read 150 Hz. Set 90/150 Hz off & Keying to
Continuous to read 1020 Hz.

3.8.17 Voltage and Currents.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes that are used to
operate the voltage and current functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate display
function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
010 READ PRIMARY AC VOLTAGE: Display function. Displays the primary AC voltage as
calculated by the built-in test equipment.
183 DISPLAY PRIMARY AC VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the scaling
factor used to calculate the primary AC voltage.
163 SET PRIMARY AC VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used to calculate the
primary AC voltage.
069 DISPLAY PRIMARY AC VOLTAGE ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the AC Voltage
alarm point.
062 SET PRIMARY AC VOLTAGE ALERT POINT (930 = 93.0 VAC): Sets the primary AC voltage
alarm point. If the primary AC voltage drops below the alarm point, an alert is issued.
011 READ PRIMARY DC VOLTAGE: Display function. Display the primary DC voltage as calculated
184 DISPLAY DC VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the scaling factor used
by the built-in test equipment to calculate the DC voltage.
164 SET PRIMARY DC VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used by the built-in test
equipment to calculate the primary DC voltage.
012 READ PRIMARY DC CURRENT: Display function. Displays the primary DC current as calculated
by the built-in test equipment.
185 DISPLAY PRIMARY DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the Primary
DC Current scaling factor.
165 SET PRIMARY DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used by the built-in test
equipment to calculate the primary DC current.
013 READ BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT: Display function. Displays the battery charge current as
calculated by the built-in test equipment.
188 DISPLAY BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the
Battery Charge Current scaling factor.
168 SET BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test
equipment uses to calculate the battery charge current.
187 DISPLAY BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT OFFSET: Display function. Displays the Battery
Charge current offset.
167 SET BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT OFFSET: Sets the internal algorithm so the system will
properly track battery charge current over the batteries' charging range. This control code is used in
conjunction with control code 168 to calibrate the built-in test equipment.
015 READ DME ALARM STATUS VOLTAGE: Display function. For DME/Localizer co-location.
Displays the DME alarm status voltage. If DME status voltage drops below alarm point an alert is
initiated.
066 DISPLAY DME STATUS VOLTAGE ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the current
DME status voltage alarm point.
063 SET DME STATUS VOLTAGE ALARM POINT: Sets the DME status voltage alarm point. Entries
are interpreted as having decimal points (055 = 0.55).

3.8.18 Power Amplifier Current.- This paragraph lists a brief description, numerically listed, of the control
codes that are used to operate the power amplifier functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that
3.8.18.1 Course Signal Power Amplifier Current.-
024 READ PA CURRENT: Display function. Displays the Course Power Amplifier current.
186 DISPLAY PA DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the PA DC Current
scaling factor.
166 SET PA DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test equipment uses
to calculate the Power Amplifier DC current.
068 DISPLAY PA DC CURRENT ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the dc current alert
point.
061 SET PA DC CURRENT ALARM POINT (2950 = 2.95 A): Sets the Power Amplifier DC current
alarm point. If the Power Amplifier DC current exceeds this level an alert is initiated. This usually
indicates a malfunction of the Power Amplifier Assembly.
3.8.18.2 Clearance Signal Power Amplifier Current.-
760 READ PA CURRENT: Display function. Displays the Course Power Amplifier current.
761 DISPLAY PA DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the PA DC Current
scaling factor.
771 SET PA DC CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor the built-in test equipment uses
to calculate the Power Amplifier DC current.
763 DISPLAY PA DC CURRENT ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the dc current alarm
point.
773 SET PA DC CURRENT ALARM POINT (2950 = 2.95 A): Sets the Power Amplifier DC current
alarm point. If the Power Amplifier DC current exceeds this level an alert is initiated. This usually
indicates a malfunction of the Power Amplifier Assembly.
3.8.19 Time and Date.- This paragraph lists a brief description, numerically listed, of the control codes that
are used to operate the time and date functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate
018 DISPLAY TIME AND DATE: Display function. Displays the current time and date.
070 SET BOTH TIME AND DATE: Sets both time and date. Enter year, 00-99, enter month, 01-12,
enter date, 01-31, enter hour, 00-23, and enter minutes, 00-59, at the prompt.
071 SET DATE ONLY: Sets date only. Enter year, 00-99, enter month, 01-12, and enter date, 01-31,
at the prompt.
072 SET TIME ONLY: Set time only. Enter hour, 00-23, and enter minutes, 00-59, at the prompt.

3.8.20 Temperature.- This paragraph lists a brief description, numerically listed, of the control codes that
are used to operate the temperature functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes that indicate display
function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
025 READ SHELTER TEMPERATURE: Display function. Displays the shelter temperature, in degrees
celsius, as calculated by built-in test equipment.
067 DISPLAY SHELTER TEMP ALERT POINT - LOWER: Display function. Displays the lowest
shelter temperature, in degrees celsius, possible without causing an alert.
198 DISPLAY SHELTER TEMP SCALE FACTOR: Display function. Displays the scaling factor used
to calculate the shelter temperature.
060 SET SHELTER TEMP ALERT POINT - LOWER (x10): Sets the shelter temperature, in degrees
celsius, lower alert point. Entries are interpreted as having decimal points (350 = 35.0 degrees).
065 DISPLAY SHELTER TEMP ALERT POINT - UPPER: Display function. Displays the highest
shelter temperature, in degrees celsius, possible without causing an alert.
064 SET SHELTER TEMP ALERT POINT - UPPER (x 10): Sets the shelter temperature, in degrees
celsius, upper alert point. Entries are interpreted as having decimal points (350 = 35.0 degrees).
178 SET SHELTER TEMP SCALE FACTOR: Sets the scaling factor used by the built-in test equipment
to calculate the shelter temperature.
3.8.21 Far Field/Near Field Monitor Functions.- This paragraph lists a brief description of the control codes
that are used to operate the far field/near field monitor functions within the localizer transmitter. All codes
that indicate display function may be accessed without inputting the station security code.
Version 1.0 of the dual system software includes FFM capability. This mode, the FFM/NFM mode, may
be inactive, NFM active, FFM Maintenance, or FFM Executive. If the FFM/NFM mode is inactive,
FFM/NFM information is ignored. If the FFM/NFM mode is set to NFM, the data on the FFM/NFM port
is presumed to come from the NFM and is compared with the integral monitor data before an alarm decision
is made. If the FFM/NFM mode is set to FFM Maintenance, the FFM status will be displayed on the Model
1138 Remote Status Control System (RSCS), but the system will not shutdown if FFM parameters are out
of tolerance. If the FFM/NFM mode is set to FFM Executive, the FFM status shall be displayed on the
RSCS and out of tolerance FFM parameters will cause the transmitter to shutdown.
295 DISPLAY FFM/NFM MODE: Display function. Displays the FFM/NFM mode of operation. For
more details on FFM/NFM modes of operation refer to control code 009.
285 SET FFM/NFM MODE: Selects FFM/NFM Mode of operation.
0 INACTIVE
1 NFM ACTIVE
2 FFM MAINTENANCE
3 FFM EXECUTIVE
270 READ FFM RF LEVEL: Display function. Displays the FFM RF level.
944 DISPLAY FFM RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the FFM RF level alert
point.

954 SET FFM RF LEVEL ALERT POINT: Sets the FFM RF level alert point. When the RF level drops
below the alert level limit an alert is initiated.
290 DISPLAY FFM RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the FFM RF level alarm
point.
280 SET FFM RF LEVEL ALARM POINT: Sets the FFM RF level alarm point. When the RF level
drops below the alarm level limit an alarm is initiated.
271 READ FFM DDM: Display function. Displays the DDM as observed at the FFM.
292 DISPLAY FFM DDM OFFSET: Display function. Displays the FFM DDM offset factor.
282 SET FFM DDM OFFSET: Sets the FFM DDM offset factor.
923 DISPLAY FFM DDM ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the FFM DDM alert point.
933 SET FFM DDM ALERT POINT: Sets the FFM DDM alert point.
291 DISPLAY FFM DDM ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the FFM DDM alarm point.
281 SET FFM DDM ALARM POINT: Sets the FFM DDM alarm point.
900 READ FFM TOTAL MODULATION: Display function. Displays the total modulation as observed
at the FFM.
903 DISPLAY FFM TOTAL MODULATION UPPER ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the
FFM total modulation Upper alert point.
913 SET FFM TOTAL MODULATION UPPER ALERT POINT: Sets the FFM total modulation upper
alert point. If the total modulation exceeds this point an alert will be initiated.
904 DISPLAY FFM TOTAL MODULATION LOWER ALERT POINT: Display function. Displays the
FFM total modulation Lower alert point.
914 SET FFM TOTAL MODULATION LOWER ALERT POINT: Sets the FFM total modulation Lower
alert point.
905 DISPLAY FFM TOTAL MODULATION UPPER ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays the
FFM total modulation Upper alarm point.
915 SET FFM TOTAL MODULATION UPPER ALARM POINT: Sets the FFM total modulation upper
alarm point. If the total modulation exceeds this point an alarm will be initiated.
906 DISPLAY FFM TOTAL MODULATION LOWER ALARM POINT: Display function. Displays
the FFM total modulation Lower alarm point.
916 SET FFM TOTAL MODULATION LOWER ALARM POINT: Sets the FFM total modulation
Lower alarm point.
294 DISPLAY FFM ALARM DELAY: Display function. Displays the FFM alarm delay time, in
seconds.
284 SET FFM ALARM DELAY: Sets the FFM Alarm Delay in seconds.

SECTION 4. STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES
4.1 INTRODUCTION.- Standards and tolerances for the Capture-Effect Localizer are listed in table 4-1.
Table 4-2 contains a list of standards and tolerances of various signals found in the assemblies and CCAs
of the system, and table 4-3 lists remote monitor alarm threshold levels.
4.2 STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES.- Table 4-1 provides system level standards and tolerances for
the performance checks and maintenance tasks scheduled in section 5 and performed in section 6. Longer
periods of uninterrupted service can be achieved if these parameters are checked at the recommended
intervals and all other maintenance procedures are performed on schedule.
Table 4-1. System Standards and Tolerances.
Parameter Standard Reference

Tolerance Limit Paragraph
Initial Operational
A. TRANSMITTER
(1) Rated Power Output 15 W ±10% ±10%
(2) Frequency Assigned
Freq 0.001% 0.002%
B. SUPPLY VOLTAGE
(1) AC Voltage 230/50-60 Hz ±10% ±10%
115/50-60 Hz ±10% ±10%
(2) DC Voltage +28 Vdc +28 ±1.5 Vdc +28 ±2.0 Vdc
(3) LVPS (1A10/1A26)
(a) TP1 +28 Vdc +28 ±1.5 Vdc +28 ±2.0 Vdc N/A
(b) TP2 +12 Vdc +12 ±0.5 Vdc +12 ±0.5 Vdc N/A
(c) TP3 -12 Vdc -12 ±0.5 Vdc +12 ±0.5 Vdc N/A
(d) TP4 Ground Ground Ground N/A
(e) TP5 +28 Vdc +28 ±1.5 Vdc +28 ±2.0 Vdc N/A
(f) TP6 +5.2 Vdc +5.2 ±0.25 Vdc +5.2 ±0.25 Vdc N/A
C. VSWR <1.2:1 <1.25:1

(1) CSB VSWR <1.2:1 <1.2:1 <1.25:1
(2) SBO VSWR <1.2:1

Table 4-2. Signal Standards and Tolerances.
RF Power Amplifier (030295-0004) (1A7/1A23)
Test Point Description
Power Level (P3) 15 Watts Nominal
Modulation (P3) CSB, Amplitude Modulation 20% Nominal Each tone
Power Level (P4) 300 mW Nominal
Modulation (P4) SBO, DSB Suppressed Carrier
Microprocessor CCA (012595-1002) (1A12)
Address, Data, and TTL levels digital signals

Control Buss (P1)
I/O Signals (J1 and J2) TTL levels
Synthesizer Assembly (030579-0001) (1A6/1A22)
Connector P1-10 TTL signal
Connector P2 RF, 200 to 400 mW
Connector P3 100 MHz, 1 mW Nominal
Voltage and Scaling CCA (012547-0001) (1A27A1)
J1-8 5.5 Vdc to 7.5 Vdc
J1-7 . 2 Vdc
J1-3 . 2 Vdc
J1-5 7.5 Vdc max.
J1-6 . .5 Vdc to 2 Vdc

Table 4-2. Signal Standards and Tolerances (Cont).
Modulator CCA (030396-0002) (1A5A1/1A5A)
J1-2 (SBO out) 5 finger Pattern 0 to 28 V peak
J1-10 (CSB out) Kissing Pattern 0 to 28 V peak
J1-5 DC level proportional to the audio level, dependant on mod %
J1-16 22 to 28 Vdc
J1-17 22 to 28 Vdc
J1-6 AC coupled audio sample, dependant on mod % and power out
J1-4 DC analog of RF level, dependant on power level
VIA CCA (012540-0001) (1A14)
TTL signals
Serial CCA (012772-0001) (1A11)
J2-5 Data from field processor, RS-232 level ±6 Vdc rectangle waveform
J2-3 -5 Vdc, inactive RS-232
J3-3 Ground when CSB connected to antenna

+5 Vdc when CSB connected to dummy load
J3-1 Ground when SBO connected to antenna

+5 Vdc when SBO connected to dummy load

Table 4-2. Standards and Tolerances (Cont).
Audio Generator CCA (012542-0005) (1A8/1A24)
P1-1/2 7.2 kHz TTL square wave
P1-13 TTL signal representing keying that microprocessor senses
P1-6 8-Hz square wave, varying between 1.3 to 1.8 Vdc
P1-11 Bi-phase Modulator Drive
P1-9 SBO 0 to 1.5 Vpeak, dependant on SBO power setting
P1-8 CSB 0 to 9.2 Vpeak, dependant on CSB power setting
P1-34 CSB Audio signal, AC coupled
P1-33 1028-Hz 3.8 Vp-p
RF Control CCA (012543-0003) (1A9/1A25)
P1-26 CSB control +Vdc, current source (antenna)

-Vdc, current sink (dummy load)
P1-24 SBO control +Vdc, current source (antenna)

-Vdc, current sink (dummy load)
P1-14 CSB Forward Power Negative DC level which increases in negative direction as RF power
increases.
P1-16 SBO Forward Power Negative DC level which increases in negative direction as RF power
increases.
P1-18 CSB Reflected Power Negative DC level which increases in negative direction as RF power
increases.
P1-20 SBO Reflected Power Negative DC level which increases in negative direction as RF power
increases.
4.3 INTERCONNECTION CABLE REQUIREMENTS.- All external cables and/or circuits required to
complete the installation of the localizer are supplied. Optional items such as modems, printers, etc. are
supplied by the customer or are included in the optional installation kits.

4.4 REMOTE MONITOR ALARM THRESHOLDS.- Table 4-3 lists threshold levels for remote monitor
and alarm circuits. The levels are minimum standard operating parameters. Alarms are activated before
the minimum (or maximum levels in certain cases) operating tolerance of any critical parameter of the
equipment is exceeded.
Table 4-3. Remote Monitor Alarm Thresholds.
Tolerance Limit
Parameter Standard Initial Operating
120/230 Vac 120/230 Vac ±10% ±10%
+28 Vdc +28 Vdc 26 Vdc 26 Vdc
+5 Vdc +5 Vdc ±0.1 Vdc ±0.15 Vdc
+12 Vdc +12 Vdc ±0.5 Vdc ±0.5 Vdc
-12 Vdc -12 Vdc ±0.5 Vdc ±0.5 Vdc
CSB VSWR <1.2:1 <1.2:1 <1.25:1
SBO VSWR <1.2:1 <1.2:1 <1.25:1
DC Current Established ±20% ±20%

during
installation
PA Current Established ±20% ±20%

during
installation
Sum of Depth of Established ±10% ±10%

Modulation (SDM) during
installation
Ident Level Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
CSB Fwd/Refl Pwr Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation

Table 4-3. Remote Monitor Alarm Thresholds (Cont).
Tolerance Limit
Parameter Standard Initial Operating
SBO Fwd/Refl Pwr Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Course RF Level Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Course DDM Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Course Width RF Level Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Course Width DDM Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Clearance RF Level Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Clearance DDM Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Clearance Width RF Level Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation
Clearance Width DDM Established ±10% ±10%

during
installation

SECTION 5. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
5.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section contains the schedule for performance checks and other maintenance
tasks required to maintain the localizer station. The use of remote monitoring equipment minimizes the need
for periodic equipment performance checks. However; the performance checks and maintenance tasks listed
in tables 5-1 and 5-2 shall be performed immediately after initial installation or modification of installed
equipment, after completion of any corrective maintenance, and following the return to service of any
module or unit removed for repair. Refer to sections 3, 4, and 6 for specific instructions, tolerances, and
maintenance procedures, and to the tables referenced in this section.
5.2 PERFORMANCE CHECKS.- Table 5-1 is a list of required performance checks. Supervising
personnel are responsible for scheduling based on the recommended intervals. Information contained in
table 5-1 is limited to equipment specifically covered in this manual. Refer to the appropriate instruction
manuals for other units or components of the localizer station.
Table 5-1. Performance Checks.
Reference Paragraph
Standards & Maintenance
Performance Checks Tolerances Procedures
Monthly
a. Remote Maintenance Monitor N/A 6.2.1.1

(Accomplished by telephone at
remote sites)
b. Remote Shutdown/Restart Table 4-3 6.2.2
c. Voltage and Current Checks Table 4-3 6.2.6
Quarterly
a. Monitor Alarm Points Table 4-3 6.2.3
b. CSB Modulation Percentage Table 4-3 6.2.4
c. Ground Check N/A 6.3.1

Table 5-1. Performance Checks (Cont).
Reference Paragraph
Standards & Maintenance
Performance Checks Tolerances Procedures
Semiannually
a. RF Amplifier Power. For dual Table 4-3 6.2.7

systems, transfer and measure
operating frequency and RF power
of both systems.
Annually
a. CSB Modulation Percentage Table 4-3 6.2.4
b. Transmission Line Insulation N/A 6.3.2

Resistance.
c. Internal Test Equipment Calibration N/A 6.2.10
d. Sideband Null N/A 6.3.3
5.3 OTHER ONSITE MAINTENANCE.- Table 5-2 is a list of other maintenance tasks for the localizer
station. These include periodic cleaning of the shelter, lubrication, adjustments, or inspections necessary
to ensure continued equipment operation and reliability.
Table 5-2. Other Maintenance Tasks.
Monthly
a. Remove dust accumulation from inside each cabinet-installed unit. Check components for evidence
of overheating. Make a mechanical inspection and check all electrical connections for tightness.
b. Check batteries
Quarterly.- Examine air filters in shelter vent hood and air conditioning unit. Replace and/or clean
as required.
Annually.- Perform a complete visual inspection of the facility, antenna array, and distribution
assembly.

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
6.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section contains procedures for the performance checks listed in section 5.
All maintenance procedures performed on transmitter 1 must also be performed on transmitter 2. The
associated standards and tolerances are listed in section 4. Some tasks covered in this section may require
removal of the equipment from service for brief periods. When this is necessary, maintenance personnel
shall notify the appropriate air traffic control in accordance with established airport procedures.
Before beginning any procedure covered in this section, read the instructions, then assemble the necessary
tools, test equipment, and materials required to complete the task. Review appropriate performance
standards and tolerances listed in section 4 for each task to ensure familiarity. If the expected results of a
procedure are out of tolerance, refer to the corrective maintenance action in Section 7.
6.2 PERFORMANCE CHECK PROCEDURES.- The following procedures are used to accomplish the
performance checks listed in table 5-1 and to obtain facility reference data. Unless otherwise indicated,
performance checks can be completed using the built-in control system and a maintenance data terminal.
Each procedure will identify the order in which procedures must be accomplished by listing prerequisite
procedures. A brief explanation of what the procedure does is given along with the required tools, materials,
and test equipment, followed by step-by-step instructions.
NOTE
Before beginning any procedure covered in this section, read the task instructions, assemble
the necessary tools, test equipment, and materials required to complete the task.
6.2.1 Remote Maintenance Monitor Performance Checks.- The Remote Maintenance Monitor readings are
taken remotely using a maintenance terminal and normal telephone lines. These are integrity checks of the
built-in test and monitoring circuits. A procedure for testing out-of-tolerance conditions is included. All
keyboard entries (such as; Enter "099") are followed by the ENTER key unless otherwise instructed. When
a reading has been completed, the transmitter is returned to the command mode by pressing the CTRL and
J keys simultaneously. Refer to Section 3 for additional station command codes and operation.
6.2.1.1 Remote Maintenance Monitor Operation Performance Check.- Test equipment required -None.
NOTE
The monitor integrity check requires that the equipment be removed from service. Notify
appropriate air traffic control personnel in accordance with local procedures before
performing this check.
a. Using the remote maintenance terminal and auto-dial modem, call the glideslope equipment.

b. When the connection is completed, the station will respond with a sign-on message and current
status.
c. Within 5 seconds, enter facility password.
d. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed if the correct password is entered.
e Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
respond with "ENTER SECURITY CODE" message.
f. Enter facility security code. System will respond with "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message.
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation.
g. Enter control code "141" (Display All Readings), to display all readings. Verify readings by
comparison with the appropriate tolerances listed in table 4-3. Table 6-1 is a typical readout
example.
Table 6-1. Typical Remote Maintenance Monitor Readout.
141
Example - EQUIPMENT #1
STATION ON-LINE (IN MASTER BYPASS)
DATE: 1/1/94 TIME: 8:38:04

PRI. AC V : 120.4 PRI. DC V : 28.28
PRI. DC I : 5.99 BAT. DC I : 0.16
CRS PA DC I : 2.99 CLR PA DC I : 2.99
SHELTER T : 23.1
CRS CSB F PWR : 15.3 CRS CSB R PWR : .009
CRS SBO F PWR : .300 CRS SBO R PWR : .000
CLR CSB F PWR : 15.1 CLR CSB R PWR : .001
CLR SBO F PWR : .300 CLR SBO R PWR : .000
CRS CSB VSWR : 1.0 CRS SBO VSWR : 1.0
CLR CSB VSWR : 1.0 CLR SBO VSWR : 1.0
CRS CTR DDM : 0.000 CRS WID DDM : 0.155
CRS C RF LVL : 206 CRS W RF LVL : 212
CRS SDM : 40.0 CLR SDM : 40.0
CRS IDENT LVL : 8.0 CLR IDENT LVL : 8.0
CH3 DDM : 0.000 CH3 LVL : 221
CH4 DDM : 0.155 CH4 LVL : 217
NFM/FFM DDM : 0.000 NFM/FFM SDM : 0.399
NFM/FFM LVL : 200

6.2.2 Remote Shutdown/Restart Performance Check.- This check tests the localizer's ability to detect out-
of-tolerance conditions, respond with alarms, and restart following a shutdown. The station's identification
modulation level is changed to create a fault condition. Test equipment required - None.
NOTE
The monitor integrity check requires that the equipment be removed from service. Notify
appropriate air traffic control personnel in accordance with local procedures before
performing this check.
a. Call the localizer station.
b. When the connection is completed, the station will respond with a Sign-On message and the current
status.
c. Enter facility password.
d. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed if the correct password is entered.
e. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
f. Enter facility security code. System will respond with "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message.
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation.
g. Enter control code "121" (Set Course ID % Modulation) to display the ID % modulation.
h. Record the DAC value (number in parenthesis). This value will be used later to restore operation.
i. Using the 1-key, decrease the value to zero. This will cause an ALARM due to ID level. The
modulation percentage will not read zero unless the 90/150 modulation has been removed.
j. Press "CTRL J" to exit the "121" (Set Course ID% Modulation) command.
k. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Restart - Reset) to reset and restart the
system. Then press the ENTER key. Verify the following message is displayed:
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
NOTE
There will be a delay of 15-20 seconds following entry of control code "098", as the system
attempts to restart and shuts down following the alarm delay time.

l. Verify that the system shuts down and "SHUTDOWN" message is displayed on the remote
maintenance terminal.
m. Enter control code "008" (Fault Message) to read the fault message.
n. Verify that the following message is displayed:
WARNING! - THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS

WERE OUT OF TOLERANCE AT (FAULT TIME) HOURS
nn ID LEVEL KEYER FAILURE
o. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) and enter the security code to return the system to
the Bypass mode of operation.
p. Enter control code "121" (Set Course ID% Modulation), then increase the DAC count to the original
value recorded in step (b). This restores the ID modulation to its previous level.
q. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "121" (Set Course ID% Modulation) command.
r. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Restart - Reset) to exit the Bypass mode of
operation and restart the system. System will respond with the following message:
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
s. After the station returns to normal, enter control code "008" (Fault Message) and verify the
"STATION NORMAL" message appears.
t. Enter control code "002" (Clear Password) to clear password and secure the system.
u. Enter control code "091" (Hang Up From Remote Location) to hang up from the remote location.
System will respond with a message similar to the message shown below:
GOODBYE
+++ATH0
RESTART
6.2.3 Monitor Alarm Point Performance Check.- Monitor alarm points are set initially during installation.
This check is to verify that the initial alarm limits have not changed. Test equipment required - None.

NOTE
A facility shutdown will be required if the alarm limits require adjustment.
a. Enter facility password.
b. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed if the correct password is entered.
c. Enter control code "031" (Read Course Centerline DDM) to read the course centerline DDM. Verify
0.000 DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "031" command.
d. Enter control code "221" (Read Clearance Centerline DDM) to read the clearance centerline DDM.
Verify 0.000 DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "221" command.
e. Enter control code "033" (Read Course Width DDM) to read the course width DDM. Verify 0.155
DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "033" command.
f. Enter control code "223" (Read Clearance Width DDM) to read the clearance width DDM. Verify
0.155 DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "233" command.
g. Enter control code "040" (Display Course Centerline RF Level Alarm Point) to read the course
centerline RF level alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "040" command.
h. Enter control code "210" (Display Clearance Centerline RF Level Alarm Point) to read the clearance
centerline RF level alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "210" command.
i. Enter control code "041" (Display Course Centerline DDM Monitor Alarm Point) to read the course
centerline DDM monitor alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "041" command.
j. Enter control code "211" (Display Clearance Centerline DDM Monitor Alarm Point) to read the
clearance centerline DDM monitor alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "211" command.
k. Enter control code "042" (Display Course Width RF Level Alarm Point) to read the course width RF
level alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "042" command.
l. Enter control code "214" (Display Clearance Width RF Level Alarm Point) to read the clearance
width RF level alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "214" command.
m. Enter control code "043" (Display Course Centerline SDM Alarm Point - Upper) to read the course
centerline SDM upper alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "043" command.
n. Enter control code "212" (Display Clearance Centerline SDM Alarm Point - Upper) to read the
clearance centerline SDM upper alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "212" command.

o. Enter control code "044" (Display Course Width Monitor Wide Alarm Point) to read the course
width monitor wide alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "044" command.
p. Enter control code "216" (Display Clearance Width Monitor Wide Alarm Point) to read the clearance
width monitor wide alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "216" command.
q. Enter control code "045" (Display Course Width Monitor Narrow Alarm Point) to read the course
width monitor narrow alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "045" command.
r. Enter control code "215" (Display Clearance Width Monitor Narrow Alarm Point) to read the
clearance width monitor narrow alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "215" command.
s. Enter control code "046" (Display the Course Centerline SDM Alarm Point - Lower) to read the
course centerline SDM lower alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "046" command.
t. Enter control code "213" (Display the Clearance Centerline SDM Alarm Point - Lower) to read the
clearance centerline SDM lower alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "213" command.
u. Enter control code "047" (Display Course Ident Level Alarm Point) to read the course ident level
alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "047" command.
v. Enter control code "247" (Display Clearance Ident Level Alarm Point) to read the clearance ident
level alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "247" command.
w. Enter control code "048" (Display Course CSB VSWR Alarm Point) to read the CSB course VSWR
x. Enter control code "248" (Display Clearance CSB VSWR Alarm Point) to read the CSB clearance
VSWR alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "248" command.
y. Enter control code "049" (Display Course SBO VSWR Alarm Point) to read course SBO VSWR
z. Enter control code "249" (Display Clearance SBO VSWR Alarm Point) to read clearance SBO
VSWR alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "249" command.
aa. Enter control code "065" (Display Shelter Temperature Alarm Point - Upper) to read the shelter
temperature upper alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "065" command.
ab. Enter control code "067" (Display Shelter Temperature Alarm Point - Lower) to read the shelter
temperature lower alarm point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "067" command.
ac. Enter control code "068" (Display PA DC Current Alarm Point) to read the PA DC current alarm
point. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "068" command.

ad. Enter control code "069" (Display Primary AC voltage Alarm Point) to read the primary AC voltage
af. If adjustments are necessary, use control codes found in tables 3-3 and 3-4 to set parameters to
appropriate limits.
6.2.4 CSB Modulation Percentage Performance Check.- The internal modulation meter is calibrated to read
the correct modulation provided. This procedure insures the modulation meter is correctly calibrated. This
procedure assumes that CSB and SBO wattmeter bodies are installed in the system. Test equipment required
- RF coupler (sniffer), oscilloscope, wattmeter.
NOTE
The following procedure removes the localizer from service. Notify appropriate air traffic
control personnel before you perform this procedure.
c Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
d. Enter facility security code. System will respond with "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message.
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation. Verify BYPASS LED illuminates.
e. Enter control code "125" (Set 150 Hz Modulation Only) to set 150 Hz modulation only. Verify
ALARM LED illuminates.
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to remove the ident tone.
g. Insert RF sniffer in course CSB wattmeter body.
h. Using a test cable, connect oscilloscope to RF sniffer.
i. Observe the modulation envelope on the oscilloscope. Compute the modulation percentage using
the following formula:
% Mod = (Emax - Emin) x 100

Emax + Emin
j. Record the modulation percentage.

k. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) to read course total modulation %.
Record this value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "036" command.
l. Compare the values recorded in steps (j) and (k). If the external percentage of modulation and the
internal percentage of modulation are not within the tolerances in tables 4-1 and 4-3, calibration may
be required. Refer to paragraph 6.4.4 to calibrate the modulation percentage.
m. Insert RF sniffer in clearance CSB wattmeter body.
n. Using a test cable, connect oscilloscope to RF sniffer.
o. Observe the modulation envelope on the oscilloscope. Compute the modulation percentage using

Emax + Emin
p. Record the modulation percentage.
q. Enter control code "800" (Read Clearance Total Modulation %) to read clearance total modulation
%. Record this value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "800" command.
r. Compare the values recorded in steps (p) and (q). If the external percentage of modulation and the
internal percentage of modulation are not within the tolerances in tables 4-1 and 4-3, calibration may
be required. Refer to paragraph 6.4.4 to calibrate the modulation percentage.
s. Enter control code "98" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
operation. System will respond with the following message:
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
t. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.2.5 Ident Modulation Percentage Performance Check.- The internal modulation meter is calibrated to read
the correct modulation provided. This procedure insures the modulation meter is correctly calibrated. Test
equipment required - RF coupler (sniffer), oscilloscope, wattmeter.
NOTE
The following procedure removes the localizer from service. Notify appropriate air traffic
control personnel before you perform this procedure.

c. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation. Verify the BYPASS LED illuminates.
e. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to turn off the 90/150 Hz modulation.
Verify the ALARM LED illuminates.
f. Enter control code "132" (Set Continuous Ident Tone) to set keying to continuous ident tone.
g. Insert RF sniffer in the course CSB wattmeter body.
h. Connect oscilloscope to RF sniffer.

Emax + Emin
k. Enter control code "121" (Set Course ID % Modulation) to read the internal ID modulation
percentage. Record this value.
l. Compare the values recorded in steps (j) and (k). If the external percentage of modulation and the
internal percentage of modulation are not within the tolerances in table 4-1, calibration may be
required. Refer to paragraph 6.4.4 to calibrate the modulation percentage.
m. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "121" command.
n. Insert RF sniffer in the clearance CSB wattmeter body.
o. Connect oscilloscope to RF sniffer.
p. Observe the modulation envelope on the oscilloscope. Compute the modulation percentage using

Emax + Emin

q. Record the modulation percentage.
r. Enter control code "690" (Set Clearance ID % Modulation) to read the internal ID modulation
percentage. Record this value.
s. Compare the values recorded in steps (q) and (r). If the external percentage of modulation and the
internal percentage of modulation are not within the tolerances in table 4-1, calibration may be
required. Refer to paragraph 6.4.4 to calibrate the modulation percentage.
t. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "690" command.
u. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
o. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.2.6 Voltage and Current Performance Check.- Voltages and currents are checked to verify that the
transmitter and associated equipment are operating properly. Lower than normal voltage readings can cause
failures as well as changes in transmitter frequency and power output. Higher than normal voltages can also
cause rapid equipment failures. High current readings indicate areas that require immediate attention. Test
equipment required - None.
c. Enter control code "141" (Display All Readings) to display all readings. This will result in a display
similar to that shown in table 6-1. Record the voltage and current values.
d. If individual voltages and currents are desired, refer to table 6-2 for specific readouts.
Table 6-2. Voltage and Current Command Codes.

Control Code Control Code Description
010 Read Primary AC Voltage

011 Read Primary DC Voltage
012 Read Primary DC Current
013 Read Battery Charge Current
014 Read Test DC Current
015 Read DME Alarm Status Voltage
024 Read PA Current

6.2.7 RF Amplifier Power Performance Check.- The CSB and SBO power outputs are measured to assure
that they are within the limits specified in section 4. The transmitter RF power is measured on both internal
and external wattmeters. A pattern of reliability can be established by comparing the two readings. VSWR
is also computed during this procedure. Test equipment required - Wattmeter, 25 watt, 100-250 MHz
wattmeter element, 1 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 100 milliwatt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter
element.
NOTE
The localizer is removed from service during this test. Notify appropriate air traffic control
personnel before beginning.
e. Enter control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) to read course CSB forward Power.
Record the power reading for use later.
f. Read and record forward power at the wattmeter.
g. Use "CTRL J" to exit "020" command.
h. Verify that the internal and external power readings are within the tolerance of tables 4-1 and 4-3.
If the readings are out of tolerance, set the CSB Forward Power Scaling Factor as detailed in
paragraph 6.4.15.
i. Enter control code "021" (Read Course CSB Reflected Power) to read CSB reflected power. Record
this value.
j. Read and record reflected power at the wattmeter. Compare the readings with the expected values
in tables 4-1 and 4-3. If the readings are out of tolerance, set the CSB Reflected Power Offset and
set the CSB Reflected Scaling Factor as detailed in paragraph 6.4.16.
k Use "CTRL J" to exit "021" command.

l. CSB VSWR is computed as follows:
Forward Power % Reflected Power

VSWR '
Forward Power & Reflected Power
m. Record the computed VSWR.
n. Enter control code "038" (Read Course CSB VSWR) to read course CSB VSWR. Record this value
and compare with tolerances in table 4-3. Use "CTRL J" to exit "038" command.
o. Enter control code "022" (Read Course SBO Forward Power) to read the course SBO forward power.
Record this value for later use. Use "CTRL J" to exit "022" command.
p. Read the SBO forward power at the wattmeter. Record this value. Compare the reading with the
values specified in table 4-1.
q. Enter control code "023" (Read Course SBO Reflected Power) to read the course SBO reflected
power. Record this value. Use "CTRL J" to exit "023" command.
r. Read the course SBO reflected power at the wattmeter. Compare both internal and external readings
with the tolerances in table 4-1.
s. Enter control code "039" (Read Course SBO VSWR) to read course SBO VSWR. Record this value.
Use "CTRL J" to exit "039" command.
t. Compute the VSWR using the formula in step (l). Verify that the computed VSWR is within the
tolerance listed in table 4-1.
u. Repeat steps (e) thru (t) for the Clearance transmitter by substituting the following control codes for
those above:
Control code "260" (Read Clearance CSB Forward Power)

Control code "261" (Read Clearance CSB Reflected Power)
Control code "262" (Read Clearance CSB VSWR)
Control code "263" (Read Clearance SBO Forward Power)
Control code "264" (Read Clearance SBO Reflected Power)
Control code "740" (Read Clearance SBO VSWR)
v. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Restart - Reset) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART

w. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.2.8 Field Monitor Levels Performance Checks.- The field monitor samples the radiated signal to
determine course DDM, width DDM and RF level, Ident level, and Sum of Depth of Modulation (SDM).
The expected values should be the same as the values established during flight inspection. Test equipment
required - Modulation meter or Oscilloscope.
6.2.8.1 Read/Calibrate Course Monitor Offset - Course System.- Course DDM offset is used to compensate
for the difference, if any, between the DDM obtained from the antenna system Monitor Combining Unit and
the desired monitoring point which is 0.000 DDM.
NOTE
The Course Offset value should have been recorded at the time the system was
commissioned. Any later changes in the value required to bring the course monitor to the
desired DDM point are suspect and must be thoroughly evaluated.
a. Enter the facility password
b. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed when the correct password has been entered.
c. Enter control code "99" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. The system
will respond with "ENTER SECURITY CODE".
d. Enter the facility security code. The response will be "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS". Verify
the BYPASS LED illuminates.
e. Enter control code "31" (Read Course DDM) to read the monitored course DDM.
f. Record Course DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "31 command.
g. Using a calibrated PIR, measure and record the actual radiated course DDM at the runway centerline
ground check point.
h. Compare the DDM values recorded in steps (e) and (g). If the two do not agree, the Course DDM
Offset may need to be adjusted. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
A continued need to change the offset from the value established at the time the facility was
commissioned may indicate a gradual deterioration in the antenna system RF Distribution
Unit, RF Combining Unit, Monitor Combining Unit or Course Integral Detector.
i. Enter control code "180" (Display Course Monitor DDM Offset) and record the value displayed.

j. Enter control code "160" (Set Course Monitor DDM Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter
0.
k. Enter control code "31" (Read Course DDM) and record the uncalibrated course DDM.
l. Calculate the new Course DDM Offset using the following formula:
Course DDM Offset = Runway Centerline DDM (step (g)) - Uncalibrated Course DDM (step (k)).
Be sure to observe the polarity of the values recorded in steps (g) and (k) in the above formula. If
the new course DDM offset is a negative number, subtract it from 65536. The result is the value to
be entered below to correct the course monitor DDM reading.
m. Enter control code "160" (Set Course Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the plus or minus
value calculated in step (l).
n. Enter control code "180" (Display Course DDM Offset) to confirm the entry.
o. Enter control code "31" (Read Course DDM) and confirm the monitor DDM agrees with the runway
centerline DDM recorded in step (g).
p. Enter control code "98" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit bypass. The system
will respond wit the following message:
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
q. Verify the BYPASS and ALARM LED's extinguish.
6.2.8.2 Read/Calibrate Width Monitor Offset - Course System.- Width DDM offset is used to compensate
for the difference, if any, between the DDM obtained from the antenna system Monitor Combining Unit after
setting the Width Attenuator in the Monitor Combining Unit and the desired monitoring point which is
normally -0.155 DDM.
NOTE
The Width Offset described should have been recorded at the time the system was
commissioned. Any later changes in Offset required to bring the Width monitor to the
desired DDM value are suspect and must be thoroughly evaluated.

e. Enter control code "33" (Read Width DDM) to read the monitored Width DDM.
f. Record the Width DDM. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "33" command.
g. Using a calibrated PIR, measure and record the actual radiated width DDM at the designated width
ground check point.
h. Compare the DDM values recorded in steps (e) and (g). If the two do not agree, the width DDM
offset may need to be adjusted. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
Unit, RF Combining Unit, Monitor Combining Unit or Width Integral Detector.
i. Enter control code "181" (Display Width Monitor DDM Offset) and record the value displayed.
j. Enter control code "161" (Set Width Monitor DDM Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter 0.
k. Enter control code "33" (Read Width DDM) and record the uncalibrated width DDM.
l. Calculate the new Width DDM Offset using the following formula:
Width DDM Offset = Measured Width DDM (step (g)) - Uncalibrated Width DDM (step (k)).
Be sure to observe the polarity of the values recorded in steps (g) and (k) in the above formula. If
the new width DDM offset is a negative number, subtract it from 65536. The result is the value to
be entered below to correct the monitor width DDM reading.
m. Enter control code "161" (Set Width Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the plus or minus
value calculated in step (l).
n. Enter control code "181" (Display Width DDM Offset) to confirm the entry.
o. Enter control code "33" (Read Width DDM) and confirm the monitor DDM agrees with the Width
DDM recorded in step (g).
p. Enter control code "98" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit bypass. The system

LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
q. Verify the BYPASS and ALARM LED's extinguish.
6.2.8.3 Read/Calibrate Course Monitor Offset - Clearance System.- Course DDM offset is used to
compensate for the difference, if any, between the DDM obtained from the antenna system Monitor
Combining Unit and the desired monitoring point which is 0.000 DDM. The measurements must be made
with the Course transmitter RF "OFF" and its CSB and SBO outputs terminated in dummy loads.
NOTE
The Course Offset value should have been recorded at the time the system was
commissioned. Any later changes in the value required to bring the course monitor to the
desired DDM point are suspect and must be thoroughly evaluated.
e. Enter control code "519" (Turn Course Transmitter RF OFF) to turn off the course transmitter RF.
In the transmitter cabinet that is ON-LINE, terminate both the CSB and SBO outputs from the course
transmitter.
f. Enter control code "221" (Read CLR Centerline DDM) to read the monitored clearance centerline
DDM.
g. Record clearance centerline DDM. Use "CTRL J" to stop the refreshing display.
h. Using a calibrated PIR, measure and record the actual radiated course DDM at the runway centerline
ground check point.
i. Compare the DDM values recorded in steps (f) and (h). If the two do not agree, the Course DDM
Offset may need to be adjusted. Proceed as follows:

NOTE
Unit, RF Combining Unit, Monitor Combining Unit or Course Integral Detector.
j. Enter control code "195" (Display CLR Centerline DDM Offset) and record the value displayed.
k. Enter control code "175" (Set CLR Centerline DDM Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter
0.
l. Enter control code "221" (Read CLR Centerline DDM) and record the uncalibrated clearance
centerline DDM. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "221" command.
m. Calculate the new clearance DDM Offset using the following formula:
Clearance Centerline DDM Offset = Runway Centerline DDM (step (g)) - Uncalibrated clearance
centerline DDM (step (l)).
Be sure to observe the polarity of the values recorded in steps (g) and (l) in the above formula. If
the new clearance centerline DDM Offset is a negative number, subtract it from 65536. The result
is the value to be entered below to correct the clearance centerline DDM reading.
n. Enter control code "175" (Set CLR Centerline DDM Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter
the plus or minus value calculated in step (m).
o. Enter control code "195" (Display Clearance Centerline DDM Offset) to confirm the entry.
p. Enter control code "221" (Read Clearance Centerline DDM) and confirm the monitor DDM agrees
with the runway centerline DDM recorded in step (g). Use "CTRL J" to exit the "221" command.
q. Remove the dummy loads from the course transmitter CSB and SBO outputs.
r. Enter control code "518" (Turn Course Transmitter RF On).
s. Enter control code "221" (Read CLR Centerline DDM) and verify the presence of the course
transmitter output does not affect the DDM reading. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "221" command.
t. Enter control code "98" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit bypass. The system
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART

u. Verify the BYPASS and ALARM LED's extinguish.
6.2.8.4 Read/Calibrate Width Monitor Offset - Clearance System.- Width DDM offset is used to
compensate for the difference, if any, between the DDM obtained from the antenna system Monitor
Combining Unit after setting the Width Attenuator in the Monitor Combining Unit and the desired
monitoring point which is normally -0.155 DDM. The measurements must be made with the Course
transmitter RF "OFF" and its CSB and SBO outputs terminated in dummy loads.
NOTES
The Width Offset described should have been recorded at the time the system was
commissioned. Any later changes in Offset required to bring the width monitor to the
desired DDM value are suspect and must be thoroughly evaluated.
e. Enter control code "519" (Turn Course Transmitter RF OFF). In the ON-LINE transmitter cabinet,
terminate both the CSB and SBO outputs from the course transmitter.
f. Enter control code "223" (Read CLR Width DDM) to read the monitored width DDM.
g. Record the width DDM. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "223" command.
h Using a calibrated PIR, measure and record the actual radiated width DDM at the designated width
ground check point.
i. Compare the DDM values recorded in steps (g) and (h). If the two do not agree, the clearance width
DDM Offset may need to be adjusted. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
Unit, RF Combining Unit, Monitor Combining Unit, or Width Integral Detector.
j. Enter control code "196" (Display CLR Width DDM Offset) and record the value displayed.

k. Enter control code "176" (Set CLR Width DDM Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter 0.
l. Enter control code "223" (Read CLR Width DDM) and record the uncalibrated width DDM.
m. Calculate the new clearance width DDM offset using the following formula:
Width DDM Offset = Measured Clearance Width DDM (step (h)) - Uncalibrated clearance width
DDM (step (l)).
Be sure to observe the polarity of the values recorded in steps (h) and (l) in the above formula. If
the new clearance width DDM offset is a negative number, subtract it from 65536. The result is the
value to be entered below to correct the clearance width DDM reading.
m. Enter control code "176" (Set CLR Width Offset). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the plus or
minus value calculated in step (m).
n. Enter control code "196" (Display CLR Width DDM Offset) to confirm the entry.
o. Enter control code "223" (Read CLR Width DDM) and confirm the monitor DDM agrees with the
width DDM recorded in step (g).
p. Remove the dummy loads from the course transmitter CSB and SBO outputs.
q. Enter control code "518" (Turn Course Transmitter RF On).
r. Enter control code "223" (Read CLR Width DDM) and verify the presence of the Course transmitter
output does not affect the DDM reading. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "223" command.
s. Enter control code "98" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit bypass. The system
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
t. Verify the BYPASS and ALARM LED's extinguish.
6.2.8.5 Total % Modulation (SDM).-
a. Enter control code "199" (Read Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) to verify the course
modulation % scale factor is set to 2048.
b. SDM can be measured externally with a modulation meter or oscilloscope connected to Power
Amplifier test point 1A7/1A23-TP2.

c. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) to read course total modulation %
internal. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "036" command.
d. Compute the new scaling factor using the following formula:
Scaling factor = (External Course Total Modulation %/Internal Course Total Modulation %) x 2048
e. Enter control code "179" (Set Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) to set course total
modulation % scale factor. At the prompt, enter the new scaling factor.
f. Repeat steps (a) thru (d) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:
Control code "801" (Display Clearance Total Modulation % Scaling Factor)

Control code "800" (Read Clearance Total Modulation %)
Control code "811" (Set Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)
6.2.8.6 1020 Hz Ident Level.-
a. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to set 90/150 Hz tones to OFF. ALARM
LED will illuminate.
b. Enter control code "132" (Set Continuous Ident Tone) to set continuous ident tone.
c. Enter control code "037" (Read Course Ident Level) to read course ident modulation level. Use
"CTRL J" to exit the "037" command.
d. Enter control code "224" (Read Clearance Ident Level) to read clearance ident modulation level. Use
"CTRL J" to exit the "224" command.
e. Enter control code "130" (Set Keying On) to set keying ON.
6.2.8.7 90 Hz Modulation Level.-
a. Turn off the ident modulation and keying by entering control code "131" (Set Keying Off).
b. Set the 150 Hz signal off by entering control code "124" (Set 90 Hz Only Modulation).
c. Read the 90 Hz modulation level by entering control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %).
Use "CTRL J" to exit the "036" command.
d. Read the 90 Hz modulation level by entering control code "800" (Read Clearance Total Modulation
%). Use "CTRL J" to exit the "800" command.

e. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
f. Verify BYPASS and ALARM LEDs extinguish.
6.2.9 Transmitter Frequency Performance Check.- Using the built-in frequency counter, this procedure
verifies that the transmitter frequencies are within allowable limits. Since the frequency counter is not field
adjustable, the second part of this procedure is used to check calibration against an external frequency
counter.
6.2.9.1 Frequency Performance Check Using Internal Frequency Counter.- Test equipment required - None
NOTE
Localizer is removed from service during this test. Notify appropriate air traffic control
e. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to turn 90/150 Hz modulation off. The
ALARM LED will illuminate.
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to turn keying off.
g. Enter control code "080" (Read Course Transmitter Frequency) to read course transmitter frequency.
There is a delay of approximately 20 seconds to complete the reading. Two readings should be taken
to compensate for any frequency counter instability.
h. Enter "CTRL J" to exit frequency counter test.

i. Enter control code "627" (Read Clearance Transmitter Frequency) to read clearance transmitter
frequency. There is a delay of approximately 20 seconds to complete the reading. Two readings
should be taken to compensate for any frequency counter instability.
j. Enter "CTRL J" to exit frequency counter test.
k. Enter control code "132" (Set Continuous Ident Tone) to set the ident tone to continuous.
l. Enter "081" (Read Course Modulation Frequency) to read the course modulation (Ident Tone)
frequency. It may be necessary to increase the ID modulation to 10-15% to get a reading. If so, enter
control code "121" (Set Course ID Modulation %) to set the course ID % modulation. Then use 5
or 9 key to increase ID modulation. After reading the modulation value, restore the modulation
percentage to 8.
m. Enter "647" (Read Clearance Modulation Frequency) to read the course modulation (Ident Tone)
frequency. It may be necessary to increase the ID modulation to 10-15% to get a reading. If so, enter
control code "690" (Set Clearance ID Modulation %) to set the course ID % modulation. Then use
5 or 9 key to increase ID modulation. After reading the modulation value, restore the modulation
percentage to 8.
n. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to remove the ident tone.
o. Enter control code "126" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation On) to turn on the 90/150 modulation.
p. Enter control code "125" (Set 150 Hz Modulation Only) to change modulation to 150 Hz only.
q. Enter control code "081" (Read Course Modulation Frequency) to read the modulation (150 Hz)
frequency.
r. Enter control code "647" (Read Clearance Modulation Frequency) to read the modulation (150 Hz)
frequency.
s. Enter control code "128" (Set Modulation Normal) to set the modulation back to normal.
t. Enter control code "130" (Set Keying On) to set the keying on.
u. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
v. Verify the BYPASS and ALARM LEDs extinguish.

6.2.9.2 Frequency Performance Check Using External Frequency Counter.- Test equipment required -
Frequency counter, wattmeter, 25 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 1 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter
element, 50 dB coupler.
NOTE
e. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to turn 90/150 Hz modulation off. The
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to turn keying off.
g. Insert 50 db coupler into the course CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to coupling.
h. Read and record transmitter frequency. This value can be compared with the internal frequency
counter.
i. Insert 50 db coupler into the clearance CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to
coupling.
j. Read and record transmitter frequency. This value can be compared with the internal frequency
counter.
k. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to turn off the 90/150 Hz modulation.
l. Enter control code "132" (Set Continuous Ident Tone) to set ident tone to continuous.
m. Insert a 25 watt element into the course CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to
element.
n. Read and record ident tone frequency.

o. Insert 25 watt element into the clearance CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to
element.
p. Read and record Ident Tone frequency.
q. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to remove the ident tone.
r. Enter control code "126" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation On) to set 90/150 Hz modulation on.
s. Insert 25 Watt element into the course CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to
element.
t. Read and record Ident Tone frequency.
u. Insert 25 watt element into the clearance CSB wattmeter body and connect frequency counter to
element.
v. Read and record ident tone frequency.
w. Enter control code "128" (Set Modulation Normal) to set modulation back to normal.
x. Enter control code "130" (Set Keying On) to set keying on.
y. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
z. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.2.10 Internal Test Equipment Calibration Checks.- Internal test equipment readings are compared with
measurements taken on external test equipment to establish a reliable baseline. Procedures found in
paragraphs 6.4 (Special Maintenance Procedures) contain the calibration instructions for the localizer
internal test equipment. Perform each procedure and record the results.
6.2.11 Voltage Performance Check.- This section outlines the procedures to be followed in order to verify
the proper operation and calibration of the built-in AC and DC voltmeters.
6.2.11.1 AC Voltmeter Performance Check.- Test equipment required - AC voltmeter.
a. Using an AC voltmeter, measure the AC line voltage.

b. Enter command control code "010" (Read Primary AC Voltage) to read the primary AC voltage.
c. Record both AC voltage measurements. Verify that the internal voltage displayed on the terminal
is within the prescribed tolerance for built-in test equipment as specified in table 4-3. If the voltage
displayed on the video terminal is out of tolerance, follow the procedure detailed in paragraph 6.4.9
to set the AC Voltage Scaling Factor.
6.2.11.2 DC Voltmeter Performance Check.- Test equipment required - DC voltmeter.
a. Connect a DC voltmeter between TP-1 and TP-4 on the Low Voltage Power Supply, 1A10/1A26.
b. Enter command code "011" (Read Primary DC Voltage) to read the primary DC voltage.
c. Record both DC voltage measurements. Verify that the voltage displayed on the digital DC
voltmeter is within the prescribed tolerance for the +28 Vdc parameter as given in table 4-3. If the
voltage displayed on the video terminal is out of tolerance, follow the procedure given in paragraph
6.4.10 to set the DC Voltage Scaling Factor.
6.2.12 Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26) Performance Check.- The following procedures are used
to test the Low Voltage Power Supplies in the equipment cabinet. Test equipment required - DC voltmeter.
a. Place DC voltmeter common lead on 1A10/1A26-TP4.
b. Check voltage at test point 1A10/1A26-TP5. Verify reading is within tolerance listed in table 4-1.B.
If voltage is out of tolerance refer to +28 Vdc Power Supply (1A29/1A30) Output Adjustment
procedure as detailed in paragraph 6.4.26.
c. Check voltage at test point 1A10/1A26-TP2. Verify reading is within tolerance listed in table 4-1.B.
If not, replace Low Voltage Power Supply CCA (1A10/1A26).
d. Check voltage at test point 1A10/1A26-TP3. Verify reading is within tolerance listed in table 4-1.B.
e. Check voltage at test point 1A10/1A26-TP6. Verify reading is within tolerance listed in table 4-1.B.
6.2.13 Battery Performance Check.- There are two versions of the Battery Performance Check. The
procedures listed in paragraph 6.2.13.1 are used when lead-acid battery are installed in the system. The
procedures listed in paragraph 6.2.13.2 are used when gel-cell battery are installed with in the system.
6.2.13.1 Lead-Acid Battery Performance Check.- Test equipment required - None.

a. Enter control code "013" (Read Battery Charge Current). Observe the battery charge current.
NOTE
If the batteries are fully charged, the charging current will be less than 500 mA. If the
batteries have been used recently, the charge current could well be greater than 2.5 A. If the
current is greater than 2.5 A for an extended period of time, it may be an indication of faulty
or defective batteries. Refer to battery manufacturer's specifications for correct readings and
further procedures.
6.2.13.2 Gel-Cell Battery Performance Check.- Test equipment required - None.
a. Place system AC circuit breaker to the OFF position.
b. Verify the localizer continues uninterrupted operation.
c. Leave the AC circuit breaker OFF for 5 minutes.
d. Place system AC circuit breaker to the ON position.
e. Verify Localizer continues normal operation.
6.3 OTHER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.-
6.3.1 Ground Check Procedure.- This procedure requires the use of a Portable ILS Receiver (PIR).
NOTE
To make valid clearance signal ground check measurements, the course transmitter must be
shut down (control code 519) and the CSB and SBO outputs terminated with 50 ohm load.
a. Obtain approval from the appropriate air traffic control personnel to operate on the ILS runway when
required.
b. Measure and record DDM at the edge of course, centerline, and clearance ground check points.
c. Compare the recorded data with the limits established by the reference ground check.
d. Verify recorded data is within normal operating parameters.
e. Remove any dummy loads from the clearance transmitter outputs and turn on the course transmitter
(control code 518) after making the clearance measurements.

6.3.2 Transmission Line Insulation Resistance Check Procedure.- Test equipment required - 500 volt
Megger.
NOTE
a. Place Localizer system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
b. Disconnect coax from the output of each wattmeter body output in the TCU. These are the cables
which pass through the shelter wall.
c. Disconnect foam flex transmission line from distribution unit.
d. Connect insulation tester between center conductor and shield of cable.
e. Record the insulation resistance. Compare with applicable tolerance and previous measurements.
NOTE
If any transmission line measures less than infinite resistance, especially new lines or those
that previously have measured infinity, consider corrective action even though the
measurement is within prescribed tolerances.
f. Connect the insulation tester between the shield of the cable and a good earth ground.
g. Measure the insulation resistance and record it for reference.
h. Restore the cable and facility to normal.
6.3.3 Sideband Null Check.- A facility shutdown is required for this check. Notify the appropriate air
traffic control personnel. Test equipment required - Portable ILS Receiver.
NOTE
When doing alignment (null) measurements on the runway, only one transmitter at a time
(course or clearance) shall be operational. The other transmitter should be shut down with
the appropriate control codes and dummy loads connected to the CSB and SBO outputs.
This insures that the PIR measurements on the runway centerline will be valid.
a. Feed the carrier, modulated by a continuous 1020 Hz tone, into the sideband input to the antenna
array.

b. Position the PIR on course centerline. The distance to the array should be as far as possible while
still maintaining a sharp null indication. Use a directional antenna if available.
c. Locate the RF null as indicated by minimum audio or RF level from the PIR.
d. Measure null displacement from course centerline.
e. Divide the measured displacement, in inches, by the distance to the array, in 1000's of feet. For
example, the sideband null is measured 1500 feet from the array and found at 17 inches from course
centerline.
17 inches = 11.33 inches per 1000 feet

1.5
f. Record the results.
g. To determine if site effects are compromising the measurement, repeat steps (b) thru (f) at alternate
distances.
h. Restore facility to normal.
6.4 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.-
6.4.1 Calibration Checks of Internal Test Equipment.- The internal test equipment provides an accurate
method of reading the facility's parameters both locally and remotely. These readings, however, should be
compared and recorded relative to the external test equipment on a yearly basis. The following procedures
assume that the facility is operating normally and that a video terminal is connected to the system. Perform
the indicated tests on both transmitter A and transmitter B. Make sure that the station under test is ON-LINE
while the tests are performed.
6.4.2 RF Power Readings Calibration.- The capture-effect localizer contains an internal wattmeter capable
of reading forward and reflected powers and computing VSWR. Test equipment required - Wattmeter, 25
watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 1 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 100 milliwatt, 100-250
MHz wattmeter element.
NOTE
The following procedures require a facility shutdown notice be given to the appropriate air
traffic control personnel.

e. Enter control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) to read the course CSB forward power.
Record the power reading. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "020" command.
f. Insert an appropriate wattmeter element in the wattmeter. Read and record the wattmeter forward
power.
g. Ensure that the internal and external readings agree within the tolerances listed in table 4-1 and 4-3.
If the internal reading is out of tolerance, follow the procedure in paragraph 6.4.15 to set the CSB
Forward Power Scale Factor.
h. Enter control code "021" (Read Course CSB Reflected Power) to read the course CSB reflected
power. Record the reflected power reading. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "021" command.
i. Insert an appropriate element in the wattmeter to read the course CSB reflected power. Record the
course CSB reflected power.
j. Ensure that the internal and external readings agree with the prescribed tolerances of Section 4. If
the internal reading is out of tolerance, follow the procedures in paragraph 6.4.16 to set the CSB
Reflected Power Offset and the CSB Reflected Power Scaling Factor.
k. Compute the course CSB VSWR using the following formula:
Forward Power % Reflected Power

VSWR '
Forward Power & Reflected Power
l. Record the computed VSWR.
m. Enter control code "038" (Read Course CSB VSWR) to read the course CSB VSWR. Record the
VSWR and ensure that the readings compare within the prescribed tolerances of Section 4.
n. Enter control code "022" (Read Course SBO Forward Power) to read the course SBO forward power.
Record the course SBO forward power. Use "CTRL J" to exit "022" command.
o. Insert an appropriate element in the wattmeter and record the forward course SBO power.

p. Ensure that the power readings are within the tolerance listed in tables 4-1 and 4-3. If the internal
reading is out of tolerance, follow the procedure in paragraph 6.4.17 to set the SBO Forward Power
Scaling Factor.
q. Enter control code "023" (Read Course SBO Reflected Power) to read the course SBO reflected
power. Record the course SBO reflected power. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "023" command.
r. Insert an appropriate size element in the wattmeter and record the reflected course SBO power.
s. Ensure that the comparison between the powers is within the prescribed limits of tables 4-1 and 4-3.
If the internal reading is out of tolerance, follow the procedures in paragraph 6.4.18 to set the SBO
Reflected Power Offset and the SBO Reflected Power Scaling Factor.
t. Enter control code "039" (Read Course SBO VSWR) to read the course SBO VSWR. Record the
SBO VSWR. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "039" command.
u. Compute the VSWR using the formula of step (k) above.
v. Record the computed VSWR and ensure that the readings compare within the prescribed tolerances
listed in table 4-3.
w. Repeat steps (e) thru (v) for the clearance transmitter by substituting the following control codes for
those above:
Control code "260" (Read Clearance CSB Forward Power)

Control code "261" (Read Clearance CSB Reflected Power)
Control code "262" (Read Clearance CSB VSWR)
Control code "263" (Read Clearance SBO Forward Power)
Control code "264" (Read Clearance SBO Reflected Power)
Control code "740" (Read Clearance SBO VSWR)
x. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
y. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.

6.4.3 Frequency Counter.- The built-in frequency counter is used to remotely read the RF output frequency,
the audio frequencies and the keyer-dot length. The following procedures assumes that the facility is
operating normally and that a video terminal is connected to the local port. For dual localizer installations,
perform the indicated tests on both transmitter A and transmitter B. The frequency counter function is not
field adjustable. This procedure allows for the calibration of the built-in frequency counter to be checked
against an external frequency counter. Test equipment required - Frequency counter, RF coupler (sniffer).
NOTE
The facility is removed from service during this procedure. Notify the appropriate air traffic
control personnel.
e. Enter control code "127" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation Off) to set the 90/150 Hz modulation off. The
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to set the keying off.
g. Insert an RF coupler in the course CSB wattmeter body and connect to the frequency counter.
h. Read the RF frequency using the frequency counter. Record the RF frequency.
i. Enter control code "080" (Read Course Transmitter Frequency) to read the RF frequency.
Approximately 20 seconds are required for this reading and at least two readings should be taken to
allow the counter to stabilize.
j. Record internal frequency and counter frequency and ensure that the two frequencies compare within
the prescribed tolerances listed in tables 4-1 and 4-3.
k. Remove the RF sniffer from the course CSB wattmeter body and insert an appropriate size element.
Attach the frequency counter to the detected port on the wattmeter element.
l. Enter control code "132" (Set Continuous Ident Tone) to set the ID tone to continuous operation.
m. Read and record the ID tone frequency displayed on the frequency counter.
n. Enter control code "081" (Read Course Modulation Frequency) to read the ID tone frequency.

NOTE
It may be necessary to increase ID modulation to read this tone. If so, enter control code
"121" (Set Course ID % Modulation) and, using the 5 or 9 keys, increase modulation to
approximately 10% to 15%. Set the modulation back to normal (approximately 8%) after
the tone frequency has been determined. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "121" command.
o. Record the internal frequency counter reading and compare it with the value recorded in step m. to
ensure that the two frequency counter readings compare within the prescribed tolerances listed in
tables 4-1 and 4-3. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "081" command.
p. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to remove the ID tone.
q. Enter control code "126" (Set 90/150 Hz Modulation On) to reapply the 90/150 Hz modulation.
r. Enter control code "125" (Set 150 Hz Only Modulation) to set the modulation to 150 Hz only.
s. Read and record the modulation frequency displayed on the frequency counter.
t. Enter control code "081" (Read Course Modulation Frequency) to read the modulation frequency.
u. Record the internal frequency counter reading and compare it with that of the external counter and
ensure that the frequencies agree within the prescribed tolerances listed in tables 4-1 and 4-3.
v. Repeat steps (e) thru (u) for the Clearance transmitter by substituting the following control codes for
those above:
Control code "627" (Read Clearance Transmitter Frequency)

Control code "647" (Read Clearance Modulation Frequency)
Control code "690" (Set Clearance ID % Modulation)
Control code "647" (Read Clearance Modulation Frequency)
w. Enter control code "128" (Set Modulation Normal) to set the modulation to normal.
x. Enter control code "130" (Set Keying On) to set the ID keying to normal. The ALARM LED will
extinguish.
y. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
z. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.

6.4.4 Modulation Percentage.- The localizer transmitter contains an internal modulation meter. This meter
is calibrated to read the correct modulation using the following procedure. This procedure assumes that the
facility is operating normally and that a video terminal is attached locally. Perform the indicated tests on
both transmitter A and transmitter B. Test Equipment required - Oscilloscope, RF coupler (sniffer).
NOTE
The following procedure removes the facility from service. Notify the appropriate air traffic
control personnel prior to performing the procedure.
e. Enter control code "125" (Set 150 Hz Only) to set the 150 Hz modulation only. The ALARM LED
will illuminate.
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) on the terminal to remove the ID.
g. Insert an RF sniffer in the course CSB wattmeter body.
h. Connect the RF sniffer to an oscilloscope with a bandwidth of at least 125 MHz.
i. Observe the modulation envelope on the oscilloscope and compute the modulation percentage using
% Mod = (Emax - Emin) * 100%

Emax + Emin
k. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) to read the modulation percentage.
Record the modulation percentage.
l. Compare the modulation percentages and determine that the levels are within the prescribed
tolerances of table 4-1.

m. If the modulation percentage reading does not agree with the external computation, utilize the
following steps to calibrate the reading:
n. Enter control code "199" (Display Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) to display the Total
Modulation % Scale Factor.
o. Compute the new modulation scale factor using the following formula:
New Mod Scale = External Mod * Current Scale Factor

Internal Mod
p. Enter control code "179" (Set Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor). This will cause a ">"
prompt sign to be displayed. Enter the new modulation scale factor as an integer number.
q. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) and ensure that the reading is within
the prescribed tolerance listed in table 4-3.
r. Repeat steps (e) thru (q) for the clearance transmitter by substituting the following control codes for
those above:

Control code "801" (Display Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.5 DME Alarm Status Operation.- The localizer has the capability to monitor a DME located in the same
shelter. If the DME fails, its alarm status voltage will go LOW indicating an alarm. The localizer will then
enter an executive alarm state and dial the remote maintenance monitor to report the DME failure.
It is necessary to determine the voltage levels of the DME for normal and alarm modes. The user may then
enter an appropriate alarm reference into the localizer from the terminal. If a DME is not collocated with
the Localizer, the DME Alarm Status Reference must to be set to a value less than zero to prevent the
Localizer from alarming. Paragraph 6.4.5.1 details the procedure for setting the DME Alarm Status Voltage
at Localizer/DME collated sites. Paragraph 6.4.5.2 details the procedure for setting the DME Alarm Status
Voltage at Localizer only sites.

6.4.5.1 Setting DME Alarm Status Voltage for DME/Localizer Sites.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "063" (Set DME Status Alarm Point).
f. Set the DME Alarm Status reference in hundredths after the prompt (>) appears (055 = 0.55).
g. Enter control code "066" to display the DME alarm status voltage.
h. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
i. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.5.2 Setting DME Alarm Status Voltage for Localizer Only Sites.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "063" (Set DME Status Alarm Point). When the prompt (>) appears, enter
"64536". This sets the reference to -10.0 (65536 - (10 volts * 100) = 64536).
f. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of

LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
g. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.6 Localizer Shelter Temperature Sensor Operation.- The localizer is capable of monitoring shelter
temperature. If the localizer is equipped with a temperature sensor (located on the bottom of the equipment
cabinet or on the side of the Transfer Control Unit) and the shelter temperature is not within the range
defined by the high and low temperature reference previously entered, the system will enter an executive
alarm state and dial the remote maintenance monitor to report the fault.
If a temperature sensor is not utilized, it is necessary to set the shelter temperature scale factors to zero. This
will hold the shelter temperature reading at a constant 0.0 degrees C and prevent erroneous alarms. Refer
to paragraph 6.4.6.1 for setting the shelter temperature scaling factor for systems that do not utilize a
temperature sensor. Refer to paragraph 6.4.6.2 for setting the shelter temperature scaling factor for systems
that have a temperature sensor installed.
6.4.6.1 Setting Shelter Temperature Scaling Factors for Systems Without Temperature Sensors.- Test
equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "178" (Set Shelter Temperature Scale Factor). When the prompt (>) appears,
enter 0.
f. Enter control code "198" (Display Shelter Temperature Scale Factor) to read the shelter temperature
scale factor. Verify scaling factor is set to 0.
g. Enter control code "025" (Read Shelter Temperature) to read the shelter temperature. Verify the
shelter temperature reads 0.
LEAVING BYPASS

RESTART
i. Verify BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.6.2 Setting the Shelter Temperature Scaling Factor for Systems With Temperature Sensors.- Test
equipment required - Thermometer.
e. Enter control code "178" (Set Shelter Temperature Scale Factor). When the prompt (>) appears,
enter 2048.
f. Enter control code "198" (Display Shelter Temperature Scale Factor) to read the shelter temperature
scale factor.
g. Measure the shelter temperature using a thermometer.
h. Enter control code "025" (Read Shelter Temperature) to read the internal shelter temperature.
Compute the new scaling factor using the following formula:
New Scaling Factor = (External Shelter Temperature/Internal Shelter Temperature) * 2048
i. Enter control code "178" (Set Shelter Temperature Scale Factor) and set the Shelter Temperature
scaling factor to the value calculated in step (h).
j. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
k. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.

6.4.7 Replacing Microprocessor CCA (1A12).- When replacing the microprocessor CCA, it is necessary
to set the SYSTEM TYPE into the microprocessor so that it can identify what type of system it is
controlling. Once the microprocessor is replaced it is necessary to recalibrate the transmitter's parameters.
It is also necessary to configure the microprocessor CCA's for MAIN or STANDBY transmitter operation.
Test equipment required - None.
6.4.7.1 Configuring Microprocessor CCA's for Main or Standby Operation.- The Microprocessor CCAs
used in the dual capture-effect localizer systems are programmed for Main transmitter and Standby
transmitter operation. This allows the system to recognize which transmitter will become active when power
is applied to the system. If it becomes necessary to replace a Microprocessor CCA, the Microprocessor
CCAs must be reconfigured for correct designation of MAIN transmitter and STANDBY transmitter
operation. In the following procedures, quotation marks (" ") are used to aid clarity and are NOT to be used
when typing commands into the terminal. The underline (_) is used indicate a spacebar entry and is NOT
used when typing commands into the video terminal.
NOTE
This procedure causes a station shutdown and must have prior approval by the appropriate
a. Place the AC and DC power circuit breakers, on the transmitter with the replacement Microprocessor
CCA (1A12), to the OFF position. Remove Power Amplifier Assemblies.
b. Refer to figure 6-1. Remove the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) from the cabinet assembly.
c. Refer to figure 6-2. Remove the jumper from terminals E3 - E4.
d. Re-install the Microprocessor CCA (1A12).
h. Place the CONTROL SELECT LOCAL/REMOTE Switch to the LOCAL position.
i. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position. System will come up in FORTH
Terminal Mode.


Figure 6-2. Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Component Location Diagram.
j. On the video terminal, type "1_EQUIP.NR_WRPROM" or "2_EQUIP.NR_WRPROM" and press

ENTER. The statement 1 EQUIP.NR WRPROM configures the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) as
the microprocessor for the MAIN transmitter. The statement 2 EQUIP.NR WRPROM configures
the Microprocessor CCA (1A12) as the microprocessor for the STANDBY transmitter. Use the
appropriate statement for the applicable transmitter.
k. Place the AC and DC power circuit breakers, on the transmitter with the replacement Microprocessor
CCA (1A12), to the OFF position. Remove Power Amplifier Assemblies.
l. Remove Microprocessor CCA (1A12) from the cabinet assembly.
m. Re-install the jumper between terminals E3 - E4.
n. Re-install Microprocessor CCA (1A12).
o. Place the CONTROL SELECT LOCAL/REMOTE Switch to the REMOTE position.
p. Configure the Microprocessor CCAs for system type per paragraph 6.4.7.2.

6.4.7.2 Configuring Microprocessor CCA's for System Type.- When installing a microprocessor CCA in
a system, it is necessary to tell the microprocessor what type of system it is controlling. This CCA is used
in both the localizer and glideslope station. Before installing and programming the CCA, it is necessary to
remove the power amplifier module from the cabinet because the localizer and glideslope have widely
different power levels and modulation percentages. After programming the CCA, set the CSB and SBO
output levels to zero before re-installing the power amplifier. Test equipment required - None.
There are five system types that use the same basic microprocessor CCA. The system type is identified in
the SYSTEM TYPE message when command code 009 is executed. The system type is identified by
numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. The following explains the numbering scheme:
Type 0 = All localizer stations.

Type 1 = A glideslope station with one path monitor and one width monitor.
Type 2 = A glideslope station with one path monitor, one width monitor, and one near field
path monitor.
Type 3 = A glideslope station with one path monitor, one width monitor, one near field path
monitor, and one additional width monitor.
Type 4 = A glideslope station with one path monitor and two additional width monitors.
a. Place the system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
b. Remove the Power Amplifier Assembly (ies) (1A7/1A23).
c. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
d. Enter facility password.
e. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed if the correct password is entered.
f. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
g. Enter facility security code. System will respond with "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message.
h. Verify the ALARM LED illuminates. This is due to the removal of the Power Amplifier
Assembly(ies).
i. Enter "5432". The station terminal response will be TERMINAL MODE FORTH-65V 4.0 and the
station will shut down.
j. Enter "DECIMAL". The station terminal will respond OK. The station is now in the FORTH mode
of operation.

NOTE
hexadecimal.
k. Enter the proper type number as follows: "0_SYS.TYPE_WRPROM". Example: "0 SYS.TYPE
WRPROM".
l. To check the entry before exiting FORTH, enter "SYS.TYPE_@_.".
NOTE
Before proceeding, read the following procedures. After the station is restarted, it will go
into alarm and then shutdown, so the following must be done in as short a time as possible
or the station will shut down before master bypass is obtained.
m. Upon verifying that the appropriate system type was entered, return the station to normal operation
by exiting FORTH. Enter "LOCGS.CONTROL". The station terminal response will be MAIN
LOOP ENTRY and a station restart.
n. Enter facility password.
o. "PASSWORD RECOGNIZED" is displayed if the correct password is entered.
p. Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
q. Enter facility security code. System will respond with "ENTERING MASTER BYPASS" message.
r. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) and set the CSB to zero.
s. Enter control code "102" (Set Clearance CSB/SBO Power Output) and set the CSB to zero.
t. Enter control code "101" (Set Course SBO Only Power Output) and set the SBO to zero.
u. Enter control code "103" (Set Clearance SBO Only Power Output) and set the SBO to zero.
v. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
w. Re-install the Power Amplifier Assembly.

NOTE
All station operating parameters, i.e., alarm limits, power levels, scaling, telephone numbers,
security codes, etc., must be re-entered whenever the Microprocessor CCA is changed.
x. Set the station operating parameters as detailed in paragraph 9.7.18.
6.4.8 Setting the CSB Modulation Scale Factor.- Test equipment required - RF coupler (sniffer),
oscilloscope, wattmeter.
e. Enter control code "199" (Read Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) to read the modulation
scale factor.
f. Enter control code "131" (Set Keying Off) to remove the ident tone.
g. Insert RF sniffer in the course CSB wattmeter body.
h. Connect oscilloscope to the RF sniffer.

Emax + Emin
k. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) to read internal modulation percentage.
Record this value. Use "CTRL J" to exit "036" command.
l. Compute the new modulation scale factor using the following formula:
New Mod Scale = External Mod * Current Scale Factor

Internal Mod

m. Enter control code "179" (Set Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor). This will cause a ">"
prompt sign to be displayed. Enter the new modulation scale factor as an integer number.
n. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %).
o. Repeat steps (e) thru (n) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:
Control code "801" (Read Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)

p. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
q. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.9 Setting the AC Voltage Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - AC voltmeter.
e. Enter control code "163" (Set AC Voltage Scale Factor) and set the AC voltage scaling factor to
2048.
f. Enter control code "183" (Display AC Voltage Scale Factor). Verify that the AC voltage scaling
factor is set to 2048.
g. Measure the AC line voltage using an external AC voltmeter.
h. Enter control code "010" (Read Primary AC Voltage) to read the internal primary AC voltage.

New Scaling Factor = (External AC Voltage/Internal AC Voltage) * 2048
i. Enter control code "163" (Set AC Voltage Scale Factor) and set the AC voltage scaling factor to the
value calculated in step (h).
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.10 Setting the DC Voltage Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - DC voltmeter.
e. Enter control code "164" (Set DC Voltage Scale Factor) and set the DC voltage scaling factor to
2048.
f. Enter control code "184" (Display DC Voltage Scale Factor). Verify that the DC voltage scaling
g. Measure the DC voltage on TP1 of Low Voltage Power Supply (1A10) using an external DC
voltmeter.
h. Enter control code "011" (Read Primary DC Voltage) to read the internal primary DC voltage.
New Scaling Factor = (External DC Voltage/Internal DC Voltage) * 2048
i. Enter control code "163" (Set DC Voltage Scale Factor) and set the DC voltage scaling factor to the
value calculated in step (h).

LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.11 Setting the Primary DC Current Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - DC voltmeter.
e. Enter control code "165" (Set Primary DC Current Scale Factor) and set the Primary DC Current
scaling factor to 2048.
f. Enter control code "185" (Display DC Voltage Scale Factor). Verify that the DC voltage scaling
g. Measure the primary DC current by measuring the voltage across R2 on the Power Panel Assembly
using an external voltmeter and dividing by the value of R2 (.05 ohms).
h. Enter control code "012" (Read Primary DC Current) to read the internal primary DC current.
New Scaling Factor = (External DC Current/Internal DC Current) * 2048
i. Enter control code "165" (Set Primary DC Current Scale Factor) and set the primary DC current
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART

6.4.12 Setting the Power Amplifier (PA) DC Current Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - DC
voltmeter.
e. Enter control code "166" (Set Course PA DC Current Scale Factor) and set the course PA DC current
f. Enter control code "186" (Display Course PA DC Current Scale Factor). Verify that the course PA
DC current scaling factor is set to 2048.
g. Measure the Power Amplifier current by measuring the voltage across R1 on the Modulator
Assembly (1A5A1/1A5A2) and dividing by the value of R1 (.05 ohms).
h. Enter control code "024" (Read Course PA Current) to read the internal course PA current. Compute
the new scaling factor using the following formula:
New Scaling Factor = (External PA DC Current/Internal PA DC Current) * 2048
i. Enter control code "166" (Set Course PA DC Current Scale Factor) and set the Course PA DC
current scaling factor to the value calculated in step (h).
j. Repeat steps (e) thru (i) for the clearance transmitter by substituting the following control codes for
those above:
Control code "771" (Set Clearance PA DC Current Scale Factor)

Control code "761" (Display Clearance PA DC Current Scale Factor)
Control code "760" (Read Clearance PA Current)
Control code "771" (Set Clearance PA DC Current Scale Factor)
k. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS

RESTART
l. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.13 Setting Battery Current Offset.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "167" (Set Battery Charge Current Offset) and set the battery charge current offset
to 0.
f. Disengage the battery back-up circuit breaker. If battery back-up does not have a circuit breaker
installed, disconnect the battery back-up from the localizer system.
g. Enter control code "013" (Read Battery Charge Current) to read the internal battery charge current.
h. Enter control code "167" (Set Battery Charge Current Offset) set the battery charge current offset to
the value obtained in step (g). This will force the internal battery current reading to zero.
i. Enter control code "013" (Read Battery Charge Current) to read the internal battery charge current.
Verify the battery charge current now indicates 0.
j. Enter control code "187" (Display Battery Charge Current Offset) to display the battery current
offset.
k. Engage the battery back-up circuit breaker or re-connect the battery back-up, as applicable, to the
localizer system.
l. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
m. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.

6.4.14 Setting the Battery Charge Current Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - Amp meter or DC
voltmeter.
e. Enter control code "168" (Set Battery Charge Current Scale Factor) and set the battery charge current
f. Enter control code "188" (Display Battery Charge Current Scale Factor). Verify that the battery
charge current scaling factor is set to 2048.
g. Measure the battery charge current with an external amp meter in series with the batteries, or connect
a suitable resistive load in place of the batteries and measure the voltage across load, computing the
battery charge current by dividing the voltage measured across the load by load resistance.
h. Enter control code "013" (Read Battery Charge Current) to read the internal battery charge current.
New Scaling Factor = (External Battery Charge Current/Internal Battery Charge Current) * 2048
i. Enter control code "168" (Set Battery Charge Current Scale Factor) and set the battery charge current
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.15 Setting the CSB Forward Power Scale Factor and Offset.- This procedure assumes that CSB and
SBO wattmeter bodies are installed in the system. Test equipment required - Wattmeter, 25 watt, 100-250
MHz wattmeter element

NOTE
This procedure requires that the equipment be removed from service. Notify appropriate air traffic
control personnel in accordance with local procedures before performing this calibration.
a. Enter the facility password.
e. Enter control code "169" (Set Course CSB Forward Power Scale Factor) and set the course CSB
forward power scale factor to 2048.
f. Enter control code "189" (Display Course CSB Forward Power Scale Factor). Verify that the course
CSB forward power scale factor is set to 2048.
g. Enter control code "253" (Set Course CSB Forward Power Offset) and set the course CSB forward
power offset to 0.
h. Enter control code "243" (Display Course CSB Forward Power Offset). Verify that the course CSB
forward power offset is set to 0.
i. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the course CSB forward power.
If the course CSB forward power is not 15 watts, enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO
Power Output) and set the course CSB forward power to 15 watts. Record this value. Enter "CTRL
J" to exit the "100" command.
j. Enter control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) to read the internal course CSB
forward power. Record this value. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "020" command.
k. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) and set the course CSB forward
power to 7.5 watts, as measured by an external wattmeter and the appropriate element. Record this
value. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "100" command.
l. Enter control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) to read the internal course CSB
m. Compute the new scale factor using the following formula:

Set Hi & Set low

Scale Factor ' × 2048
Read Hi & Read Low
where: Set Hi is the external reading at 15 watts.

Set Lo is the external reading at 7.5 watts.
Read Hi is the internal reading at 15 watts.
Read Lo is the internal reading at 7.5 watts.
n. Compute the new offset using the following formula:
Scale Factor
Offset ' [ Set Hi & ( Read Hi × ) ] × 1000
2048
where: Set Hi is the external reading at 15 watts.

Read Hi is the internal reading at 15 watts.
Scale Factor is the value calculated in step (m).
o. Enter control code "169" (Set Course CSB Forward Power Scale Factor) and set the course CSB
forward power scale factor to the value calculated in step (m).
p. Enter control code "253" (Set Course CSB Forward Power Offset) and set the course CSB forward
power offset to the value calculated in step (n).
q. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) and set the course CSB forward
power to 15 watts, or as site requirements dictate. Enter "CTRL J" to exit "100" command.
r. Repeat (e). thru (q) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:
"250" (Set Clearance CSB Forward Power Scale Factor)

"240" (Display Clearance CSB Forward Power Scale Factor)
"612" (Set Clearance CSB Forward Power Offset)
"602" (Display Clearance CSB Forward Power Offset)
"102" (Set Clearance CSB/SBO Power Output)
"260" (Read Clearance CSB Forward Power)
"250" (Set Clearance CSB Forward Power Scale Factor)
"612" (Set Clearance CSB Forward Power Offset)

LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.16 Setting the CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor and Offset.- This procedure assumes that CSB and
SBO wattmeter bodies are installed in the system. Test equipment required - Two 25 watt, 50 ohm
terminators, 3dB attenuator, 6dB attenuator, wattmeter, 25 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 1 watt,
100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 100 milliwatt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element.
NOTE
e. Enter control code "111" (Set Course CSB RF Off) to turn off the course CSB RF output.
f. Disconnect the course CSB load from the transmitter and replace it with a tee connection terminated
with two 50 ohm loads.
g. Enter control code "110" (Set Course CSB RF On) to turn on the course CSB RF output.
h. Enter control code "171" (Set Course CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor) and set the course CSB
reflected power scale factor to 2048.
i. Enter control code "191" (Display Course CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor). Verify that the
course CSB reflected power scale factor is set to 2048.
j. Enter control code "170" (Set Course CSB Reflected Power Offset) and set the course CSB reflected
power offset to 0.

k. Enter control code "190" (Display Course CSB Reflected Power Offset). Verify that the course CSB
reflected power offset is set to 0.
l. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the CSB reflected power. Record
this value.
m. Enter control code "021" (Read Course CSB Reflected Power) to read the internal course CSB
reflected power. Record this value. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "021" command.
n. Enter control code "111" (Set Course CSB RF Off) to turn off the course CSB RF output.
o. Disconnect the course CSB load from the transmitter and replace it with the 6 dB and 3 dB
attenuators, unterminated.
p. Enter control code "110" (Set Course CSB RF On) to turn on the course CSB RF output.
q. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the course CSB reflected power.
Record this value.
r. Enter control code "021" (Read Course CSB Reflected Power) to read the internal course CSB
s. Compute the new scale factor using the following formula:

Set Hi & Set low
Read Hi & Read Low
where: Set Hi is the external reading with the 25 ohm load.

Set Lo is the external reading with the 25 ohm load.
Read Hi is the internal reading the 9dB load.
Read Lo is the internal reading the 9dB load.
t. Compute the new offset using the following formula:
Scale Factor
2048

Read Hi is the internal reading with the 25 ohm load.
Scale Factor is the value calculated in step (s).
u. Enter control code "171" (Set Course CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor) and set the course CSB
reflected power scale factor to the value calculated in step (s).

v. Enter control code "170" (Set Course CSB Reflected Power Offset) and set the course CSB reflected
power offset to the value calculated in step (t).
w. Enter control code "111" (Set Course CSB RF Off) to turn off the course CSB RF output.
x. Disconnect the load from the transmitter and restore the course CSB RF output cable.
y. Enter control code "110" (Set Course CSB RF On) to turn on the course CSB RF output.
z. Repeat steps (e) thru (y) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes.
"619" (Set Clearance CSB RF Off)

"618" (Set Clearance CSB RF On)
"251" (Set Clearance CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"241" (Display Clearance CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"252" (Set Clearance CSB Reflected Power Offset)
"242" (Display Clearance CSB Reflected Power Offset)
"261" (Read Clearance CSB Reflected Power)
"261" (Read Clearance CSB Reflected Power)
"251" (Set Clearance CSB Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"252" (Set Clearance CSB Reflected Power Offset)
aa. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
ab. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.17 Setting the SBO Forward Power Scale Factor and Offset.- This procedure assumes that CSB and
SBO wattmeter bodies are installed in the system. Test equipment required - Wattmeter, 1 watt, 100-250
MHz wattmeter element, 100 milliwatt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element.
NOTE

e. Enter control code "172" (Set Course SBO Forward Power Scale Factor) and set the course SBO
forward power scale factor to 2048.
f. Enter control code "192" (Display Course SBO Forward Power Scale Factor). Verify that the course
SBO forward power scale factor is set to 2048.
g. Enter control code "177" (Set Course SBO Forward Power Offset) and set the course SBO forward
power offset to 0.
h. Enter control code "197" (Display Course SBO Forward Power Offset). Verify that the course SBO
forward power offset is set to 0.
i. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the course SBO forward power
at its normal operating level. Record this value.
j. Enter control code "022" (Read Course SBO Forward Power) to read the internal course SBO
k. Enter control code "101" (Set Course SBO Only Power Output) and lower the course SBO forward
power to the level that produces a wide DDM alarm. This value is site dependant. Using an external
wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the course SBO forward power. Record this value.
Enter "CTRL-J" to exit the "101" command.
l. Enter control code "022" (Read Course SBO Forward Power) to read the internal course SBO
forward power. Record this value. Enter "CTRL-J" to exit the "020" command.
m. Compute the new scale factor using the following formula:

Set Hi & Set low
Read Hi & Read Low
where: Set Hi is the external reading at normal power level.

Set Lo is the external reading at wide DDM power level.
Read Hi is the internal reading at normal power level.
Read Lo is the internal reading at wide DDM power level.

n. Compute the new offset using the following formula:
Scale Factor
2048
where: Set Hi is the external reading at normal power level.

Read Hi is the internal reading at normal power level.
Scale Factor is the value calculated in step (m).
o. Enter control code "172" (Set Course SBO Forward Power Scale Factor) and set the course SBO
forward power scale factor to the value calculated in step (m).
p. Enter control code "177" (Set Course SBO Forward Power Offset) and set the course SBO forward
power offset to the value calculated in step (n).
q. Enter control code "101" (Set Course SBO Only Power Output) and reset the course SBO forward
power as site requirements dictate. Enter "CTRL J" to exit the "101" command.
r. Repeat steps (e) thru (q) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:
"711" (Set Clearance SBO Forward Power Scale Factor)

"701" (Display Clearance SBO Forward Power Scale Factor)
"712" (Set Clearance SBO Forward Power Offset)
"702" (Display Clearance SBO Forward Power Offset)
"263" (Read Clearance SBO Forward Power)
"103" (Set Clearance SBO Only Power Output)
"711" (Set Clearance SBO Forward Power Scale Factor)
"712" (Set Clearance SBO Forward Power Offset)
"103" (Set Clearance SBO Only Power Output)
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART

6.4.18 Setting the SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor and Offset.- This procedure assumes that CSB and
SBO wattmeter bodies are installed in the system. Test equipment required - Two 25 watt, 50 ohm
terminators, 3dB attenuator, 6dB attenuator, wattmeter, 25 watt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 1 watt,
100-250 MHz wattmeter element, 100 milliwatt, 100-250 MHz wattmeter element.
NOTE
e. Enter control code "115" (Set Course SBO RF Off) to turn off the course SBO RF output.
f. Disconnect the course SBO load from the transmitter and replace it with a tee connection terminated
with two 50 ohm loads.
g. Enter control code "114" (Set Course SBO RF On) to turn on the course SBO RF output.
h. Enter control code "174" (Set Course SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor) and set the course SBO
reflected power scale factor to 2048.
i. Enter control code "194" (Display Course SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor). Verify that the
course SBO reflected power scale factor is set to 2048.
j. Enter control code "173" (Set Course SBO Reflected Power Offset) and set the course SBO reflected
power offset to 0.
k. Enter control code "193" (Display Course SBO Reflected Power Offset). Verify that the course SBO
reflected power offset is set to 0.
l. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the course SBO reflected power.
Record this value.
m. Enter control code "023" (Read Course SBO Reflected Power) to read the internal course SBO

n. Enter control code "115" (Set Course SBO RF Off) to turn off the course SBO RF output.
o. Disconnect the course SBO load from the transmitter and replace it with the 6 dB and 3 dB
attenuators, unterminated.
p. Enter control code "114" (Set Course SBO RF On) to turn on the course SBO RF output.
q. Using an external wattmeter and the appropriate element, measure the SBO reflected power. Record
this value.
r. Enter control code "023" (Read Course SBO Reflected Power) to read the internal course SBO
s. Compute the new scale factor using the following formula:

Set Hi & Set low
Read Hi & Read Low
Set Lo is the external reading with the 25 ohm load.
Read Hi is the internal reading the 9dB load.
Read Lo is the internal reading the 9dB load.
t. Compute the new offset using the following formula:
Scale Factor
2048

Read Hi is the internal reading with the 25 ohm load.
Scale Factor is the value calculated in step (s).
u. Enter control code "174" (Set Course SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor) and set the course SBO
reflected power scale factor to the value calculated in step (s).
v. Enter control code "173" (Set Course SBO Reflected Power Offset) and set the course SBO reflected
power offset to the value calculated in step (t).
w. Enter control code "115" (Set Course SBO RF Off) to turn off the course SBO RF output.
x. Disconnect the load from the transmitter and restore the course SBO RF output cable.
y. Enter control code "114" (Set Course SBO RF On) to turn on the course SBO RF output.
z. Repeat steps (e) thru (y) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:

"109" (Set Clearance SBO RF Off)

"108" (Set Clearance SBO RF On)
"254" (Set Clearance SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"244" (Display Clearance SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"255" (Set Clearance SBO Reflected Power Offset)
"245" (Display Clearance SBO Reflected Power Offset)
"264" (Read Clearance SBO Reflected Power)
"264" (Read Clearance SBO Reflected Power)
"254" (Set Clearance SBO Reflected Power Scale Factor)
"255" (Set Clearance SBO Reflected Power Offset)
aa. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
ab. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.19 Setting the Total Modulation % Scaling Factor.- Test equipment required - Modulation Meter or
Oscilloscope.
e. Enter control code "179" (Set Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) and set the course total
modulation % scaling factor to 2048.
f. Enter control code "199" (Display Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor). Verify that the course
total modulation % scaling factor is set to 2048.
g. Externally measure the course total modulation % using a modulation meter in the CSB line or using
an oscilloscope on 1A7/1A23-TP2 of the Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7/1A23).

h. Enter control code "036" (Read Course Total Modulation %) to read the internal course total
modulation %. Compute the new scaling factor using the following formula:
New Scaling Factor = (External Course Total Modulation %/Internal Course Total Modulation %)
* 2048
i. Enter control code "179" (Set Course Total Modulation % Scale Factor) and set the course total
modulation % scaling factor to the value calculated in step (h).
j. Repeat steps (e) thru (i) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes.
"811" (Set Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)

"801" (Display Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)
"800" (Read Clearance Total Modulation %)
"811" (Set Clearance Total Modulation % Scale Factor)
k. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
l. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.20 Setting RF Power Levels.- The transmitter RF power levels are read by entering the following codes
on the terminal. Test equipment required - None
e. Enter control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) to read the course CSB forward power.
f. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB Forward Power Output) to set the course CSB forward
power output. Set the course CSB forward power output to 15 watts or as required for site
requirements.
g. Enter control code "022" (Read Course SBO Forward Power) to read the course SBO forward power.

h. Enter control code "101" (Set Course SBO Forward Power Output) to set the course SBO forward
power output. Set the course SBO forward power as required for the proper course width.
i. Repeat steps (e) thru (h) for the clearance transmitter using the following control codes:

"102" (Set Clearance CSB Forward Power Output)
"103" (Set Clearance SBO Forward Power Output)
6.4.21 Set Automatic Restart Delay Time.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "026" (Display Auto-Restart Delay Time) to display the automatic restart delay
time.
f. Enter control code "078" (Set Auto-Restart Delay Time). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the
desired restart delay time in seconds. Maximum setting 32000.
g. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
h. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.22 Set Alarm Shutdown Delay Time.- Test equipment required - None.

e. Enter control code "027" (Display Alarm Time) to display the alarm delay time.
f. Enter control code "079" (Set Alarm Delay Time). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the desired
alarm shutdown delay time in seconds. Maximum setting 32000.
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.23 Setting Transfer Delay Time Limit.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Enter control code "029" (Display Transfer Delay Time) to read to the transfer delay time.
f. Enter control code "076" (Set Transfer Delay Time). When the prompt (>) appears, enter the desired
transfer delay time in seconds (max 32,000).
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART

6.4.24 Start-Up Delay Programming.- Test equipment required - None.
e. Using control codes 227/279 (display/set), verify the startup delay time is set to a maximum of 5
seconds.
f. Enter control code "098" (Clear Master Bypass/System Reset - Restart) to exit the Bypass mode of
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
6.4.25 Enter/Exit Phase Test Mode.- During normal station operation, the Field Monitor Control Unit
computes width DDM based upon data samples collected from the output signal of an integral detector. This
audio output is a composite 90/150 Hz signal on a DC level. The Enter/Exit Phase test mode commands
enable maintenance personnel to determine the phasing of a facility by changing the source of the audio
signal to the Field Monitor Control Unit from the width integral detector to an in-line phasing detector,
connected in-line with one of the antenna feedlines. The in-line phasing detector provides a signal with the
SBO portion entirely canceled out if the CSB and SBO RF signals are in phase. Test equipment required -
None.

e. Enter control "084" (Enter Phase Test Mode). System will respond with "PHASE DET. ON"
message. This indicates that the in-line phasing detector is being used as the data sampling source
by the Field Monitor Control Unit.
f. Enter control code "033" (Read Width DDM) to display the computed width DDM. Enter CTRL
J to exit the "033" command.
g. Exit Phase Test mode by entering control code "085" (Exit Phase Test Mode). The system will
respond with a "PHASE DET. OFF" message. The Width Integral Detector will be used as the
sampled data source by the Field Monitor Control Unit.
LEAVING BYPASS
RESTART
i. Verify the BYPASS LED extinguishes.
6.4.26 +28 Vdc Power Supply (1A29) Output Adjustment.- Test equipment required - Multimeter.
a. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
b. Remove and save four Power Panel Assembly (1A27) screws. Carefully lift the Power Panel
Assembly (1A27) away from the localizer cabinet to expose +28 Vdc Power Supply (1A29).
CAUTION
Do not allow Power Panel Assembly (1A27) to be suspended by the power supply
electrical harness.
d. Connect digital voltmeter to -DC and +DC terminals of +28 Vdc Power Supply 1A29.
e. Adjust Voltage Adjust Potentiometer 1A29R2 for an output voltage of +28 Vdc.
f. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
g. Secure Power Panel Assembly (1A27).
h. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.

6.4.27 Placing System in Forth Mode by Removing Microprocessor CCA Jumper.- Test equipment
required - None.
NOTE
a. Place system AC and DC power circuit breakers to the OFF position.
e. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position. System will come up in FORTH
Terminal Mode.
f. Accomplish maintenance procedures as applicable.
g. Place system AC and DC power circuit breakers to the OFF position.
h. Remove Microprocessor CCA (1A12) from the cabinet assembly.
i. Re-install the jumper between terminals E3 - E4.
j. Re-install Microprocessor CCA (1A12).
k. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
6.4.28 Determining Unknown Forth Mode Password.- This procedure is used when ever the forth mode
password is unknown or does not allow access into the forth mode of operation as detailed in paragraph
3.3.4.
NOTE
a. Place system AC and DC power circuit breakers to the OFF position.

e. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position. System will come up in FORTH
Terminal Mode.
f. Enter "DECIMAL". The station terminal will respond OK.
g. Read the forth mode password by entering "OUTWRD_@_."
h. The forth mode password may be changed as detailed in paragraph 3.3.12 or left as is.
i. Place system AC and DC power circuit breakers to the OFF position.
j. Remove Microprocessor CCA (1A12) from the cabinet assembly.
k. Re-install the jumper between terminals E3 - E4.
l. Re-install Microprocessor CCA (1A12).
m. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.

SECTION 7. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
7.1 INTRODUCTION .- This section contains information necessary to troubleshoot and perform
corrective maintenance at the localizer site. Repairs to the localizer equipment are limited to module
replacement.
7.2 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED.- Table 7-1 is a list of the test equipment required to maintain the
capture-effect localizer. Although specific model numbers are listed, equivalent equipment may be
substituted.
Table 7-1. Test Equipment.
Wattmeter, BIRD
Wattmeter Elements: 25W, 1W, 100 mW, and 50 dB Sniffer
Multimeter, Fluke 77
Oscilloscope, Tektronics 2205 with option 40
Frequency Meter, Sencore FC71, 1 GHz
Dummy Load, 25 W
Thermometer
Vector Voltmeter
Cable Assembly Line Section, 90 Degree
PIR, ASII 1137 Portable ILS Receiver
7.3 ON-SITE CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE.- Corrective maintenance procedures in this section cover
either of the two identical capture-effect localizer station cabinets as installed at the ILS site. The
troubleshooting procedures of table 7-2 enable the technician to isolate faults to individual modules. Each
fault isolated by table 7-2 will point to maximum of three Line Replaceable Units (LRU's); replace each
LRU one at a time in the order listed until the fault is fixed. Follow the appropriate instructions in section
six to replace and calibrate each module replaced during fault isolation. The troubleshooting procedures are
to be used in conjunction with figures and diagrams found in section 11. The first step in corrective
maintenance is inspection of the equipment with the power off. Whether or not all or a portion of the trouble
may be found in this manner, it is always good practice to perform visual inspections and basic continuity
checks on equipment whose condition is unknown. The major elements of inspection are:
a. Electrical connections. (Cables and plug-in modules).
b. Mechanical joints and linkages, including switches.
c. Wiring condition. Water, heat, or extreme cold can affect internal and external wiring. Look for
frayed, broken, or damaged wiring.
d. Incorrect repairs or recent modifications.

e. Corrosion, broken, burnt, or missing parts.
f. Build up of dirt, moisture, insect or rodent nesting.
g. Improper lubrication of moving parts.
After finding and correcting the trouble, perform adjustment procedures. Maintenance records are to be
kept and as much data as possible recorded to assist in future repairs. List abnormal indications and what
was done to correct the fault. Records are to include actual measurements taken before and after the repair
to accumulate a work history. This practice will aid in identifying problems before they interfere with
equipment operation.
7.3.1 General Troubleshooting Information.-
a. Identify the symptom.
b. List the symptoms that you find or a field technician describes. If someone else describes the
symptoms to you, check the symptoms yourself or have that person demonstrate the symptoms to
make sure the problem is not an operator error or a misadjustment of the equipment.
c. Carefully inspect the suspected assembly. Read the following suggestions before the inspection.
1. Check for signs of excessive heat.
2. Verify that all integrated circuits are firmly seated in their sockets and that there are no bent
pins.
3. Check that printed circuit board edge connectors are clean and fully seated.
4. Check the ribbon-cable connectors for proper connections.
d. Check the power supplies. Power supplies are a very common source of problems. Low voltage or
excessive ripple may make it appear that an IC is bad.
1. Verify that the power supply voltages shown in table 4-1 are within specifications. Then use
an oscilloscope to ascertain that the power supply outputs are not excessively noisy.
e. When making ground check measurements with the PIR, only one transmitter (Course or Clearance)
should be operational. The other transmitter should be shut down with the appropriate keyboard
command, and the outputs dummy loaded. Errors in readings may result if this is not done. Restore
system to normal operation when maintenance is completed.

f. The Airport Systems, Inc. Capture Effect Localizer utilizes a unique method of Course and
Clearance frequency separation in the monitor. This method involves the use of mixers and filters
in the Integral Detector assemblies. With this technique, both Course and Clearance frequencies are
present at the input to the detectors during normal system operation. If PIR measurements are
required at the detector inputs (MRU outputs), the alternate transmitter (Course or Clearance) should
be shut down and its CSB and SBO outputs dummy loaded before connecting the PIR to the MRU.
Failure to do this will result in erroneous PIR readings.

Table 7-2. Capture-Effect Localizer On-Site Corrective Maintenance.

Symptom / Alarm Troubleshooting
AC circuit breaker lamp a. Check and restore AC power

not lit b. Reset AC breaker by switching off then on
DC circuit breaker lamp a. Reset DC breaker by switching off then on
not lit b. Check 28V dc power supply output on 1A10-TP1
c. Replace 1A29 Power Supply
Terminal will not respond a. Check Local/Remote switch position and cable connection
b. Check terminal settings: 1200 baud, 8 data & 1 stop bit, no parity
c. Check dc supply voltages on 1A10 and 1A26
d. If system does not try to transmit RF upon power-up, then replace
1A12 Microprocessor CCA
e. If system will transmit RF, replace 1A13 Analog I/O CCA
Course Centerline DDM a. Shut off CLR transmitter, check centerline DDM with PIR
b. If PIR DDM = Monitor CRS DDM [Code 31], check DDM at CRS
CSB Thruline
1. If CRS CSB DDM is shifted and = Monitor CRS DDM shift,
replace 1A5A1 Modulator, 1A7 PA, and 1A8 Audio Generator
2. If CRS CSB DDM is not shifted and … Monitor CRS DDM,
check 4A1A6 RF Dist Assembly and antenna feed lines
c. If PIR DDM … Monitor CRS DDM, check DDM at CRS CSB
output of 4A1A5 RF Combiner
1. If RF Comb DDM = Monitor CRS DDM, check antenna feed
and monitor lines and 4A1A5 RF Combiner Assembly
2. If RF Comb DDM … Monitor CRS DDM, replace 4A1A2 CRS
Integral Detector
Clearance Centerline a. Shut off CRS transmitter, check centerline DDM with PIR
DDM (Channel 3 DDM) b. If PIR DDM = Monitor CLR DDM [Code 221], check DDM at
CLR CSB Thruline
1. If CLR CSB DDM is shifted and = Monitor CLR DDM shift,
replace 1A5A2 Modulator, 1A23 PA, and 1A24 Audio Generator
2. If CLR CSB DDM … Monitor CLR DDM, check 4A1A6 RF Dist
Assembly and antenna feed lines
c. If PIR DDM … Monitor CLR DDM, check DDM at CLR CSB
output of 4A1A5 RF Combiner
1. If RF Comb DDM = Monitor CLR DDM, check antenna feed
and monitor lines and 4A1A5 RF Combiner Assembly
2. If RF Comb DDM … Monitor CLR DDM, replace 4A1A3 CLR
Integral Detector


Course RF Level a. Check CRS CSB forward power [Code 20]
b. If power is within specifications, replace 4A1A2 CRS Int Det and
check 4A1A1 Monitor Combiner and 4A1A5 RF Combiner
Assemblies
c. If power is low, replace 1A7 PA, 1A5A1 Modulator, and 1A8
Audio Generator
Clearance RF Level a. Check CLR CSB forward power [Code 260]
(Channel 3 RF Level) b. If power is within specifications, replace 4A1A3 CLR Int Det and
check 4A1A1 Monitor Combiner and 4A1A5 RF Combiner
Assemblies
c. If power is low, replace 1A23 PA, 1A5A2 Modulator, and 1A24
Audio Generator
% Mod CRS Total a. Compare SDM at CRS CSB Thruline to Monitor SDM [Code 36]
b. If readings agree, replace 1A5A1 Modulator, 1A7 PA, and 1A8
Audio Generator
c. If readings disagree, replace 4A1A2 CRS Int Det, 4A1A4A2
Microprocessor CCA, 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA
% Mod CLR Total a. Compare SDM at CLR CSB Thruline to Monitor SDM [Code 800]
b. If readings agree, replace 1A5A2 Modulator, 1A23 PA, and 1A24
Audio Generator
c. If readings disagree, replace 4A1A3 CLR Int Det, 4A1A4A2
Microprocessor CCA, 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA
% CRS ID Mod a. Check ID % Mod at CRS CBS Thruline
b. If within spec, replace 4A1A2 CRS Int Det, 4A1A4A2
Microprocessor CCA, and 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA
c. If not within spec, replace 1A5A1 Modulator, 1A8 Audio
Generator, and 1A14 VIA D/A CCA
% CLR ID Mod a. Check ID % Mod at CLR CBS Thruline
b. If within spec, replace 4A1A3 CLR Int Det, 4A1A4A2
Microprocessor CCA, and 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA
c. If not within spec, replace 1A5A2 Modulator, 1A24 Audio
Generator, and 1A14 VIA D/A CCA


CRS Width DDM Wide / a. Use Wattmeter to check CRS CSB and SBO power at Thrulines
Narrow a. If either reading is high or low, check antenna system VSWR in
shelter.
1. If VSWR is not correct, check antenna system.
2. If VSWR is correct, check RF Power lamp on 1A6 CRS
Synthesizer.
1. If lamp is off, replace 1A6 CRS Synthesizer
2. If lamp is on, check CRS RF Frequency [Code 80]
i. If freq is wrong, replace 1A6 CRS Synthesizer
ii. If freq is correct, replace 1A7 PA, 1A5A1 Modulator
Assembly, and 1A8 Audio Generator
b. If both readings are within specs, check Far Field Phasing by
turning off CLR transmitter, inserting 90 degree section in CRS
SBO line, and using PIR to measure DDM at width ground check
point.
1. If PIR DDM = 0, check DDM reading at CRS Width output of
4A1A1 Monitor Combiner Assembly.
i. If CRS Width DDM = 0, replace 4A1A2 CRS Int Det
and 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA.
ii. If CRS Width DDM … 0, check 4A1A1 Monitor Combiner
and 4A1A5 RF Combiner using Vector Voltmeter.
1. If either unit is not correct, replace.
2. If RF Combiner and Monitor Combiner are correct,
check and replace Antenna Monitor Feedlines and/or
Antennas.
2. If PIR DDM … 0, check RF Power lamp on 1A6 CRS
Synthesizer
a. If lamp is off, replace 1A6 CRS Synthesizer.
b. If lamp is on, check CRS RF Freq [Code 80]
1. If freq is wrong, replace 1A6 CRS Synthesizer.
2. If freq is correct, replace 1A7 PA, 1A3 CRS SBO
Phaser, and 1A8 Audio Generator
3. If PIR DDM … 0, check Amplitude/Phase/VSWR of 4A1A6
RF Distribution Assembly using Vector Voltmeter.
i. If any antenna or input port is bad, replace 4A1A6 RF
Distribution Assembly.
ii. If RF Distribution assembly is correct, check and replace
Antenna Element Feedlines and/or Antennas.


CLR Width DDM Wide / a. Use Wattmeter to check CLR CSB and SBO power at Thrulines
Narrow (Channel 4 DDM) a. If either reading is high or low, check antenna system VSWR in
shelter.
1. If VSWR is not correct, check antenna system.
2. If VSWR is correct, check RF Power lamp on 1A22 CLR
Synthesizer.
1. If lamp is off, replace 1A22 CLR Synthesizer
2. If lamp is on, check CLR RF Frequency [Code 627]
i. If freq is wrong, replace 1A22 CLR Synthesizer
ii. If freq is correct, replace 1A23 PA, 1A5A2 Modulator
Assembly, and 1A24 Audio Generator
b. If both readings are within specs, check Far Field Phasing by
turning off CRS transmitter, inserting 90 degree section in CLR
SBO line, and using PIR to measure DDM at width ground check
point.
1. If PIR DDM = 0, check DDM reading at CLR Width output of
4A1A1 Monitor Combiner Assembly.
i. If CLR Width DDM = 0, replace 4A1A3 CLR Int Det
and 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O CCA.
ii. If CLR Width DDM … 0, check 4A1A1 Monitor Combiner
and 4A1A5 RF Combiner using Vector Voltmeter.
1. If either unit is not correct, replace.
2. If RF Combiner and Monitor Combiner are correct,
check and replace Antenna Monitor Feedlines and/or
Antennas.
2. If PIR DDM … 0, check RF Power lamp on 1A22 CLR
Synthesizer
a. If lamp is off, replace 1A22 CLR Synthesizer.
b. If lamp is on, check CLR RF Freq [Code 627]
1. If freq is wrong, replace 1A22 CLR Synthesizer.
2. If freq is correct, replace 1A23 PA, 1A4 CLR SBO
Phaser, and 1A24 Audio Generator
3. If PIR DDM … 0, check Amplitude/Phase/VSWR of 4A1A6
RF Distribution Assembly using Vector Voltmeter.
i. If any antenna or input port is bad, replace 4A1A6 RF
Distribution Assembly.
ii. If RF Distribution assembly is correct, check and replace
Antenna Element Feedlines and/or Antennas.


Width RF Level a. Check CRS CSB forward power [Code 20]
b. If within spec, replace 4A1A2 CRS Int Det and check 4A1A1
Monitor Combiner and 4A1A5 RF Combiner Assemblies
c. If not within spec, replace 1A5A1 Modulator, 1A7 PA, and 1A8
Audio Generator
CLR Width RF Level a. Check CLR CSB forward power [Code 260]
(Channel 4 RF Level) b. If within spec, then replace 4A1A3 CLR Int Det and check 4A1A1
Monitor Combiner and 4A1A5 RF Combiner Assemblies
c. If not within spec, then replace 1A5A2 Modulator, 1A23 PA, and
1A24 Audio Generator
DU Data Invalid a. Check Field Processor Power Supply CCA for dc voltages
1. Replace 4A1A4A1 Power Supply if faulty
b. Check RS-232 data lines from field processor unit to shelter.
c. Use oscilloscope or terminal to verify baud rate
d. Replace 4A1A4A2 Microprocessor CCA, 4A1A4A3 Analog I/O
CCA, and 1A11 Serial I/O CCA
Keyer Failure a. Check for proper ID keying at the output of 1A8 and 1A24 Audio
Generators
b. If keying is not present, replace corresponding Audio Gen
c. If keying is valid, replace 1A12 Microprocessor CCA and 1A14
VIA D/A CCA
CRS CSB VSWR a. Use BIRD Wattmeter to calculate VSWR at appropriate Thruline
CRS SBO VSWR terminated with 50 ohm load [Code 38 (CSB) or 39 (SBO)]
b. If VSWR is within spec, check 4A1A6 RF Dist Assembly and
associated cables
c. If VSWR is not within spec, replace 1A7 PA, 1A34 Power Sensor
Assembly, and 1A9 RF Controller CCA
CLR CSB VSWR a. Use BIRD Wattmeter to calculate VSWR at appropriate Thruline
CLR SBO VSWR terminated with 50 ohm load [Code 262 (CSB) or 740 (SBO)]
b. If VSWR is within spec, check 4A1A6 RF Dist Assembly and
associated cables
c. If VSWR is not within spec, replace 1A23 PA, 1A34 Power Sensor
Assembly, and 1A25 RF Controller CCA
Deg C Shelter a. Compare actual shelter temperature to Monitor reading [Code 25]
b. If same, repair heater or air conditioner
c. If different, replace Temp Sensor Assembly and 1A13 Analog I/O
CCA


CRS PA Current a. Calculate actual CRS PA current through 1A5A1R1 using I=V/.05
b. Compare actual current to Monitor reading [Code 24]
c. If same, replace 1A5A1 Modulator Assembly and 1A7 PA
d. If different, replace 1A13 Analog I/O CCA and 1A27A1 Scaling
CCA
CLR PA Current a. Calculate actual CLR PA current through 1A5A2R1 using I=V/.05
b. Compare actual current to Monitor reading [Code 760]
c. If same, replace 1A5A2 Modulator Assembly and 1A23 PA
d. If different, replace 1A13 Analog I/O CCA and 1A27A1 Scaling
CCA
Antenna Fault a. If second digit from left is 0, check antenna misalignment switch
b. Check each antenna fault input at TB2 of 4A1A4 Field Monitor,
each should be about 1.5 V dc
c. If all antenna inputs are good, replace 4A1A4A4 Antenna Fault
CCA
d. If any antenna inputs are bad, check 4A1A5 RF Combiner
Assembly 4A1A6 RF Distribution Assembly, and Antenna and
Monitor Feedlines
Transfer Switch Failed a. Check and/or replace 3W1K1, 3W1K2, 3W1K3, 3W1K4, 3W1K5,
and 3W1K6 RF Relays
b. Replace 3A1 Transfer Logic CCA
NFM/FFM DDM a. Use PIR to measure DDM at FFM antenna input
b. If antenna input DDM = FFM DDM [Code 271], check Centerline
DDM with PIR
1. If Centerline DDM = 0, look for site changes or reflecting objects
2. If Centerline DDM … 0, verify Integral Monitor CRS and CLR
Centerline readings.
c. If antenna input DDM … FFM DDM, service FFM according to
section 7 in FFM manual
NFM/FFM SDM a. Use PIR to measure SDM at FFM antenna input
b. If antenna input SDM = FFM SDM [Code 900], verify % Mod
Total Alarm setting.
c. If antenna input SDM … FFM SDM, service FFM according to
section 7 in FFM manual


NFM/FFM RF Level a. Use PIR to measure RF Level at FFM antenna input
b. If antenna input RF Level = FFM RF Level [Code 270], verify RF
Level Alarm setting
c. If antenna input RF Level … FFM RF Level, service FFM according
to section 7 in FFM manual
NFM/FFM Data Invalid a. Use oscilloscope to check for low frequency, small voltage signal
across TB1-3 and TB1-4 on 3A7 FFM Short-Haul Modem
Assembly
b. If signal is present, check for RS-232 data at J2-5 and J3-5 on 3A7
FFM SHM Assembly
1. If data is present, replace 1A11 Serial I/O CCA
2. If data is not present, replace 3A7 FFM SHM Assembly
c. If signal is not present, check FFM cables and service FFM
according to section 7 in FFM manual
VDC DME Status a. Check DME equipment (if applicable)
b. Without DME equipment, set DME alarm to a negative voltage
[Codes 66 (read) and 63 (set)]
Phase Det DDM Wide / a. Phase Det DDM Wide/Narrow Alarm:
Narrow Alarm; Phase Det Turn off phase detector mode [Code 85]
Reading incorrect. b. Phase Det DDM reading incorrect:
Replace 4A1A7 In-Line Phase Detector
Course Synthesizer a. Replace 1A6 CRS Synthesizer
Failure
Clearance Synthesizer a. Replace 1A22 CLR Synthesizer
Failure

7.4 OFF-SITE REPAIRS.- This manual has no provision for off-site repairs. Defective modules are to be
returned to the depot or factory. Repair to component level may require an external power source, signal
generating equipment, and special analyzers in some cases. Module repairs are beyond the scope of this
manual. In all cases where the module or circuits are badly damaged, the module or component are to be
returned to the proper repair facility.
7.5 OVERHAUL, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR STANDARDS.- When a performance step results
in an abnormal indication, stop and correct the problem while referring to the standards and tolerances in
table 4-1.
7.6 PACKING INSTRUCTIONS.- Equipment requiring shipment from the site for repair shall be packaged
and marked. Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge shall be properly marked and packed in
accordance with DOD-STD-1686, Electrostatic Discharge Control Programs for Protection of Electrical and
Electronic Parts.


SECTION 8. PARTS LIST
8.1 INTRODUCTION.- Table 8-1 contains a list of the modules and circuit card assemblies used in the
Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer system. Refer to section 9 for listings of parts for the shelter
installation kit and battery backup kit parts. Refer to localizer antenna manual (570011-0009) for a listing
of parts for the antenna installation kit.
Table 8-1. Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer System Parts List.
Designator Description Part Number
-- Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer System
Unit 1 Model 1100 Localizer Transmitter Assembly 001100-0202

1A1 . Status Panel Assembly 030299-0005
1A1A1 . . Display CCA 012512-0002
1A3/1A4 . . Phaser Assembly 030292-0002
1A5 . Modulator Assembly 030296-0002
1A5A1/1A5A2 . . Modulator CCA 012549-0001
1A6/1A22 . Synthesizer Assembly 030579-0001
1A7/1A23 . RF Power Amplifier Assembly 030295-0004
1A8/1A24 . Audio Generator CCA 012542-0005
1A9/1A25 . RF Control CCA 012543-0003
1A10/1A26 . Low Voltage Power Supply CCA 012670-0001
1A11 . Serial I/O CCA 012772-0001
1A12 . Microprocessor CCA 012595-1002
1A13 . Analog I/O CCA 012783-0001
1A14 . VIA D/A CCA 012540-0001
1A27 . Power Panel Assembly 030297-0003
1A27A1 . . Voltage/Scaling CCA 012547-0003
1A27A2 . . Power Monitor CCA 012406-0004
1A29 . Power Supply Assembly 950572-0003
1A31 . Current Limiter Assembly 030347-0001
1A32A1 . Backplane CCA 012537-0001
1A34 . Power Sensor Assembly 030602-0001
1A35/1A36 . Synthesizer Power Coupler 030601-0001
Unit 2 Model 1100 Localizer Transmitter Assembly 001100-0202

2A1 . Status Panel Assembly 030299-0005
2A1A1 . . Display CCA 012512-0002

Table 8-1. Model 1100 Capture-Effect Localizer System Parts List (Cont).
Designator Description Part Number
2A3/2A4 . . Phaser Assembly 030292-0002

2A5 . Modulator Assembly 030296-0002
2A5A1/2A5A2 . . Modulator CCA 012549-0001
2A6/2A22 . Synthesizer Assembly 030579-0001
2A7/2A23 . RF Power Amplifier Assembly 030295-0004
2A8/2A24 . Audio Generator CCA 012542-0005
2A9/2A25 . RF Control CCA 012543-0003
2A10/2A26 . Low Voltage Power Supply CCA 012670-0001
2A11 . Serial I/O CCA 012772-0001
2A12 . Microprocessor CCA 012595-1002
2A13 . Analog I/O CCA 012783-0001
2A14 . VIA D/A CCA 012540-0001
2A27 . Power Panel Assembly 030297-0003
2A27A1 . . Voltage/Scaling CCA 012547-0003
2A27A2 . . Power Monitor CCA 012406-0004
2A29 . Power Supply Assembly 950572-0003
2A31 . Current Limiter Assembly 030347-0001
2A32A1 . Backplane CCA 012537-0001
2A34 . Power Sensor Assembly 030602-0001
2A35/2A36 . Synthesizer Power Coupler 030601-0001
Unit 3 Transfer Control Unit 030603-0001

3A1 . Transfer Logic CCA 012771-1002
3A2 . Transient Suppressor Assembly 030606-0001
3A3 . Temperature Sensor Assembly 030313-0000
3A4 . ILS Control Interface CCA (Optional) 012713-1007
3A5 . FFM/RSCU Control Interface CCA
(Optional) 012713-1006
3A6 . DME Keying Interface Assembly (Optional) 012777-0001
3A7 . Far Field Monitor Short
Modem Assembly (Optional) 030445-0003
3A7A1 . FFM SHM Interface CCA (Optional) 012757-0001

SECTION 9. INSTALLATION, INTEGRATION, AND CHECKOUT
9.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section contains information required to install the Model 1100 Capture-
Effect Localizer equipment. The site is inspected and preliminary startup checks are conducted along with
the final installation verification tests.
9.2 SITE INFORMATION.- Refer to figure 9-1. The localizer site consists of the equipment shelter,
transmitting, monitoring, control modules and antenna system. The capture-effect localizer LPD antenna
array is typically located on the extended centerline of the runway, 1000 feet beyond the stop end. The
shelter is usually offset 250 to 300 feet perpendicularly from the center of the antenna array.
Figure 9-2 shows a typical shelter and antenna foundation locations, and site preparation requirements.
Figure 9-3 shows typical trenching details. The terrain around the localizer site is to be graded to the
specification determined by the siting engineer.
9.3 UNPACKING AND REPACKING.- Shipping cases are to be handled and opened with care to avoid
damage to electronics components. Insure all fasteners, supports, and tie-downs have been removed before
attempting to unpack each unit. Unpack the equipment and visually inspect each item for accuracy and
damage, but DO NOT REMOVE any ESD protective wrapping. Report damage immediately. After
inspection, repack each item to prevent damage. During installation, unpack items as they are needed.
Check the number of items unpacked against the enclosed packing slip to insure complete shipment. The
packing slip can also be checked against table 8-1.
9.3.1 Environmental Considerations.- The environmental conditions must not exceed those listed in the
specifications of table 1-1.
9.4 INPUT REQUIREMENT SUMMARY.- The AC power required at the shelter site is 115/230 volts,
single-phase, three-wire service with a frequency of 47-63 Hz.
9.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.-

Figure 9-1. Typical Capture-Effect Localizer Siting Dimensions.

9.5.1 Installation Tools and Test Equipment.- Refer to table 7-1 for a list of test equipment and table 9-1
for a list of special tools.
Table 9-1. Special Tools.
Description
Tube Cutter
File
Knife
1-1/4" Open End Wrench (2 required)
9.5.2 Installation Kits.- Refer to the following tables for all component or modification kits required to
install a localizer station.
Table 9-2. Transmitter Hinge Assembly Installation Kit (470288-0001).

(Refer to figure 11-30. 2 kit required for Dual Systems)
Table 9-3. Exterior Interface Kit, Capture-Effect Localizer (470331-0001).
Part No. Description QTY Item No.
136027-0308 SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD 35 EA 2

136504-0139 WASHER, LOCK 35 EA 17
137000-0811 WASHER, FLAT 10 EA 3
185209-0000 ADAPTER, CONN 4 EA 5
321015-0001 PLUSNUT BLIND FAST 15 EA 7
321058-0000 WASHER, SHOULDERED 4 EA 8
321058-0002 R/WASHER 3 1/2 X 3" 4 EA 22
327077-0000 NUT ASSY, SPR LOAD 18 EA 16
327078-0000 WASHER, FENDER 20 EA 6
347081-1006 ELBOW, ELEC CONDUIT, 2", 90E 1 EA 24
347081-1018 ELBOW, ELEC CONDUIT, 2", 45E 8 EA 25
347082-0006 COUPLING, ELEC CND 10 EA 26
347083-0006 ADAPTER, ELEC CONDUIT 5 EA 11
347107-0007 LOCKNUT-RGD CONDUIT 11 EA 4
347107-0009 LOCKNUT-RGD CONDUIT 4 EA 21
347112-0008 STRAP, RETAINING 5 EA 10
347128-0006 BUSHING, ELEC CONDUIT 2 EA 14
347128-0008 BUSHING, ELEC CONDUIT 2 EA 20
900065-0000 SEALING COMPOUND 1 EA 9
900084-0005 CHANNEL, STRUCTURAL 4 EA 15
900087-0000 CLEANING CMPD, SLVT 1 EA 19

Table 9-3. Exterior Interface Kit, Capture-Effect Localizer (470331-0001) (Cont).
900088-0000 ADHESIVE 1 EA 18
900130-0600 CONDUIT, NM, RIGID 5 EA 12
900131-6120 CONDUIT, METAL, RIGID 1 EA 13
900131-7120 CONDUIT, METAL, RIGID 1 EA 23
950176-0000 BATTERY BOX 2 EA 1
Table 9-4. Offset Cable Kit 350 ft. (470071-0006).
Part No. Description Qty Item No.
146006-0000 #6 BARE COPPER WIRE 400 FT 1

180303-0001 CONN, PLUG, ELEC 4 EA 8
185238-0000 CONN. #735101 8 EA 2
412000-0002 TERMINAL, LUG, NO.6, SPADE 25 EA 9
443039-0000 CABLE PHONE PE39 400 FT 3
443040-0000 CABLE, 12/2 UFWG-NMB 400 FT 4
443041-0400 CABLE, RF, TIMES 5078/400 FT 4 5
443060-0001 CABLE, RF 850 FT 7
900076-0000 ROD, GRND-3/4" X 10', CU CLAD STEEL 1 6
Table 9-5. Interior Interface Kit (470246-0001).
030603-0001 TRANS CONTROL UNIT, DUAL CE LOC 1 EA 2

070182-0005 CABLE ASSY 1 EA 10
070182-0006 CABLE ASSY 1 EA 11
070182-0007 CABLE ASSY 1 EA 8
070182-0008 CABLE ASSY 1 EA 9
070487-0002 CABLE ASSY 12 EA 12
070529-0001 CABLE ASSY 1 EA 18
136504-0139 WASHER, LOCK 5 EA 14
137000-0811 WASHER, FLAT 5 EA 15
302029-0000 STRAP, RETAINING 20 AR 4
302044-0000 STRAP, RETAINING 20 EA 3
321015-0001 PLUSNUT BLIND FAST 5 EA 16
327025-0004 BOLT, MACHINE-HEX 5 EA 13
470246-8001 ASSEMBLY DRAWING 2 EA
950429-0010 CABLE ASSY, SP, ELEC 2 EA 17

Table 9-6. Power Kit (470281-0001).
136001-0032 SCREW, MACHINE 2 EA 7

212502-0000 LAMP, INCANDESCENT 4 EA 1
302079-0000 CLAMP, LOOP 1 EA 8
443040-0000 CABLE, PWR, ELEC 6 FT 9
950225-0000 HTG ELEM, ELEC 1 EA 2
950230-0000 CONN, RCPT, ELEC 1 EA 3
950231-0000 COVER, CONDUIT OUTLET 1 EA 4
950232-0000 CONDUIT OUTLET 1 EA 5
9.5.3 Shelter Foundation Installation.- Figure 9-2 shows a typical shelter foundation drawing and will
change per local building codes. Refer to figure 9-3 for typical trenching details. For shelters not supplied
by Airport Systems International, Inc., the manufacturer of the shelter should supply drawing for the siting
engineer.
9.5.4 Shelter Installation.-
a. Refer to figure 9-2. Using a crane and four nylon slings (20 feet long), position the equipment
shelter on the four concrete piers.
b. Attach the shelter to the pier anchor bolts using the 5/8 inch hardware, beveled washers, and tie-
down plates.
NOTE
All vertical unistrut attached directly to the shelter interior walls is affixed using 1-1/4" x
1/4" lag screws (refer to table 9-2). All other items attached to the shelter interior or exterior
walls are affixed using plus nuts. Silicon seal (Part No. 900065-0000) must be used around
each external nut to provide a weather tight seal.
9.5.5 Shelter Grounding Installation.- Install shelter ground rods and ground wire as detailed in figure 9-4.
9.5.6 Exterior Interface Box Installation.- Refer to table 9-3 for a list of parts included in the Exterior
Interface Box Kit. Refer to figure 11-26 for installation details.
a. Placement of exterior interface box may be modified dependent on field requirements. Box is to be
located perpendicular to the interior interface box that is installed in the shelter.

b. Place a bead of silicon sealant around the back side of the exterior junction box to insure a watertight
seal between the junction box and exterior shelter wall. Attach exterior junction box to exterior
shelter wall using appropriate hardware.
c. Do not tighten conduit connectors to the bottom of exterior junction box.
9.5.7 Air Conditioner Installation.- If a wall mounted air conditioner is supplied install the air conditioner
in the wall opening and secure it in place.
9.5.8 Flexible Conduit Installation.- The audio and modem lines from the localizer transmitter to the
interior interface box are routed through section of 3/4" sealtite flexible conduit that is fastened from the top
of the localizer cabinet to the top of the interior interface box as shown in figure 9-4. Placement of the
sealtite flexible conduit is dependent upon field considerations. Drill or punch a 1.01 inch hole into the top
of the localizer transmitter cabinet either in the right or left corner. Install 90E 3/4" sealtite fitting into the
top of the transmitter cabinet. The 3/4" straight sealtite fitting is installed in the interior interface box.
9.5.9 Localizer Transmitter Cabinet Installation.- Refer to figures 9-5 and 11-30 for installation details and
a list of materials in the transmitter hinge assembly installation kit. Attach localizer transmitter cabinet using
appropriate hardware.
9.5.10 Battery Backup Assembly Installation.- Refer to figure 11-29 for installation details and a list of
materials included in the battery backup installation kit. Install battery backup wiring between the localizer
cabinets and the battery backup units as detailed in figure 11-2, capture-effect localizer interconnect
schematic.
9.5.11 Primary AC Power Installation.- Connect primary AC power as shown in Capture-Effect Localizer
Interconnect Schematic, figure 11-2. Insure that Shelter Primary Power circuit breakers and Localizer
system circuit breakers are in the OFF position.
9.5.12 Temperature Sensor Kit Installation.- Refer to figure 11-3 and 11-27. The Temperature Sensor kit
(Part No. 470078-0000) is installed to an appropriate place on the side of the Transfer Control Unit.
a. Connect the red terminal lead to +28 Vdc. This can be found at terminal board 1A33 TB1-17 or +28
Vdc may be obtained from TB2-3 in the Interior Interface Box.
b. Connect the white wire terminal lead to Shelter Temp from terminal board 1A33 TB4-4.


Figure 9-3. Typical Trenching Details.
c. Connect the black wire terminal leads to ground from terminal board 1A33 TB3-2 or to TB2-7 in
the Interior Interior Box.
9.5.13 LPD Antenna Installation.- Refer to Capture-Effect LPD Antenna Manual (Part No. 570011-0009)
for installation of the LPD antenna array.
9.5.14 Foamflex RF Cable Installation.- Refer to table 9-5 for a list of material in the Offset Cable Kit. The
Foamflex RF cable arrives at the localizer site on four spools with 400 ft of foamflex on each spool.
NOTE
During installation of the foamflex RF cables do not excessively bend or kink them. Any
bend or damage to the outer conductor of the foamflex will change its electrical
characteristics and degrade localizer system performance.

a. Remove foamflex RF cable from spools and place in trench between shelter and antenna array.
Insure enough foamflex is left sticking above ground at shelter and distribution unit. The foamflex
must reach to the interior of the distribution unit and to the inside of the shelter exterior junction box.
b. Label one piece of foamflex CSB to indicate carrier plus sideband. Label the remaining foamflex
line SBO to indicate sideband only.
c. Following the procedures listed in steps (d) through (o), install RF connectors on localizer end of
foamflex.
d. Trim cable as shown in figure 9-6.
e. Remove jacket from outer conductor of foamflex RF cable. Do not scratch outer conductor
lengthwise with knife.
f. Score outer conductor with a sharp tubing cutter. Do not cut through outer conductor.
g. Insure that surface of outer conductor is clean and smooth at least 5/8" back from scored groove.
This will insure a good seal in the finished installation.
h. Grip end of foamflex RF cable and flex gently until outer conductor fractures at the scored groove.
Pull back outer conductor and expose approximately 1/8" of dielectric.
i. Cut dielectric with a sharp knife down to center conductor flush with end of outer conductor. Pull
off short end of outer conductor and dielectric. Insure that all adhering foam is removed from center
conductor.
j. Cut center conductor to dimension shown in figure 9-6. File a chamfer on center conductor. Insure
that center conductor is straight and free from nicks and burrs.
k. Install heat shrinkable sleeve onto foamflex and slide back out of the way.
l. Install nut assembly and rubber O-ring over foamflex as shown. Coat O-ring lightly with grease
before installing on foamflex.
m. Fit connector front end over foamflex and bring up O-ring and nut assembly.
n. Hold connector front end stationary and tight against end of cable while tightening nut assembly.
o. Bring up heat shrinkable sleeve so it covers cable jacket and nut assembly. Apply heat to sleeve
gently with a heat gun. Insure sleeve shrinks uniformly and completely.
p. Bring foamflex through conduit into exterior wall junction box.

Figure 9-4. Shelter Grounding Installation.

Figure 9-5. Typical Capture-Effect Localizer Layout.
q. Install RF connectors on distribution unit end of foamflex as per procedure given above and route
foamflex through conduit to the inside of the distribution unit.
r. After RF connectors have been installed insure they are protected from inclement weather.
s. Cover foamflex RF cable as detailed in typical trenching diagram figure 9-3.

9.5.15 Audio Cable Installation.- Refer to table 9-4 for a list of material in the interior interface box kit.
Refer to table 9-5 for a list of materials in the offset cable kit.
a. Place 6 pair No. 19 AWG shielded audio cable (Part No. 443039-0000) in trench between shelter
and antenna array. Route audio cable through conduit into interior wall junction box.
b. Refer to figure 9-7. Install No. 6 terminal lugs (Part No. 412000-0002) on selected audio cable
leads. Connect selected audio cable (Part No. 443039-0000) leads to terminal TB2 of shelter
transient suppressor.
c. Route 6 pair No.19 AWG shielded audio cable (part No. 443039-0000) through conduit into
distribution unit.
d. Strip back at least two feet of outer jacket and foil shield.
e. Carefully extract wire pairs from cable to retain correct paring. The pairs are loosely twisted and it
may be necessary to twist tighter so as to keep the paired relationship.
f. Use cleaning kit (Part No. 399025-0000) to remove excess gel from the wire pairs.
g. Strip back outer insulation to expose foil shield. Connect (crimp) cable shield, part number (347139-
0000) over foil shield and connect wire lead under to a grounding point (lug).
h. Refer to figure 9-7. Install No. 6 terminal lugs (Part No. 412000-0002) on selected audio cable
leads. Connect selected audio cable (Part No. 443039-0000) leads to TB1 of distribution unit
transient suppressor. Refer to table 9-7 for audio cable color codes.
Table 9-7. Audio Cable Color Code.
Pair 1 Blue/White
Pair 2 Orange/White
Pair 3 Green/White
Pair 4 Brown/White
Pair 5 Slate/White
Pair 6 Blue/Red
e. Refer to figure 9-3. Place porous backfill in trench above foamflex and audio cable.

Figure 9-6. Foamflex RF Connector Installation Diagram.

9.5.16 Localizer to Transfer Control Unit Connections.- Refer to figure 11-28.
a. Connect RG-214 RF cable (Part No. 070183-0001) from localizer CSB output connector J1 to
interior interface CSB connector J1.
b. Connect RG-214 RF cable (Part No. 070183-0001) from localizer SBO output connector J2 to
interior interface box SBO connector J2.
c. Install a wattmeter body on interior interface box CSB connector J1.
d. Install a wattmeter body on interior interface box SBO connector J2.
e. Route RF cabling from CSB wattmeter body output connector to RF Grounding plate. Connect CSB
foamflex cable.
f. Route RF cabling from SBO wattmeter body output connector to RF Grounding plate. Connect SBO
foamflex cable.
g. Install 10 conductor RF Cable (Part No. 443035-0000) between localizer terminal boards TB1 and
TB4 and shelter transient suppressor TB2 as shown in figure 9-7. Note the double power supply and
ground conductors connected to terminals 3 and 7 of TB1.
Figure 9-7. Field Monitor/Transmitter Interface.

9.5.17 Localizer/DME Keying Installation. The localizer/DME keying installation is an optional procedure
that is performed only if a DME is collocated with the localizer. If no is DME present ignore this procedure.
a. For conventional DME keying, connect to terminal board TB1-5 as shown in figure 11-3, Transfer
Control Unit Interconnect Diagram.
9.5.18 Localizer Shelter to Antenna Array Electric Power Cable Installation. Refer to table 9-6 for a list
of materials in the offset cable kit. Refer to figure 9-3, Typical Trenching Details.
a. Place electric power cable (Part No. 443040-0000) in trench between shelter and antenna array.
b. Route electric power cable through conduit into electrical system conduit.
c. Connect electric power cable to shelter as detailed in shelter schematic diagram figure 11-2.
d. Route electric power cable through conduit into distribution unit.
e. Connect electric power cable to distribution unit as detailed in LPD Antenna manual (Part No.
570011-0009).
f. Refer to figure 9-3. Place porous backfill in trench above electric power cable.
9.5.19 Localizer Shelter to Antenna Array Ground Wire Installation. Refer to table 9-5 for a list of materials
in the Offset Cable Kit. Refer to figure 9-3 typical trenching diagram.
a. Place 6 AWG copper wire (Part No. 146006-0000) in trench between shelter and antenna array.
b. Connect 6 AWG copper wire as detailed in figure 9-4, Shelter Grounding Installation.
c. Route 6 AWG copper wire to distribution unit.
d. Add grounding rod at mid-point between equipment shelter and antenna array. Connect with
exothermic weld or equivalent.
e. Connect ground wire to distribution unit as detailed in LPD Antenna Manual (Part No. 570011-
0009).
f. Refer to figure 9-3. Place porous backfill in trench above 6 AWG copper wire and fill remainder
of trench with backfill material from excavation.
9.5.20 Antenna Cables to Distribution Unit Connections.- Refer to the Capture-Effect LPD Antenna
Manual (Part No. 570011-0009). While connecting antenna cables insure that cables are not damaged in
the process and insure connectors are free from dirt and other debris.

9.6 INSPECTION.- Be sure that all RF and power connections have been made.
CAUTION
The RF cables must be in place or attached to dummy loads to prevent potential

transmitter damage.
Connect an RS-232C interface terminal to the localizer terminal connector, see figure 3-2. The terminal is
configured as DTE equipment, i.e., signals on pin 2 of the terminal connector are generated by the DTE and
transferred to the remote device. Likewise, data signals generated by the remote terminal device are received
on pin 3 of the remote connector. Pin 7 is the common signal ground.
9.7 INITIAL START-UP AND PRELIMINARY TESTING.- The following paragraphs detail the step-by-
step procedures for initial start-up and preliminary testing of the capture-effect localizer. Each step must
be completed for transmitter A and for transmitter B.
9.7.1 Input Voltage Checks.- Refer to figure 9-8. After the AC and DC power has been connected to the
localizer transmitter, it is necessary to check the input power to insure the proper voltage is applied to the
system.
CAUTION
Potentially dangerous voltage is present on AC power terminal block TB2 and battery
terminal block TB3. Use caution when making voltage measurement within the cabinet
assembly.
a. Set system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
b. Set the shelter primary AC power circuit breaker to the OFF position.
c. Set the standby battery circuit breaker (located on the battery backup) to the OFF position.
d. Remove 4 screws securing the Power Panel Assembly (1A27) of the Localizer transmitter cabinet.
Carefully lower Power Panel Assembly (1A27). Locate the AC power terminal block TB2 and the
battery terminal block, TB3. TB2 and TB3 are located to the right of the Power Supply Assembly
(1A29).
e. Locate the Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1) which is attached to the Power Panel Assembly
(1A27). Refer to figure 11-16 (Voltage and Scaling CCA schematic) and verify the input voltage
jumper is set for the AC line voltage being used.
f. Set the shelter primary AC power circuit breakers to the ON position.

g. Using an AC voltmeter check voltage across terminals 1 and 2 of TB2. Insure proper voltage for the
site is present here.
h. Set the standby battery circuit breaker to the ON position.
i. Using a DC voltmeter check across terminals 1 and 2 of battery terminal block TB3. Insure
approximately +24 Vdc is present. If voltage is not present batteries are not charged or battery
backup is wired incorrectly.
9.7.2 Power Supply for 28 Vdc Output.- Refer to figure 9-8. This procedure ensures that Power Supply
Assembly (1A29) is providing the correct voltage to the system's Low Voltage Power Supply CCAs
(1A10/1A26).
Figure 9-8. Capture-Effect Localizer Battery and Power Terminal Blocks.

CAUTION
Potentially dangerous voltage is present on AC power terminal block TB2 and battery
terminal block TB3. Use caution when making voltage measurements within the
cabinet assembly.
a. Locate TB1 of Power Supply Assembly (1A29).
b. Place system AC circuit breakers to the ON position.
c. Using a DC voltmeter check for +28 Vdc across the OUT terminals of Power Supply Assembly
(1A29). Verify voltage is within tolerance listed in table 4-1.B. If voltage is not within tolerance
replace Power Supply Assembly.
d. Place AC circuit breaker to the OFF position.
e. Replace and secure Power Panel Assembly (1A27).
9.7.3 Low Voltage Power Supply Performance Check.- The following procedure tests the Low Voltage
Power Supply CCAs (1A10/1A26) in the equipment cabinet.
b. Refer to figure 9-9. Install Low Voltage Power Supply CCAs (1A10 and 1A26).
d. Using a DVM check test point 1A10/1A26-TP1 for +28 Vdc. Verify voltage is within tolerance
listed in table 4-1.B.
e. Using a DVM check test point 1A10/1A26-TP2 for +12 Vdc. Verify voltage is within tolerance
f. Using a DVM check test point 1A10/1A26-TP3 for -12 Vdc. Verify voltage is within tolerance
g. Using a DVM check test point 1A10/1A26-TP6 for +5 Vdc. Verify voltage is within tolerance listed
in table 4-1.B.
h. If any of test point voltages are not within tolerance replace that Low Voltage Power Supply.

9.7.4 Installing Modules in Transmitter Cabinet.- Since the Localizer transmitter cabinet is shipped
separately from its electronic modules, it will be necessary to install them into the transmitter equipment
cabinet. Insure AC and DC circuit breakers are set to the OFF position. Refer to figure 9-9 for proper
module and CCA locations.

CAUTION
Many of the modules used in the LOC transmitter contain Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) sensitive components. ALWAYS wear protective wrist strap when installing
modules or CCAs. Before modules are installed into transmitter cabinet, check
modules or CCAs for cracked or broken connectors, bent pins, and loose hardware.
Report damage immediately.
9.7.4.1 Synthesizer Assembly (1A6/1A22) Installation and Frequency Check.- The operating frequency of
the station is established by switch settings in the synthesizer DDS CCA. Prior to installing the Synthesizer
Assemblies (1A6/1A22), the switch setting must be checked/set. If known, the switches are set at the factory
for the correct facility frequency; however, the settings are to be checked prior to installation and station
operation.
a. Remove right side cover from synthesizer assembly.
b. Refer to figure 9-10 and table 9-8. Set sections of the switch S1 to the required settings for the
station frequency, capture-effect, and localizer. Bit 10 (operate/reset) must be set to the operate
position. The reset position is for factory test use only.
c. For Course Synthesizer (1A6), set bit 8 to the Course position.
d. For Clearance Synthesizer (1A22), set bit 8 to the Clearance position.
e. Replace the cover.
f. Refer to figure 9-9. Install Synthesizer Assemblies (1A6/1A22) into localizer transmitter cabinet.
Table 9-8. Frequency Selection Chart.
0 = Closed Bit 7 = Not Used Bit 8 0 = Clearance

1 = Open Bit 8 1 = Course
Bit 9 0 = Localizer Bit 10 0 = Reset Bit 11 0 = Capture Effect

Bit 9 1 = Glideslope Bit 10 1 = Operate Bit 11 1 = Single Frequency
Bit 10 must always be set to the operate position. The reset position is for factory test use only.
S1 Switch
Setting Localizer
Glideslope
654321 Frequency
Frequency
000000 108.100 329.150

Table 9-8. Frequency Selection Chart (Cont).
S1 Switch
Setting Localizer Glideslope
654321 Frequency Frequency
000001 108.150 329.300

000010 108.300 329.450
000011 108.350 329.600
000100 108.500 329.750
000101 108.550 329.900
000110 108.700 330.050
000111 108.750 330.200
001000 108.900 330.350
001001 108.950 330.500
001010 109.100 330.650
001011 109.150 330.800
001100 109.300 330.950
001101 109.350 331.100
001110 109.500 331.250
001111 109.550 331.400
010000 109.700 331.550
010001 109.750 331.700
010010 109.900 331.850
010011 109.950 332.000
010100 110.100 332.150
010101 110.150 332.300
010110 110.300 332.450
010111 110.350 332.600
011000 110.500 332.750
011001 110.550 332.900
011010 110.700 333.050
011011 110.750 333.200
011100 110.900 333.350
011101 110.950 333.500
011110 111.100 333.650
011111 111.150 333.800
100000 111.300 333.950
100001 111.350 334.100
100010 111.500 334.250
100011 111.550 334.400
100100 111.700 334.550
100101 111.750 334.700
100110 111.900 334.850
100111 111.950 335.000

Figure 9-10. Synthesizer Assembly (1A6/1A22) Switch S1 Location Diagram.

9.7.4.2 Serial I/O CCA (1A11) Installation and Jumper Location Check.- Prior to installing the Serial I/O
CCA into the transmitter cabinet assembly the jumper setting must be checked.
a. Refer to figure 9-11. Insure the following jumpers are set as follows:
E1-E2-E3: Open
E4-E5-E6: Open
E7-E8-E9: Open
E10-E11-E12: Open
E13-E14-E15: E14-E15 closed
b. Refer to figure 9-9. Install Serial I/O CCA into localizer cabinet.
Figure 9-11. Serial I/O (1A11) CCA Component Location Diagram.

9.7.4.3 Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Installation and Jumper Location Check.- Prior to installing the
Microprocessor CCA into the transmitter cabinet assembly the jumper setting must be checked.
E1-E2: MPU Reset Terminals. Open. When closed resets microprocessor.

E3-E4: Forth select. Closed. Open to bring system up in Forth.
E5-E6: Baud rate select. Open. When open, 1200 baud rate is selected. When
closed, 300 baud rate is selected.
b. Refer to figure 9-9. Install Microprocessor CCA into localizer cabinet.
Figure 9-12. Microprocessor CCA (1A12) Component Location Diagram.

9.7.4.4 Analog I/O CCA (1A13) Installation and Jumper Location Check.- Prior to installing the Analog
I/O CCA into the transmitter cabinet assembly the jumper setting must be checked.
a. Refer to figure 9-13. Insure that a jumper is placed between terminals E1-E2. This is the IRQ line
and must be closed.
b. Refer to figures 9-9. Install Analog I/O CCA into localizer cabinet.
Figure 9-13. Analog I/O CCA (1A13) Component Location Diagram.
9.7.4.5 VIA D/A Converter CCA (1A14) Installation and Jumper Location Check.- Prior to installing the
VIA D/A CCA into the transmitter cabinet assembly the jumper settings must be checked.
E1-E2-E3: E2-E3 closed on all systems.

E4-E5-E6: E5-E6 closed on all systems.
b. Refer to figure 9-9. Install VIA D/A Converter CCA into localizer cabinet.

Figure 9-14. VIA D/A Converter CCA (1A14) Component Location Diagram.
9.7.4.6 Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24) Installation and Identification Code Check.- This procedure
verifies the correct jumper location for the Audio Generator and checks/sets the ident code for the localizer
system.
a. Refer to table 9-9 and figure 9-15. Set the ident switches of (S1 through S24) to obtain the required
ident code.
NOTE
Later versions of Audio Generator CCAs (1A8/1A24) have the Ident keyer code switches turned 180
degrees. Use caution when programming.

Table 9-9. Ident Keyer Codes (Audio Generator 1A8/1A24).
Switches S1 through S6 Selects 1st Letter

Switches S7 through S12 Selects 2nd Letter
Switches S13 through S18 Selects 3rd Letter
Switches S19 through S24 Selects 4th Letter
0 = Closed 1 = Open
EXAMPLE: I D H V
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
I 1 0 0 1 0 0
S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12

D 0 0 1 0 0 0
S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18

H 0 0 0 1 0 0
S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24

V 0 1 1 0 1 0
A 1 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 1 0 0 0 0
C 1 1 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 1 0 0 0
E 1 0 1 0 0 0
F 0 1 1 0 0 0
G 1 1 1 0 0 0
H 0 0 0 1 0 0
I 1 0 0 1 0 0
J 0 1 0 1 0 0
K 1 1 0 1 0 0
L 0 0 1 1 0 0
M 1 0 1 1 0 0
N 0 1 1 1 0 0
O 1 1 1 1 0 0
P 0 0 0 0 1 0
Q 1 0 0 0 1 0
R 0 1 0 0 1 0
S 1 1 0 0 1 0
T 0 0 1 0 1 0

Table 9-9. Ident Keyer Codes (Audio Generator 1A8/1A24) (Cont).
U 1 0 1 0 1 0
V 0 1 1 0 1 0
W 1 1 1 0 1 0
X 0 0 0 1 1 0
Y 1 0 0 1 1 0
Z 0 1 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0 1 1 0
2 0 0 1 1 1 0
3 1 0 1 1 1 0
4 0 1 1 1 1 0
5 1 1 1 1 1 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 1
7 1 0 0 0 0 1
8 0 1 0 0 0 1
9 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1
b. Refer to figure 9-15. Verify the position of Audio Generator CCA jumpers are as follows:
E1-E2: Open for a collocated Localizer/DME; Shorted for a Localizer without DME.
E3-E4-E5: E3-E4 shorted for a single-frequency Localizer.
E4-E5 open.
E6-E7-E8: E6-E7 shorted for a single-frequency Localizer.
E7-E8 open.
E9-E10-E11-E12: E9-E10 shorted
E11-E12 shorted
c. Refer to figure 9-9. Install the Audio Generator CCAs (1A8/1A24) into localizer cabinet.
9.7.4.7 Installation of Remaining Modules in Transmitter Cabinet.- Refer to figures 9-9. Install remaining
modules in transmitter cabinet.
9.7.5 Video Terminal Port Baud Rate Setting.- Operation at 1200 baud requires that software handshaking,
using X-ON and X-OFF protocol, be enabled. The video terminal is to be configured with eight data bits,
one stop bit, and no parity.

Figure 9-15. Audio Generator (1A8/1A24) Assembly Component Location Diagram.
9.7.5.1 Video Terminal Hookup.- Refer to paragraph 3.3.1 for initial video terminal/localizer hookup. The
localizer is shipped from the factory with password 7777 and Bypass security code 1111, both which may
be changed by the user. Refer to section 3 for procedures to change system password and security code.
9.7.5.2 Modem Hookup.- Prior to installation the following parameters should be programmed into the
modem to properly communicate with the Localizer system.
NOTE
This procedure may be deferred until after the system has been completely set up and is
ready for ground/flight inspection.

Auto Answer - ON and set to answer on the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd ring as desired.
Result Codes - Displayed.
Result Codes - Numeric and short subset.
DTR - Tracked with system.
Command Echo - Off.
For a typical 2400 baud modem with non-volatile memory, the steps for programming the above parameters
using standard AT commands are shown below. The modem must be connected directly to the terminal or
to a PC with communications software in terminal mode:
1. ATE1 Sets the modem Command Echo ON to display keyboard actions on the terminal.
2. AT&F&W Restores the factory default settings and writes them to non-volatile memory.
3. ATS0=1&W Sets Auto Answer ON, tells the modem to answer on the first ring and writes the
setting to non-volatile memory.
4. ATQ0&W Tells the modem to display result codes and writes the setting to non-volatile
memory.
5. ATV0&W Sets the modem to respond with numeric result codes and writes the setting to non-
volatile memory.
6. ATX0&W Sets the modem to respond with a short subset of the numeric result code and writes
the setting to non-volatile memory.
7. AT&D2&W Sets DTR to track with the Localizer system and writes the setting to non-volatile
memory.
8. ATE0&W Sets the Command Echo OFF and writes the setting to non-volatile memory.
On completion of the steps above, connect the modem to the station. For modem operations, the
LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in the REMOTE position. Localizer operation through the modem is
identical to local terminal operations.
If you are using a modem that used a different command set, refer to the modem operation manual for
specific setup instructions.

9.7.6 Initial Turn-On.- Refer to figure 3-1 and paragraph 3.3.1 to place the localizer in operation. The
localizer is software-controlled, operated by entering a number or series of numbers known as control codes
for operation, control, and maintenance. These codes are entered on a video terminal. Interface between
the localizer and the video terminal is via standard RS-232 protocol.
a. Place 25 watt element in course CSB wattmeter body to measure forward power.
b. Connect wattmeter to course CSB wattmeter body.
d. Monitor the course CSB power output. Wattmeter will initially show full deflection and drop to
approximately 15 W within 5 seconds. If wattmeter shows full deflection after 5 seconds, remove
power immediately and refer to paragraph 9.7.6.1.
e. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
f. Place 1 watt element in course SBO wattmeter body to measure forward power.
g. Connect wattmeter to course SBO wattmeter body.
h. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
i. Monitor the course SBO power output. Wattmeter should initially show full deflection and drop to
approximately 400 mW within 5 seconds. If wattmeter shows full deflection after 5 seconds, remove
j. Place 25 watt element in clearance CSB wattmeter body to measure forward power.
k. Connect wattmeter to clearance CSB wattmeter body.
l. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
m. Monitor the clearance CSB power output. Wattmeter will initially show full deflection and drop to
approximately 15 W within 5 seconds. If wattmeter shows full deflection after 5 seconds, remove
n. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
o. Place 1 watt element in clearance SBO wattmeter body to measure forward power.
p. Connect wattmeter to clearance SBO wattmeter body.
q. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.

r. Monitor the clearance SBO power output. Wattmeter should initially show full deflection and drop
to approximately 400 mW within 5 seconds. If wattmeter shows full deflection after 5 seconds,
remove power immediately and refer to paragraph 9.7.6.2.
s. If the course/clearance CSB and SBO powers are approximately 15 W and 400 mW as detailed,
proceed to steps (d) thru (g) followed by steps (q), (v), and (w) in paragraph 9.7.6.1 and 9.7.6.2 in
sequence.
9.7.6.1 Initial Course Turn-On Adjustments.- This procedure is performed whenever system is initially
turned on and output power exceeds anticipated output.
b. Loosen 1/4 turn fastener securing Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7) and pull out Power Amplifier
Assembly approximately 2 inches.
NOTE
When AC and DC circuit breakers are placed in the ON position the transmitter will come
up in Alarm. The system must be placed into Bypass before system shuts down.
f Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation. Verify the BYPASS LED illuminates. Note also
that the ALARM LED is illuminated.
NOTE
The security code must be entered within 5 seconds after receiving the ENTER SECURITY
CODE prompt or the station will respond with ACCESS DENIED.
h. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) monitor and record the DAC count
of the course CSB power output.
i. Decrease DAC count to approximately half of its original value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "100"
command.

j. Enter control code "101" (Set Course SBO Power Output Only), monitor and record the DAC count
of the course SBO power output.
k. Decrease DAC count to approximately half of its original value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "101"
command.
l. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
m. Secure Course Power Amplifier Assembly (1A7).
n. Place 25 watt element in course CSB wattmeter body to measure forward power.
o. Connect wattmeter to course CSB wattmeter body.
p. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
q. Log-On to system and place it into Bypass.
r. Monitor the course CSB power output. Wattmeter will initially show full deflection and drop to an
undetermined value within 5 seconds.
s. Place 5 watt element in course SBO wattmeter body to measure forward power.
t. Connect wattmeter to course SBO wattmeter body.
u. Monitor the course SBO power output. Wattmeter should indicate an undetermined output power
of less than 5 W.
v. Using control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) set the CSB output power to 15 W
as seen on the wattmeter.
w. Using control code set "101" (Set Course SBO Only Power Output) set the SBO output power to 400
mW as seen on the wattmeter.
9.7.6.2 Initial Clearance Turn-On Adjustments.- This procedure is performed whenever system is initially
turned on and the clearance output power exceeds anticipated output.
b. Loosen 1/4 turn fastener securing Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23) and pull out Power
Amplifier Assembly approximately 2 inches.

NOTE
When AC and DC circuit breakers are placed in the ON position the transmitter will come
up in Alarm. The system must be placed into Bypass before system shuts down.
f Enter control code "099" (Enter Master Bypass) to enter the Bypass mode of operation. System will
System is now in the Bypass mode of operation. Verify the BYPASS LED illuminates. Note also
that the ALARM LED is illuminated.
NOTE
The security code must be entered within 5 seconds after receiving the ENTER SECURITY
CODE prompt or the station will respond with ACCESS DENIED.
h. Enter control code "102" (Set Clearance CSB/SBO Power Output) monitor and record the DAC
count of the Clearance CSB power output.
i. Decrease DAC count to approximately half of its original value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "102"
command.
j. Enter control code "103" (Set Clearance SBO Power Output Only), monitor and record the DAC
count of the clearance SBO power output.
k. Decrease DAC count to approximately half of its original value. Use "CTRL J" to exit the "103"
command.
l. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
m. Secure Clearance Power Amplifier Assembly (1A23).
n. Place 5 watt element in clearance CSB wattmeter body to measure forward power.
o. Connect wattmeter to clearance CSB wattmeter body.
p. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
q. Log-On to system and place it into Bypass.

r. Monitor the clearance CSB power output. Wattmeter will initially show full deflection and drop to
an undetermined value within 5 seconds.
s. Place 100 mW element in clearance SBO wattmeter body to measure forward power.
t. Connect wattmeter to clearance SBO wattmeter body.
u. Monitor the clearance SBO power output. Wattmeter should indicate an undetermined output power
of less than 100 mW.
v. Using control code "102" (Set Clearance CSB/SBO Power Output) set the CSB output power to 15
Watts as seen on the wattmeter.
w. Using control code set "103" (Set Clearance SBO Only Power Output) set the SBO output power
to 400 mW as seen on the wattmeter.
9.7.7 Setting Modulation Percentage.- This paragraph details the step required to set the Course and
Clearance Modulation percentage. Paragraph 9.7.7.1 details the procedure to set the Course Modulation
percentage and paragraph 9.7.7.2 details the procedure to set the Clearance Modulation percentage.
9.7.7.1 Setting Course Modulation Percentage.-
a. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
b. Log-on to system and place system into Bypass.
c. Place sniffer element into course CSB wattmeter body.
d. Using a test cable, connect sniffer element to Portable ILS Receiver (PIR).
e. Set PIR to monitor SDM (Total Modulation).
f. Using control code "135" (Read DDM Setting), verify the modulation balance is set to "0". If the
modulation balance is not, set it to "0" using control code 138 (Set Modulation Balance).
g. Using control code "120" (Set CSB Modulation), set CSB modulation level to 40%.
9.7.7.2 Setting Clearance Modulation Percentage.-
a. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
b. Log-on to system and place system into Bypass.

c. Place sniffer element into clearance CSB wattmeter body.
d. Using a test cable, connect sniffer element to PIR.
e. Set PIR to monitor SDM (Total Modulation).
f. Using control code "267" (Read DDM Setting), verify the modulation balance is set to "0". If not,
set it to "0" using control code 617 (Set Modulation Balance).
g. Using control code "129" (Set CSB Modulation), set CSB modulation level to 40%.
9.7.8 Audio Generator SBO Output Check.- This procedure sets up the system Sideband-Only (SBO) signal
output for correct carrier suppression. This procedure must be repeated for the clearance transmitter.
a. Adjust potentiometer 1A8/1A24R39 fully CCW, then adjust it clockwise (CW) until the SBO power
(indicated on external wattmeter) increases. Slowly adjust R39 CCW until the SBO power just stops
decreasing, then adjust it 1/2 to 3/4 further CCW or to the fully CCW stop, whichever occurs first.
No further adjustment of this potentiometer is required.
b. Refer to figure 9-16. Place oscilloscope probe on Test Point 1 (TP1) of 1A7/1A23 Power Amplifier
assembly. If SBO waveform is clipped or has spikes (see figures 9-17 and 9-18) adjust
potentiometer 1A8/1A24R66 for proper oscilloscope display. This adjusts for exactly 100%
modulation of the SBO signal by the 90 Hz minus 150 Hz audio waveform and results in maximum
carrier suppression in the SBO output.

Greater than 100% modulation results in clipping of the SBO waveform (figure 9-17). Less than
100% modulation results in spiking (figure 9-18) and unwanted carrier in the SBO output.
c. Refer to figure 9-19. Place oscilloscope probe on TP2 on the 1A5 Modulator assembly. Adjust
potentiometer 1A8/1A24R67 for minimum bounce of the five-finger SBO waveform (figure 9-20).
This adjusts the bi-phase switch drive for a constant amplitude RF output from the switch on
alternate zero crossings of the 90 Hz minus 150 Hz audio modulating signal.
NOTE
The oscilloscope sweep speed must be adjusted to 60 Hz as for a 90 Hz/150 Hz kissing

pattern for this adjustment. Refer to figure 9-20 for a misadjusted 1A8/1A24R67 waveform.


Figure 9-19. Modulator (1A5) Assembly Component Location Diagram.


9.7.9 Modulation Balance Check.-
a. Connect oscilloscope probe to test point TP2 of the Power Amplifier Assembly 1A7/1A23.
b. Figure 9-22 is the normal kissing pattern for TP2. If display appears as seen in figure in 9-23, adjust
modulation balance, using control codes 138 for the course transmitter or 617 for the clearance
transmitter to compensate.
Figure 9-22. Normal Kissing Pattern (0 DDM).
Figure 9-23. 90 Hz Modulation is more than 150 Hz Modulation.
c. If display appears as seen in figure 9-24 adjust modulation balance, using control codes 138 for
course transmitter or 617 for clearance transmitter to compensate.

Figure 9-24. 150 Hz Modulation is more than 90 Hz Modulation.
9.7.10 RF Forward Power, Reflected RF Power, and VSWR Checks.- Refer to section 6 for procedures to
check RF Power and VSWR using the video terminal.
9.7.11 Modulation Percentage and Keying Checks.- Refer to section 6 for procedures to check modulation
and keying using the video terminal.
9.7.12 Preliminary Antenna Feedcable Length Adjustment.- Performance of this procedure establishes a
minimum phasing spread at the antenna inputs prior to cutting-in the individual pair nulls. The cable lengths
must be adjusted in order to minimize pair-to-pair phase difference at the inputs to the antennas.
b. Disconnect course/clearance SBO feedcable from transmitter SBO course/clearance output

connector and terminate bulkhead connector with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
d. Enter control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) and set course CSB output power
to 12 watts as seen on the wattmeter.
f. Connect test setup as shown in figure 9-25. Connect directional coupler in the course CSB line
between course CSB wattmeter body and the course CSB feedcable that goes to the distribution unit.

g. Connect 30db attenuator to forward port of directional coupler.
Figure 9-25. Cable Length Adjustment Test Setup.
h. Connect vector voltmeter A probe to Tee connector.
i. Connect course SBO feedcable to vector voltmeter tee connector through 30 db attenuator.
j. Connect vector voltmeter B probe to tee connector.
k. At the distribution unit, disconnect course SBO cable from distribution unit course SBO connector
J2.
l. Remove the course CSB feedcable from the distribution unit course CSB connector J1 and place it
on distribution unit course SBO connector J2. Terminate distribution unit course CSB connector
J1 with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
m. Disconnect all antenna feedcables from their antennae and dummy load with 50 ohm, 5 watt loads.
n. Remove dummy load from feedcable that goes to antenna 4L and connect one end of the test cable
to 4L antenna feedcable and the other end of the test cable to the course SBO feedcable.

o. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
p. At the shelter adjust the vector voltmeter for a phase reference of zero on all phase sensitivity scales.
Adjust the offset range control to allow insertion of 180E of phase shift.
q. Measure and record the phase differential (cable length) of each antenna cable 1L through 7L.
r. Insert 180E of phase offset using the offset adjustment on the vector voltmeter.
s. Measure and record the phase differential of antenna cables 1R through 7R).
t. Compare the readings to determine the shortest RF cable length.
u. Using the shortest cable as a reference, trim all the antenna feedcables on the same side of the array
as the reference to within ±2.5 electrical degrees of the reference.
v. Using the vector voltmeter phase offset control, offset the reference by 180E. Trim all cables on the
other side of the array to ±2.5 electrical degrees of the newly established reference.
w. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position.
x. Return station to normal.
9.7.13 Antenna Monitor Feedcable Length Adjustment.- Performance of this procedure establishes a
minimum phasing spread at the RF combining unit inputs prior to cutting in the monitor. For proper integral
monitor operation, the signals arriving at the RF combining network must have the proper phase relationship
to those of the transmitted signal. The initial cable lengths must be adjusted to minimize the pair-to-pair
phase difference at the inputs to the RF combining unit.
b. Disconnect course/clearance SBO feedcable from transmitter output connectors and terminate
bulkhead connectors with 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load. Disconnect clearance CSB feedcable from
transmitter output and terminate bulkhead connector with a 50 ohm, 5 Watt dummy load.
d. Set course CSB output power to 12 watts as seen on the wattmeter.
f. Connect test setup as shown in figure 9-25, but connect to monitor pickup cables instead of antenna
feedcables. Connect directional coupler in the course CSB line between course CSB wattmeter body
and the course CSB feedcable that goes to the distribution unit.

g. Connect 30 db attenuator to forward port of directional coupler.
h. Connect vector voltmeter A probe to tee connector.
i. Connect course SBO feedcable to vector voltmeter tee connector through 30 db attenuator.
j. Connect vector voltmeter B probe to tee connector.
k. At the distribution unit, disconnect course SBO cable from distribution unit course SBO connector
J2.
l. Remove course CSB feedcable from distribution unit course CSB connector J1 and place it on
distribution unit course SBO connector J2. Terminate distribution unit course CSB connector J1
with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
m. Disconnect all antenna monitor pickup cables from their antennae and dummy load with 50 ohm,
5 watt loads.
n. Remove dummy load from monitor cable that goes to antenna 4L and connect one end test cable to
4L antenna monitor cable and the other end of the test cable to the SBO feedcable.
o. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the ON position.
p. At the shelter adjust the vector voltmeter for a phase reference of zero on all phase sensitivity scales.
Adjust the offset range control to allow insertion of 180E of phase shift.
q. Measure and record the phase differential (cable length) of each antenna cable 1L through 7L.
r. Insert 180E of phase offset using the offset adjustment on the vector voltmeter.
s. Measure and record the phase differential of antenna cables 1R through 7R.
t. Compare the reading to determine the shortest RF cable length.
u. Using the shortest cable as a reference, trim all the antenna monitor cables on the same side of the
array as the reference to within ±2.5 electrical degrees of the reference.
v. Using the vector voltmeter phase offset control, offset the reference by 180E. Trim all cables on the
other side of the array to ±2.5 electrical degrees of the newly established reference.
w. Place system AC and DC circuit breakers to the OFF position and return station to normal.
9.7.14 Cutting In Antenna Nulls.- A minimum of two persons are required to perform this procedure. One
person is required at the antenna site to cut cables and control the transmitter powers. The second person
is required to take null measurements on the runway. Communication is required between the two locations.

This procedure establishes the locations of the null (relative to the runway center line) in the Course SBO
radiation patterns produced by each pair of symmetrically disposed LPD antennas as well as the composite
null produced by all pairs of antennae. Null measurements should normally be made at a distance of at least
1000 feet in front of the array at a surveyed point referenced to the runway centerline. The clearance nulls
are established by the distribution unit phasing and cannot be individually cut. Clearance CSB modulation
balance may need to be adjusted to align the clearance centerline with the runway as determined by flight
check.
NOTE
Due to individual site terrain features the recommended distance at least 1000 feet may not
always be practical. Null measurements should not be attempted at distances closer than 850
ft for a 14 element array. Measurements of individual pair nulls are made to meet the
tolerance of ±1 inch per 100 feet. The composite null must also lie within 1 inch of
centerline for each 100 feet in front of the array at the point of measurement.
a. Insure Course CSB power is calibrated.
b. Move the video terminal to antenna array and connect to field processor.
c. Using control code "119" (Turn Transmitter Off) turn off the transmitter.
d. Disconnect course and clearance SBO cables from distribution unit course and clearance SBO
connectors J2 and J4 and terminate with 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy loads. Disconnect clearance CSB
cable from distribution unit clearance CSB connector J3 and terminate with a 50 ohm, 25 watt
dummy load.
e. Remove Course CSB feedcable from distribution unit course CSB connector J1 and place it on
distribution unit Course SBO connector J2. Terminate distribution unit Course CSB connector J1
with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
f. Refer to LPD Antenna Manual (Part No. 571100-0009). Disconnect feedcable for antenna pairs 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 from distribution unit and terminate distribution unit output connectors with a 50
ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
g. Terminate each of the disconnected antenna feedcables with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
h. Using control code "118" (Turn Transmitter On) turn on the transmitter.
i. Using control code "100" (Set Course CSB/SBO Power Output) set transmitter output power to 2
watts or less. This power level may be verified using a wattmeter with the course CSB feedline at
the distribution unit, but should be accurate as the course CSB output was calibrated in step (a) of
this procedure.
j. Place PIR on a line perpendicular to the surveyed runway centerline.

k. Move PIR back and forth across the runway facing the antenna array.
l. Note the point, with relationship to the runway centerline, at which an RF null occurs. It may be
necessary to "bracket" to null to accurately establish its position.
m. Determine which of the 2 antenna feedcables must be trimmed to shift the RF null to the center of
the runway. If the center of the RF null is located on the 90 Hz side of the runway centerline, the
feedcable to the antenna on the 90 Hz side of the array must be shortened, if the center of the RF null
is located on the 150 Hz side of runway centerline, the feedline to the antenna on the 150 Hz side
of the array must be shortened.
n. To determine how much of the feedcable must be trimmed, insert a type N right angle connector into
the feedcable of the other antenna of the pair and repeat steps j. through m., noting how far the null
has moved. Since a right angle connector is approximately 6.5 electrical degrees long at 110.0 MHz
(physically about 1.25 inches), the required trim length may be calculated by using the following
formula:
1.25B
L'
A
where: L = length of the feedline to be trimmed in inches.
B = original distance of the null from centerline in inches.
A = distance, in inches, null moved with right angle connector in place.
For example, if the null is originally 15 inches from centerline on the 90 Hz side, and inserting the
right angle connector moves the null to 45 inches on the 150 Hz side of centerline, the feedline to
the antenna on the 90 Hz side of the pair must be shortened 5/16 of an inch.
NOTE
Whenever a feedcable must be trimmed, use caution to avoid over cutting. Measure the
feedline trim length with a scale graduated in tenths of inches with the connector removed
(reference point for measurement is always the end of the center conductor with its pin
removed). After the cut has been made, redress new feedcable end very carefully and neatly
prior to reassembly of connector. Insure proper solder flow when reinstalling center pin.
o. After the proper antenna feedcable has been trimmed, recheck RF null to insure that RF null is
within ±1 inch of centerline for each 100 feet in front of the array. If RF null is not in the proper
place recut antenna feedcables.
p. Once RF null has be cut to the proper position, turn the transmitter OFF using control code "119".

q. Perform steps (f) thru (o) on antenna pairs 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.
r. When all the trimming has been completed reconnect all antenna feedcables to their proper antennas
and check runway centerline for position of composite RF null. Composite null must be within ±
1 inch of centerline for each 100 feet in front of the array the check is made from.
9.7.15 System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment.-
9.7.15.1 Course System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment.- A minimum of two persons
are required to preform this procedure. One person is required at the transmitter site to set transmitter
powers and place the system in quadrature. The second person is required to take PIR measurements at the
far field ground check points. Communication is required between the two locations.
a. Using control code "020" (Read Course CSB Forward Power) verify the course CSB power is 15
watts as seen on the wattmeter. If necessary, set course power output to 15 Watts.
b. Using control code "105" (Turn CLR Transmitter Off), turn off the clearance transmitter.
Disconnect the clearance CSB and SBO feedcables and dummy load both the feedcables and the
transmitter outputs.
c. Connect the PIR to the course CSB feedline wattmeter body.
d. Verify the modulation balance is adjusted to "0" DDM and modulation is adjusted for 20% (each
tone) as seen on the PIR.
e. Adjust the course SBO output to a nominal value of approximately 200 mW as seen on the station
wattmeter.
f. Position the PIR at the course far field width checkpoint on the 90 Hz side of the runway centerline.
g. Remove the course SBO feedcable from the station wattmeter body and terminate both the
transmitter output and the SBO feedcable with a 50 ohm load.
h. Note the DDM reading on the PIR.
i. Insert the station 90E line section in the course SBO feedcable and adjust the course station phaser
for the same DDM reading as observed in step (g). Verify the reading can be reached within the
range of the course phaser. If not, trim either the course CSB or SBO feedcable as necessary so the
course phaser is within ±20E of its center position when the reference DDM value is reached.
j. Remove the 90E line section and check for correct sensing on the PIR. The PIR must indicate a
strong 90 Hz signal. If sensing is incorrect, trim 180E from the course SBO feedcable to correct the
problem and readjust the system as described above.

k. Adjust the course SBO output power for a reading of 0.155 DDM on the PIR. This will be a
preliminary setting and will be verified and/or adjusted during flight inspection.
l. Position the PIR at the far field centerline checkpoint. Verify a reading of approximately 0 DDM.
m. With the PIR at the far filed centerline checkpoint, measure the course RF power and record it.
n. Position the PIR at the course width checkpoint on the 150 Hz side of the runway. Verify a reading
of approximately 0.155 DDM.
o. Remove the dummy loads and re-connect the clearance CSB and SBO feedcables. Use control code
"104" (Turn CLR Transmitter On) to turn on the clearance transmitter.
9.7.15.2 Clearance System Phasing and Preliminary Course Width Adjustment.- A minimum of two persons
are required to preform this procedure. One person is required at the transmitter site to set transmitter
powers and place the system in quadrature. The second person is required to take PIR measurements at the
far field ground check points. Communication is required between the two locations.
a. Using control code "260" (Read Clearance CSB Forward Power) verify the clearance CSB power
is 12 watts as seen on the wattmeter. If necessary, set clearance power output to 12 watts. Using
control code "519" turn off the course transmitter.
b. Disconnect the course CSB and SBO feedcables and dummy load both the feedcables and the
transmitter outputs.
c. Connect the PIR to the clearance CSB feedline wattmeter body.
d. Verify the modulation balance is adjusted to "0" DDM and modulation is adjusted for 20% (each
tone) as seen on the PIR.
e. Adjust the clearance SBO output to a nominal value of approximately 200 mW as seen on the station
wattmeter.
f. Position the PIR at the clearance far field width checkpoint on the 90 Hz side of the runway
centerline.
g. Remove the clearance SBO feedcable from the station wattmeter body and terminate both the
transmitter output and the clearance SBO feedcable with a 50 ohm load.
h. Note the DDM reading on the PIR.
i. Insert the station 90E line section in the clearance SBO feedcable and adjust the clearance station
phaser for the same DDM reading as observed in step (g). Verify the reading can be reached within
the range of the clearance phaser. If not, trim either the clearance CSB or SBO feedcable as
necessary so the clearance phaser is within ±20E of its center position when the reference DDM
value is reached.

j. Remove the 90E line section and check for correct sensing on the PIR. The PIR must indicate a
strong 90 Hz signal. If sensing is incorrect, trim 180E from the clearance SBO feedcable to correct
the problem and readjust the system as described above.
k. Adjust the Clearance SBO output power for a reading of 0.155 DDM on the PIR. This will be a
preliminary setting and will be verified and/or adjusted during flight inspection.
l. Position the PIR at the far field centerline checkpoint. Verify a reading of approximately 0 DDM.
m. With the PIR at the far filed centerline checkpoint, measure the clearance RF power and record it.
n. Using control code "102" (Set Clearance CSB Power), adjust the clearance RF Power to be 10 dB
lower than the course measured in paragraph 9.7.15.1.
o. Position the PIR at the course width checkpoint on the 150 Hz side of the runway. Verify a reading
of approximately 0.155 DDM. Adjust the clearance SBO output power for a reading of 0.155 DDM
on the PIR.
p. Remove the dummy loads and re-connect the course CSB and SBO feedcables. Use control code
"518" (Turn Course Transmitter On) to turn on the course transmitter.
9.7.16 Cutting-In The Monitor.-
a. Insure that all system connections are normal, transmitter output levels are normal, and the
transmitting system is properly cut-in and phased.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to cut-in the monitor until the transmitting system is properly adjusted.
Using control code "105", turn the clearance the transmitter off. For best results, disconnect
and dummy load the clearance CSB and SBO feedcables and transmitter outputs.
b. Connect the PIR to course CSB output connector J1 of RF combining network.
c. Disconnect monitor cables for antenna pairs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 from the RF combining network and
terminate with a 50 ohm, 5 watt dummy load.
d. Terminate the RF combining network inputs for antenna pairs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 with a 50 ohm, 5
watt dummy load.
e. Measure the course CSB DDM with PIR.

f. Determine which of the 2 antenna monitor cables must be trimmed to shift PIR DDM reading to
0.000. If the reading indicates 90 Hz, the monitor cable to the antenna on the 90 Hz side of the array
must be shortened. If the reading indicates 150 Hz, the monitor cable to the antenna on the 150 Hz
side of the array must be shortened.
g. To determine how much of the monitor cable must be removed, insert a type N right angle connector
into the monitor cable of the other antenna of the pair and repeat steps (e) and (f), noting how far
much the DDM reading has moved. Since the right angle connector is approximately 6.5 electrical
degrees long at 110.0 MHz (physically about 1.25 inches), the required trim length may be calculated
by using the following formula:
1.25B
L'
A
where: L = length of the monitor cable to be trimmed in inches.

B = original DDM reading.
A = amount DDM reading shifted with right angle connector in place.
NOTE
Whenever a monitor cable must be trimmed, use caution to avoid over cutting. Measure the
monitor cable trim length with a scale graduated in tenths of inches with the connector
removed (reference point for measurement is always the end of the center conductor with
its pin removed). After the cut has been made, redress new monitor cable end very carefully
and neatly prior to reassembly of connector. Insure proper solder flow when reinstalling
center pin.
h. After the proper antenna monitor cable has been trimmed, recheck DDM reading to insure that
reading indicates 0.000 ±0.002 DDM. If reading is not within tolerance recut antenna monitor cable.
i. Perform steps (c) thru (h) on antenna pairs 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.
j. Remove dummy loads and reconnect all antenna monitor cables to the RF combining network.
Measure the composite DDM with the PIR. Verify the DDM is 0.000 ±0.002.
k. Reconnect the cable from the RF combining network to the monitor combining network.
9.7.17 Monitor Combining Unit and Detector Adjustment.-
a. Using control code "102" ("105"), turn off the Clearance (Course) transmitter.

b. Disconnect the path cable from the MRU to the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector.
c. Connect the PIR to the Course (Clearance) centerline output on the MRU.
d. Verify the DDM is 0.000.
e. Reconnect the path cable to the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector. Connect an oscilloscope
probe to the centerline output of the Detector. Adjust the oscilloscope to measure DC and position
the trace at the bottom of the display.
f. Adjust attenuator AT1 inside the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector to provide an unclipped
centerline audio signal with a peak (DC + audio) voltage of 8 volts.
g. Disconnect the width cable from the MRU to the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector and connect
the PIR in it's place.
h. Insert the 90E line section in the Course (Clearance) transmitter SBO feedcable and adjust the
Course (Clearance) Monitor Recombining Unit Sideband Phaser for a reading of 0.000 DDM on the
PIR.
i. Remove the 90E line section and verify proper sensing. The PIR will indicate a strong 150
predominate signal. If the phasing is not correct, trim 180E from the Course (Clearance) SBO cable
from the splitters at the RF combining unit to the monitor recombining unit.
NOTE
The CSB and SBO cables from the RF splitters at the outputs of the RF Combining Unit
differ in length by approximately 180E. Reverse the two cables and repeat steps (h) and (i)
before trimming.
j. Set the jumpers on the Course (Clearance) Monitor Recombining Unit STEP ATTENUATOR to
obtain a DDM reading, on the PIR, as close as possible to -0.155 DDM. A reading within ± 0.010
DDM will be attainable with jumpers. The difference between the reading obtained and -0.155
DDM is compensated for by using the monitor offset.
NOTE
When setting the attenuator jumpers, a jumper must be installed at either the "IN" position
or the "OUT" position for each attenuator value. Do not leave an attenuator value without
a jumper in one of the two positions.
k. Reconnect the width cable from the MRU to the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector. Connect an
oscilloscope probe to the detector width output. Adjust the oscilloscope to measure DC and position
the trace at the bottom of the display.

l. Adjust attenuator AT2 inside the Course (Clearance) Integral Detector to provide an unclipped width
audio signal with a peak (DC + audio) voltage of 8 volts.
m. Repeat steps (a) thru (l) for the Clearance Integral Detector.
9.7.18 Setting Station Parameters.-
a. Using control codes, the following limits should be set into the monitor before flight inspection to
verify the integrity of the monitoring system. Note that many of these are flight inspection limits
and must be tightened or re-adjusted accordingly following flight inspection.
FUNCTION CONTROL CODES VALUE/(ENTER)

(read/set)
Centerline Position Alarm 41/51 0.015/(15)
Centerline Position Offset 180/160 0 Note(1)
Centerline RF Level Alarm 40/50 Note(2)
Course Width Wide Alarm 44/54 -0.130/(130)
Course Width Narrow Alarm 45/55 -0.180/(180)
Course Width DDM Offset 181/161 Note(3)
Course Width RF Level Alarm 42/52 Note(4)
Course SDM Alarm - Upper 43/53 44.0%/(440)
Course SDM Alarm - Lower 46/56 36.0%/(360)
Course CSB VSWR Alarm 48/58 2.0:1/(200) Note(5)
Course SBO VSWR Alarm 49/59 2.0:1/(200) Note(5)
Course Ident Level Alarm 47/57 10
Course PA DC Current 68/61 6.0 A/(6000) Note(5)
Clearance Centerline Position Alarm 211/01 0.015/(15)
Clearance Centerline Position Offset 195/175 0 Note(1)
Clearance Centerline RF Level Alarm 210/200 Note(2)
Clearance Width Wide Alarm 216/06 -0.130/(130)
Clearance Width Narrow Alarm 15/205 -0.180/(180)
Clearance Width DDM Offset 196/176 Note(3)
Clearance Width RF Level Alarm 214/204 Note(4)
Clearance SDM Alarm - Upper 212/202 44.0%/(440)
Clearance SDM Alarm - Lower 213/203 36.0%/(360)
Clearance CSB VSWR Alarm 248/258 2.0:1/(200) Note(5)
Clearance SBO VSWR Alarm 249/259 2.0:1/(200) Note(5)
Clearance Ident Level Alarm 247/257 10
Primary AC Voltage 69/62 96.0 V/(960) Note(5)
Clearance PA DC Current 763/773 6.0 A/(6000) Note(5)
DME Status Voltage 66/63 -10 V/(64536)
Shelter Temp Alarm - Upper 65/64 +40.0 Deg/(400) Note(5)
Shelter Temp Alarm - Lower 67/60 -10.0 Deg/(64536) Note(5)

NOTES
(1) Course/Clearance Centerline Position Offset - The normal setting for this parameter is "0"
and should result in a course monitor indication of "0" DDM. This value should agree with
the value measured with the PIR on the runway centerline in the far field. If the two values
don't agree, insert an offset value to bring the monitor into agreement with the far field value.
THIS STEP IS REQUIRED FOR ACCURATE TRACKING OF THE MONITOR WHEN
THE COURSE IS SHIFTED TO THE ALARM LIMITS.
(2) Course/Clearance Centerline RF Level Alarm - Adjust the transmitter CSB output power to
the low alarm limit; normally 3 dB down from the nominal output power. Read the Course
RF level (030/220) and adjust the Course RF Level Alarm point to a value equal to or
slightly higher than the value read. With the transmitter still adjusted to its 3 dB alarm point,
adjust the Width RF level alarm as in "4" below.
(3) Course/Clearance Width DDM Offset - This parameter is used to compensate for the
difference, if any, between the width DDM value obtained after setting the attenuator
switches in the Monitor Combining unit in the antenna system and the desired monitoring
value which is normally -0.155 DDM. The ideal offset value is "0".
(4) Course/Clearance Width RF Level Alarm - With the transmitter CSB output power set to the
low power alarm limit as in "2" above, read the width RF level (32/222) and set the Width
RF Level Alarm point to a value well below the value read. This will insure that the Course
monitor alarms well before the width monitor on power reduction.
(5) Requires scaling or calibration of the parameter reading before a monitor alarm check can
be accomplished.
9.7.19 Setting/Checking Station Alarm Delays.- The function of the auto-restart is to attempt to return the
facility to service shortly after it has shut down due to alarm condition. The function of the auto-reset is to
attempt to return the facility to service several minutes after an auto-restart has failed to return the facility
to service. When an alarm condition occurs, a short delay takes place before the facility shuts down. This
time delay is called the Shutdown Delay. The equipment will remain OFF until a longer delay, called the
auto-restart delay occurs. After the auto-restart delays, the facility will attempt to return itself to service.
The facility will continue to operate if the alarm condition has cleared. If however, if the alarm condition
persists, the equipment will again shutdown. After a much-longer delay has elapsed, the auto-reset will
attempt to return the equipment to service. If this attempt fails, the equipment will remain OFF the air until
manually reset.
9.7.19.1 Setting/Checking Alarm Delay, Auto-Restart and Startup Delay Times.-
a. Using control codes 027/079 (display/set), verify the alarm delay time is set to a maximum of 1
second.

b. Using control codes 026/078 (display/set), verify the auto-restart delay time is set to a minimum of
20 seconds.
c. Using control codes 029/076 (display/set), verify the transfer delay time is set to a minimum of 20
seconds.
d. Using control codes 227/279 (display/set), verify the startup delay time is set to a maximum of 5
seconds.
e. With both main and standby systems out of bypass, disconnect the course transmitter SBO output
line to induce an executive alarm condition and allow the system to shut down. Shutdown will occur
after the Alarm Delay Time as elapsed.
f. The standby transmitter will start following the 20 second transfer delay time.
g. Disconnect the standby Course transmitter SBO output line to induce an executive alarm condition.
The system will shut down following the alarm delay time.
h. Allow the system to attempt a re-start. The re-start will occur after the auto-restart delay time has
elapsed. The system will shut down again following the startup delay time.
i. While the system is shut down, re-connect the course transmitter SBO output line to correct the
alarm condition.
j. The system will re-start at the end of 5 minutes and come up in a normal condition.
9.7.19.2 Setting/Checking Alarm Clear Time.- The modems or Communications Control Unit must be
connected to the system and to a telephone line/s for this check.
a. Using control codes 029/075 (display/set), verify the alarm clear time is set to a recommended value
of 120 seconds.
b. With the system out of bypass, disconnect the course transmitter SBO output line to induce an
executive alarm condition. Allow the transmitter to shut down and transfer to the standby system.
Reconnect the Course SBO line immediately after the shutdown to correct the alarm condition. The
modem will go off-hook, dial the telephone number programmed into the system, transmit the
shutdown/transfer message on connection with the remote modem and hang up.
c. After the standby system starts and normalizes, disconnect the standby transmitter course SBO line
to induce an alarm condition. Allow the system to shut down. Reconnect the course SBO line
immediately after the shutdown to correct the alarm condition. The modem will go off-hook, dial
the telephone number programmed into the system, transmit the shutdown message on connection
with the remote modem and hang up.

d. After the standby system restarts and normalizes, again disconnect the standby transmitter course
SBO line to induce an alarm condition. Allow the system to shut down. Reconnect the course SBO
line immediately after the shutdown to correct the alarm condition. No dial-out to the remote
location will occur. This indicates the dial-out function has been inhibited by the Alarm Clear Delay
function.
e. After the standby system restarts and normalizes, wait for more than two minutes to allow the alarm
clear delay timer to time out and re-introduce the alarm condition. The system will dial out.
9.8 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION TESTS.- Refer to Section 7 for a procedure that verifies that each
of the control codes correctly performs its designated function and that no false responses are generated.
The procedures for using the video terminal (and control codes) are addressed. The complete control code
listing for single system equipment, listed sequentially, is shown in table 3-2, single system control codes,
grouped by function, are shown in table 3-3. The complete control code listing for dual system equipment,
listed sequentially, is shown in table 3-4, dual system control codes, grouped by function, are shown in table
3-5.


SECTION 10. SOFTWARE
10.1 INTRODUCTION.- Software documentation contains proprietary information and such information
is not applicable to this manual.


SECTION 11. TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA
11.1 INTRODUCTION.- This section contains wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, system interconnect
wiring diagram, and power distribution diagrams. Refer to table 11-1 for page and figure numbers.
Table 11-1. Diagrams.
Description Part Number Figure Page
Capture Effect Localizer, 1100-063 11-1 11-3

Block Diagram
Capture-Effect Localizer Transmitter, 001100-9202 11-2 11-5

Interconnection Diagram
Transfer Control Unit, 030603-0001 11-3 11-7

Interconnection Diagram
Synthesizer (1A6/1A22), Schematic Diagram 030579-9001 11-4 11-9
Synthesizer CCA (1A6A1/1A22A1), 012752-9001 11-5 11-11

Schematic Diagram
Synthesizer Amplifier CCA (1A6A2/1A22A2), 012753-9001 11-6 11-13

Schematic Diagram
Power Amplifier (1A7/1A23), 030295-9001 11-7 11-15

Schematic Diagram
Audio Generator CCA (1A8/1A24), 012542-9001 11-8 11-17

Schematic Diagram
Modulator Assembly (1A5), 030296-9001 11-9 11-19

Schematic Diagram
RF Control CCA (1A9/1A25), 012543-9001 11-10 11-21

Schematic Diagram
Microprocessor (1A12), Schematic Diagram 012595-9001 11-11 11-23
Analog I/O CCA (1A13), Schematic Diagram 012506-9001 11-12 11-25
VIA D/A CCA (1A14), Schematic Diagram 012540-9001 11-13 11-27

Table 11-1. Diagrams (Cont).
Description Part Number Figure Page
Serial I/O CCA (1A11), Schematic Diagram 012772-9001 11-14 11-29
Power Panel Assembly (1A27), (Sheet 3 only) 030297-9001 11-15 11-31

Schematic Diagram
Voltage and Scaling CCA (1A27A1), 012547-9001 11-16 11-33

Schematic Diagram
Input Power Monitor/Watchdog (1A27A2), 012406-9004 11-17 11-35

Schematic Diagram
Low-Voltage Power Supply (1A10/1A26), 012670-9001 11-18 11-37

Schematic Diagram
Phaser Assembly (1A3/1A4), 030292-9001 11-19 11-39

Schematic Diagram
Display CCA (1A1A1), Schematic Diagram 012512-9002 11-20 11-41
Current Limiter (1A31), Schematic Diagram 030347-9001 11-21 11-43
Power Sensor Assembly (1A34), 030602-9001 11-22 11-45

Schematic Diagram
Synthesizer Coupler Module (1A35/1A36) 030601-9001 11-23 11-47
ILS Control Interface (3A4/3A5), 012713-9001 11-24 11-49

Schematic Diagram
Transfer Logic CCA 012771-9001 11-25 11-51
Exterior Interface Box Installation ---------------- 11-26 11-53
Temperature Sensor Assembly 030313-9001 11-27 11-55
Localizer/TCU Interconnect Diagram 502003-9001 11-28 11-57
Battery Back-up Installation Kit 470057 11-29 11-59
Transmitter Hinge Assembly, 470288 11-30 11-61

Installation Kit

0202

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

0202

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Operations & Maintenance Manual

Manual P/N 571100-0202

Equipment Part Number 001100-0202 (Dual)

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND SUCH

Original Issue January 1995

Copyright, Airport Systems International, Inc., 1995

AIRPORT SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, INC.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Page No. Issue Page No. Issue

Title January, 1995 10-1 January, 1995

Airport Systems International, Inc.

Rev. - January, 1995 Effective Pages 1

Effective Pages 2 Rev. - January, 1995

Rev. - January, 1995 Record of Revision 1

Record of Revision 2 Rev. - January, 1995

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES PRECAUTIONS

KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE

MODEL 1100 CAPTURE-EFFECT LOCALIZER

HOW TO ORDER REPLACEMENT PARTS

2. Unit sub-assembly number (where applicable).

3. Item or reference symbol number from parts list or schematic.

4. Airport Systems International, Inc. part number and description.

5. Manufacturer's code, name and part number (where applicable).

6. Quantity of each replacement part required.

AIRPORT SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, INC.

AIRPORT SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, INC.

AIRPORT SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, INC.

I. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED

J. CUSTOMER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF THE WARRANTY SHALL BE

SECTION 1. GENERAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS

Paragraph Description Page

1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Rev. - January, 1995 i

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (Cont)

Paragraph Description Page

2.2.1 Capture-Effect Localizer Station Simplified Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

ii Rev. - January, 1995

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION 3. OPERATION (Cont)

Paragraph Description Page

3.3.1 Turn-on Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Rev. - January, 1995 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION 3. OPERATION (Cont)

Paragraph Description Page

3.8.15.2 Clearance Signal Ident Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

SECTION 4. STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES

4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION 5. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

iv Rev. - January, 1995

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (Cont)

Paragraph Description Page

6.2.7 RF Amplifier Power Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Rev. - January, 1995 v

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION 6. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (Cont)

Paragraph Description Page